Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual PDF

ENGINEERED HEAT TRANSFER SYSTEMS
WET SURFACE AIR COOLER

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
Prepared for:
NOM (UK) LTD
BUA Group, EDO Cement Company Ltd.
Model: A4412”L” WSAC
Niagara Blower Co. S.O. No. 25600

Niagara Blower Co. Serial No. 18-25600
NIAGARA BLOWER COMPANY

91 SAWYER AVE., TONAWANDA, NY 14150
PH: (716)-875-2000 FAX: (716)-875-1077
e-mail: sales@niagarablower.com
Web page: http://www.niagarablower.com
Prepared By: PHP Date: 9/6/18

Sales Engineer: TR Date: 9/7/18
Operations Manager: JK Date: 9/7/18
Niagara Blower Company
Wet Surface Air-Cooler
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1: Handling and Rigging Instructions
Section 1A: Lifting and Rigging Diagram
Section 2: Assembly Instructions
Section 2A: Sealer Tape and Caulk Instructions
Section 2B: Method of Assembly Instructions
Section 2C: Method of Assembly Diagram
Section 3: Installation Instructions
Section 3A: Coil Connection Allowable Loads
Section 4: Operating Instructions
Section 4A: Operator Instructions and Control Principles
Section 5: Maintenance Instructions
Section 5A: WSAC System Maintenance
Section 5B: Replacement Spare Parts – Aftermarket Quotation
Section 6: Equipment Drawings
Section 7: Other Literature

Engineered Heat Transfer Systems
91 Sawyer Ave.  Tonawanda, New York 14150
PHONE: (716) 875-2000  FAX: (716) 875-1077
www.niagarablower.com
SECTION 1
HANDLING AND RIGGING INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA. DESCRIPTION
1 GENERAL
2 LIFTING AND RIGGING - UNIT
3 LIFTING AND RIGGING - FAN ASSEMBLY
4 LIFTING AND RIGGING – COILS
1A LIFTING AND RIGGING DIAGRAM – D114884

1 -GENERAL
All Niagara machines are shipped as a complete assembly or in as few

sub-assemblies as practical to minimize field assembly requirements, depending upon
shipping and job site conditions.
CHECK ALL MATERIAL RECEIVED AGAINST "BILL OF LADING" WITHIN 48

HOURS. REPORT ANY SHORTAGE OR DAMAGE TO TRANSPORTATION
COMPANY.
Occasionally, equipment which is shipped F.O.B. Niagara Blower Company

arrives at the unloading site with damage incurred by the carrier. Niagara Blower
Company has instituted a practice of taking photographs of every unit shipped when the
unit or sub-assembly is in place on the truck and/or trailer. The photographs are
identified with the date, our shop order number, and the vehicle license number and
state for insurance purposes.
It would be advisable, in cases where shipping damage is noted, to take the

precaution of photographing the equipment prior to unloading. The photographs should
be identified in the same manner as Niagara Blower's photographs. If necessary, a
comparison of these photos will help substantiate a valid claim made by you against the
carrier.
The method of handling the unit, sub-assemblies, or sections will largely be

governed by the erection site conditions. In general, a "Boom Derrick" or "Crane" will
provide the best means of handling the assembly. When the use of a crane or derrick is
not practical, it may be necessary to roll or block various parts into position. If so, it is
better to leave the sub assemblies on the shipping skids, roll into, and jack into position
on temporary blocking. After the pieces are in proper position, lower the remaining
blocking and skids into place one at a time.
SHIPPING SKIDS ARE NOT ADEQUATE FOR SUPPORT WHEN USING FORK
LIFT EQUIPMENT, NOR SHOULD YOU ATTEMPT TO LIFT WITH FORKS PLACED
AT ANY POSITION OTHER THAN AT THE LOAD BEARING POINTS OF THE
ASSEMBLY, SUB-ASSEMBLY OR PART.
Lifting at points other than these load-bearing points might distort the piece such
that the distortion might cause improper alignment of watertight flanged joints, leading
to operational difficulties.
pg. 1
2 - LIFTING AND RIGGING - UNIT
Lifting holes have been provided in the Pan bulkhead for insertion of a 2" NPS extra
heavy pipe to which cable slings can be attached with either a hook or bolted clevis.
Suggested lifting technique:
 Each section of this unit should be lifted by a crane only.

 Use spreader bars for vertical lift at pick-points.
 Do not use a fork lift truck.
 Do not rig cable slings from coil connections or spray pipe.
 Do not lift by exterior casing panels or coil process connections.
 Contact local rigging company for rigging device specifics.
pg. 2
3 - LIFTING AND RIGGING - FAN ASSEMBLY
Niagara machines are fabricated with welded panel type casing, which allows slings to be
attached for lifting as indicated. Place hardwood block between panel flange and hook to prevent
damage to panel and improper alignment of sub-assemblies.
pg. 3
4 - LIFTING AND RIGGING - COILS
The method of handling various Niagara Coils depends on the specific design. The
following sketches indicate the standard design fabricated by Niagara. Special Coil Construction
or coil arrangements may be provided with special lifting arrangements.
Instructions for use of special lifting arrangements, if required, are included as an

addendum to these instructions.
NOTE THAT WHEN COILS ARE RESTING ON GROUND, THEY MUST BE

SUPPORTED ON CENTER TUBE SUPPORTS OR HEADERS.
Lifting technique for Serpentine Coils: Lifting Technique for Cleanable Coils:
Use lifting lugs welded on frame only Contact Niagara for lifting beam rental
pg. 4
PHONE: (716) 875-2000  FAX: (716) 875-1077
SECTION 2
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA. DESCRIPTION
1 GENERAL
2 SUB-ASSEMBLIES AND SECTION NUMBERS
3 SUGGESTED TOOLS REQUIRED
4 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALANT
5 CENTRIFUGAL FAN ASSEMBLIES
6 INTAKE AND DISCHARGE AIR DUCTS
2A SEALER TAPE AND CAULK INSTRUCTIONS

2B METHOD OF ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
2C SHIPPING AND INSTALLATION ASSEMBLY DRAWING
1 -GENERAL
The Niagara Blower Company has supplied a drawing showing the requirements for the
foundation. Before erecting the unit, ensure that the foundation is in full conformance with the
drawing, and that it is level. Any error in positioning the foundation may make it difficult to
properly erect the unit. The foundation must be level for proper equipment operation.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ASSEMBLE THIS UNIT UNTIL YOU HAVE READ THE
REMAINDER OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
REFER TO "HANDLING AND RIGGING" SECTION FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON
PROPER HANDLING OF NIAGARA EQUIPMENT.
EQUIPMENT IS LEAK TESTED PRIOR TO SHIPMENT, HOWEVER, CASING BOLTS
MAY LOOSEN FROM VIBRATION IN SHIPMENT. IF CASING LEAKS OCCUR, RETIGHTEN
BOLTS STARTING AT CENTER OF EACH PANEL AND WORKING TOWARD THE ENDS.
2 - SUB-ASSEMBLY AND SECTION NUMBERS
Each sub-assembly and part will be identified for assembly as an aid in determining
erection procedure. In general, it is best to position sub-assemblies and parts in accordance with
the following:
1. When viewed from the coil connection end of the unit, each sub-assembly or part will
have a section number in the upper right hand corner.
2. "Match Marks" will be provided between corresponding sub-assemblies; i.e.

"A" to "A", "B" to "B", etc.
3 -SUGGESTED TOOLS REQUIRED PER PERSON
The following tools will be required to properly erect most Niagara equipment:
2 - Drift pins, 15/16" dia. x 12" lg., 3/16 point
I - Hammer, 2 lb.
2 - Ratchet socket wrenches, 8" Ig.
2 - Sockets, size 9/16" (dia. across flats) for hex bolts, size 3/8"
1 - Putty Knife
4 - APPLICATION OF JOINT GASKET TAPE AND POLYPROPYLENE SEALANT
Equipment fabricated by the Niagara Blower Company should be sealed with gasket tape and
polypropylene sealant, unless otherwise specified in these instructions. Sufficient tape and
sealant are furnished with shipment.
Apply the gasket tape and polypropylene sealant in strict conformance with the following
instructions.
pg. 1
Material supplied by Niagara Blower Co.:

1/4” wide x 1/8” thick sealant tape
Sealant compound
Assembly hardware
Fan/Plenum section – above spray level:

Apply single layer of sealant tape,
crossing-over at corners as shown
Sealant tape
Basin section – below spray level:

Apply two layers of sealant tape,
crossing-over at corners and
apply sealant compound as shown.
When accessible, strike all field
joints on the interior of the
assembled unit with sealant
compound.
Sealant tape
Sealant compound
Unit section alignment using drift pins:

Use drift pins to align bolt holes before
joining sections.
pg. 2
5 - CENTRIFUGAL FAN SUB-ASSEMBLIES – (IF APPLICABLE)
Dependent on shipping conditions, fan motor, V-belt drive and belt guard, if furnished, will
be shipped mounted on the sub-assembly.
Motor base slide rails and adjustable slide guides will be furnished factory-mounted on
the fan casing assembly.
If shipped separately, fan motor will be placed either on fan section sub-assembly skid or
on a separate skid.
If the fan motor is to be furnished by others, the V-belts and motor pulley will normally be
strapped to the fan pulley. If Niagara Blower Company furnishes the motor and shipped
separately, the V-belts will normally be strapped to the fan pulley and the motor pulley mounted
on the motor shaft.
6 - INTAKE AND DISCHARGE AIR DUCTS - (IF APPLICABLE)
Intake and discharge air ducts should be connected only if the fans of the equipment
were originally selected for the added static pressure loss resulting from the use of such ducts.
Any resistance added to that for which the unit was originally designed, will decrease air flow and
capacity.
Air intakes and discharge ducts, when used, should be full size and elbows should
preferably be of long radius to ensure uniform air velocity to and from the unit.
Intake and discharge air ducts when used must be supported independently,
without imposing a load reaction upon the unit casing.
pg. 3
SECTION 2A
SEALER TAPE AND CAULKING INSTRUCTIONS
General Instructions:
1. Insure that all flange faces are cleaned with a suitable solvent, such as alcohol, to remove any grease or
dirt.
2. Remove backing from 1/8” x 3/8” sealant tape to expose the adhesive side.
3. Apply the tape 1/8” from the inside edge of the bolt holes, allowing 3/8” overlap at each end. Press the
overlaps firmly to assure a leak-proof joint. Crimp and squeeze sealant tape at junction of parts to be
sealed. If it is necessary to splice a run of tape, overlap the ends by ¼” and press the splice firmly.
4. Extrude a ¼” bead of joint sealant (caulk) along the inner edge of the sealant tape.
5. Strike all accessible interior joints and corners after assembly with ¼” bead of joint sealant.
OVERLAP TAPE
CRIMP AND SQUEEZE
TAPE AT JOINTS
SEALANT TAPE
CAULK
NBCo A-6
SECTION 2B
METHOD OF ASSEMBLY
Before proceeding with erection of the unit, read carefully the Installation and Assembly
Instructions (Section 2 & 3 of O & M manual), review the Assembly Drawings (found at end of
section 1), Method of Assembly and Assembly Drawing (found at the end of Section 2) then proceed
as follows:
1. A crate of small parts has been included which contains all necessary bolts, nuts, washers, sealing
tape, caulk and misc. for assembly of the unit.
2. Referring to Assembly drawings D114883. Set Basin Pan Section (#1) in place. Clean section side
panel flanges (sealing surface). Apply sealing tape & caulk per sealer and caulk instructions to the
side flanges of section #1. Set section #2 (basin wing) on the concrete pad in close proximity of
section #1. Aligning match-marks (A - A), slid section #2 to section #1 utilizing drift pins for bolt
hole alignment. Bolt section #2 to section #1. Uniformly tighten all casing panel hardware to
approximately 35 ft-lbs and strike-off all caulk joints.
3. Install and uniformly tighten all anchor bolts.
4. Clean section top panel flanges of section #1. Apply sealing tape & caulk to the top flanges of
section #1 (basin pan) and install section #3 (Coil section). Ensure that match-mark (B - B) is
aligned properly lower section #3 to section #1 utilizing drift pins for bolt hole alignment. Bolt
section #3 to sections #1. Uniformly tighten all casing panel hardware to approximately 35 ft-lbs
and strike-off all caulk joints.
5. Clean section top panel flanges of section #2. Apply sealing tape & caulk to the top flanges of
section #2 (basin wing) and install section #4 (Fan section). Ensure that match-mark (C – C) are
aligned properly lower sections #4 to section #2 utilizing drift pins for bolt hole alignment. Bolt
sections #4 to sections #2. Uniformly tighten all casing panel hardware to approximately 35 ft-lbs
6. Uniformly tighten all joint hardware to approximately 35 ft-lbs.
7. From inside of unit, Inspect all caulk joints to ensure proper seal. If seal has been damaged, cut out
caulk and replace damage areas.
8. Install spray pump, pump suction and discharge riser piping and supports.
PHONE: (716) 875-2000  FAX: (716) 875-1077
SECTION 3
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA. DESCRIPTION
1 PIPING
2 PROCESS PIPING
3 PAN WATER MAKEUP VALVE
4 PAN OVERFLOW AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS
5 PAN STEAM WATER HEATER PIPING
6 RECIRCULATING SPRAY WATER PIPING
7 SPRAY FAILURE ALARM SWITCH PIPING
8 WIRING
9 FAN AND PUMP MOTORS
10 ELECTRIC PAN HEATER WIRING
11 START-UP/TESTING
12 CASING INSULATION
13 EQUIPMENT STORAGE
14 TO MINIMIZE DAMAGE TO YOUR EQUIPMENT
1 - PIPING
All piping connections must be made in accordance with good engineering practice. The sizes of
connections on the unit do not necessarily govern the size of interconnecting piping. Such piping is the
responsibility of the installer and should conform to installation requirements. When exposed to freezing
weather, some piping must be traced with steam or electric heating tape. Insulation of the piping alone is not
always adequate.
ALL EXTERNAL PIPING AND ACCESSORIES, WHEN FURNISHED, ARE FACTORY FITTED, AND NOT
INTERCHANGEABLE. BE SURE TO USE THE CORRECT PARTS. THESE PARTS ARE IDENTIFIED BY
THE LAST THREE NUMBERS OF THE UNIT SERIAL NUMBER STAMPED INTO THE TOP OF THE
UPPER COIL CONNECTION AND INTO EACH SEPARATE PART.
UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE, PIPING CONNECTED TO INLET AND OUTLET FLANGES MUST BE
INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED. DO NOT IMPOSE ANY END LOADING FORCES OR MOMENTS ON
THE UNIT FLANGES.
2 - PROCESS PIPING
Provisions must be made for venting and draining the tube bundles. When cooling liquids, the piping system
must be arranged so that the tube bundles will be continuously vented during normal operation. Suitable
venting devices may have to be used. Fluid flow controllers, if used, should be placed at the outlets of the
tube bundles, unless the return lines are balanced by an elevated header. Maintain a positive pressure in
the tube bundles at all times to prevent introducing air which may interfere with the flow and may also cause
internal corrosion.
If the tube bundles, under some operating conditions, are exposed to a low temperature which would cause
freezing or an undesirable increase of fluid viscosity, provisions must be made to completely drain the tube
bundles while properly venting them to assure complete drainage. The inside of drained tube bundles should
be protected against corrosion during idle periods.
Internal deposits can cause loss of cooling capacity. To protect the tube bundles from accumulation of
deposits originating in other parts of the system, we suggest that you install adequate strainers at the inlets.
Occasional flushing may also be necessary.
3 - PAN WATER MAKEUP VALVE
A float-operated water makeup valve is included with Niagara Wet Surface Air Coolers to replace
evaporated water and water lost during blowdown.
The assembly consists of a float-operated valve, rod, ball and all necessary internal piping and fittings for
proper installation and operation. A threaded female pipe connection, external to the casing, is provided for
connecting to a source of water supply. Normally, the float valve will be shipped assembled with the
respective sub-assembly.
Adjust float valve to shut off approximately 1/2" below emergency overflow level.
The standard makeup valve is suitable for operating water supply pressure of 100 psig or less. When water
supply pressures are in excess of 100 psig, a pressure control valve must be used upstream from the float
valve.
4 -PAN OVERFLOW AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS
The emergency overflow, blowdown, and pan drain connections may be piped for gravity overflow to a drain.
Install a shutoff valve at the pan drains and blowdown connections.
Install a needle valve at the chemical feed inlet to the pan when water treatment is administered by a pump.
pg. 1
5 -PAN STEAM WATER HEATER PIPING – (IF APPLICABLE)
Figure No. 1 below, shows methods for piping the steam supply to the pan steam water heater.
Piping must be installed so as to ensure proper drainage of condensate by adequate traps.
Steam supply piping should be arranged to prevent siphoning of spray water from the drain pan into the
steam supply system or condensate return system.
pg. 2
6 - RECIRCULATING SPRAY WATER PIPING
When recirculating spray pumps and interconnecting piping between the spray pumps and spray headers
are not furnished by the Niagara Blower Company, the spray water supply piping must be adequately sized
to ensure uniform delivery of spray water to the spray headers at 5 psig pressure. The suction piping to a
remote spray pump or drain piping to a remote sump tank must be adequately sized to prevent loss of spray
water via the emergency overflow.
Outdoor installations in cold winter climates must include protection of water piping against freezing. Spray
headers must drain to prevent freezing during periods of no flow. Likewise, the suction piping and pump of a
remotely located spray pump and the return piping to a remotely located sump tank must be protected
against freezing.
7 - SPRAY FAILURE ALARM SWITCH PIPING – (IF APPLICABLE)
If provided by Niagara Blower Co., and not prewired, the spray failure alarm switch will be shipped separate
for field installation by others. Couplings are provided in the spray pump risers for mounting pressure switch
(PS). Refer to Figure 2 or 2A for installation of switches normally supplied by Niagara Blower Co.
The switch is connected to the spray riser with a 1/4" pipe fitting. If there is danger of freezing, the pipe
connection to the switch and the spray pipe should be wrapped with heating tape. Insulation of the piping
alone may not be adequate.
pg. 3
Figure 2A INSTALLATION of SPRAY

FAILURE ALARM SWITCH
(Winters type)
FRP Cable Gland

Spray Riser
From
Spray Pump
1/4” Elbow
1/4” Nipple
1/4” Half Coupling
8 - WIRING
All wiring should conform to local codes and ordinances governing such installations. In general, these
codes require:
1. Wire no smaller the #14 for line voltage (115/230/46OV).
2. Wire no smaller than #18 for low voltage (24V).
3. Where line and low voltage wiring is run in same conduit, the low voltage wiring must have insulation
equal to the maximum of any wire in the conduit.
4. All terminal connections should be carefully made. Whenever splicing of wires is necessary, the splice
should be soldered or taped, or connected with an approved solderless connector.
5. Splices are not permitted in conduit runs except at junction boxes.

Be sure that the voltage stamped on the electrical component corresponds with the power supply
characteristics to which they are connected. For proper operation the voltage should be 85% of the rated
voltage; i.e., 97.8 volts for 115V rating, 205.5V for 230V rating or 411V for 460V rating. We suggest a fused,
single-phase, grounded system for all control circuits.
CONTROLS AND MOTORS ON EQUIPMENT INSTALLED OUTDOORS OR IN REFRIGERATED ROOMS

MUST BE PROTECTED AGAINST ENTRY OF WATER OR WATER VAPOR BY SEALING CONDUIT
CONNECTIONS WITH APELCO #18692 OR APPLETON "A4" SEALING COMPOUND OR EQUIVALENT.
MAKE SURE ALL INSTRUMENT COVERS ARE SEATED AND TIGHTENED PROPERLY TO ENSURE A
WATERTIGHT SEAL.
pg. 4
9 - FAN AND PUMP MOTORS
"Pairs" of propeller fan motors with a common fan chamber must be wired to start simultaneously.
Correct rotation of fans and pump is critical to the equipment performance. 3-phase motor rotation, if
incorrect, can be changed by switching any two of the three (3) wires. Single-phase motors operate in
correct rotation.
All motors should preferably be grounded by use of a separate ground conductor, rather than depending
upon the equipment to act as a ground.
10 – ELECTRIC PAN HEATER WIRING – (IF APPLICABLE)
Electric pan heaters (Ref. Figure 3), are factory-mounted in the pan. Heaters are dual voltage type. Before
connecting to line voltage, check that jumpers are connected properly for the voltage used. Jumpers should
be parallel-connected for 230 volts, and series connected for 460 volts. Actual voltage applied to heaters
must not exceed rated voltage on heater nameplate.
Wiring to NEMA 4 terminal housing must be watertight.
Immersion heaters are designed to be operated fully immersed. Applying voltage to exposed heaters will
destroy the heaters and void the warranty.
Proper wiring and interlock of all temperature control switches is required. Note that all switches are to be wired normally
open (N/0). The switches make above setpoint and break below setpoint.
pg. 5
11 – START-UP/TESTING
Prior to shipment, each unit is factory performance and leak tested.
Before startup, remove all debris and foreign material from inside equipment, flush coil, process piping and drain pan with
clean water.
Check to insure that all motor bearings have been lubricated in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
Fill the pan with clean water to ½” below the overflow connection by adjusting the water make-up valve. Start the spray
pump, check for proper rotation and inspect sprays to ensure that they are spraying uniformly. The spray header pressure
should be 4-1/2 to 5 psig.
If the unit is drained to a remote sump, the sump should be cleaned and filled in a similar manner.
Adjust the float valve by rotating the swing joint, such that it will maintain proper operating water level in the pan.
Check the casing flanged joints for leakage. Repair any joint leaks from the inside if accessible, or refer to the assembly
instruction section of this manual.
On units equipped with centrifugal fans, check the alignment of the V-belt drive and adjust V-belt tension.
12 - CASING INSULATION – (IF REQUIRED)
We suggest that the spray water drain pan, coil casing, and plenum casing be insulated if the unit is installed
in a location where the minimum ambient air temperature might be expected to be less than 30 degrees F.
Applying insulation to the drain pan and coil casing will minimize spray water heating requirements at low
heat input loads and low ambient air temperature conditions of operation. Ensure that the equipment is leak
free prior to insulating.
Because of the importance of insulating the unit to prevent damage from freeze-ups and to minimize
operating costs, we urge you to consider the services of reputable suppliers of insulation materials and
insulating contractors who can guide you to the most economical and satisfactory resolution.
We suggest that the thickness of the insulation material selected conform to the method of application used.
The thickness of insulation material preferably should conform to the depth of the concave panels which on
unit sizes 01 thru 05 is 1-3/4", on unit sizes 06 and larger, 2-5/8".
It is not considered practical to cover the flanged joints of the casing panels unless severe ambient air
temperature conditions warrant the added expense.
13 – EQUIPMENT STORAGE
Equipment placed in storage is subject to the same deteriorating conditions as "idle" equipment;
consequently, protective measures should be taken against possible damage or loss. Niagara Blower
Company cannot assume any responsibility, either direct or contingent, for storage of equipment. However,
the company recognizes the importance and necessity of proper procedures when storing equipment.
Carefully check all equipment placed in storage against the Shipping List. Separate small parts and carefully
store to prevent loss.
pg. 6
14 - TO MINIMIZE DAMAGE TO YOUR EQUIPMENT (PRE-INSTALLATION)
1. Tube Bundles:
Tube bundles can be stored outdoors on a flat surface. Bundles must be equally
supported to prevent distortion (front, middle, rear). Care must be taken to ensure
direct sun exposure does not damage (warp) PVC spray components. Covering
bundles is recommended.
For bundles that ARE nitrogen charged:

Carbon steel galvanized tube bundles have been purged and nitrogen sealed. If the
pressure of the nitrogen seal falls below 5 psig, identify leak point (test with soap
water), repair leak and add nitrogen to bring the pressure to 15 psig. Check every 30
days.
For bundles that ARE NOT nitrogen charged:

Allow condensation to drain out of the bottom nozzle or drain connection.
2. WSAC Structure Sections (Coil, Fan, Plenum and Basin):

a. Galvanized or stainless steel components can be stored outside uncovered on a
flat surface. Sections must be equally supported to prevent distortion (front,
middle, rear).
b. Remove basin drain plugs to allow rain water to drain.
c. Do not stack components.
3. Electric Motors:
a. Refer to manufacturer storage recommendations.
b. Indoor storage is recommended.
c. For motors equipped with internal heaters, they must be energized to prevent
internal condensation.
d. Rotate shafts by hand monthly to prevent the bearings from “brinelling” into the
races.
e. Coat all external machined surfaces with a rust preventing material.
f. Lubricate bearings in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
4. Instrumentation, Junction Boxes, Control Panels and Assembly Hardware:

a. Must be stored indoors in a dry, well ventilated area. Care must be taken to
avoid condensation in instruments, junction boxes and control panels.
b. Instrumentation and control panels are not to be installed until ready for
commissioning.
pg. 7
COIL CONNECTIONS ALLOWABLE LOADS
1. COIL CONNECTIONS ARE NOT DESIGNED TO BEAR LOADS ASSOCIATED WITH

PIPING.
2. ALL PIPING SHOULD BE EXTERNALLY SUPPORTED.
F:\Engineering\Operating Manuals\Coil Conn Allowable Loads.doc

PHONE: (716) 875-2000  FAX: (716) 875-1077
SECTION 4
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA. DESCRIPTION
1 GENERAL
2 UNIT CAPACITY
3 AIR FLOW
4 SPRAY PUMPS AND NOZZLES
5 AUTOMATIC SPRAY WATER HEATING CONTROL
6 LOW PAN TEMPERATURE THERMOSTAT (T-3)
7 HEAT FAILURE ALARM THERMOSTAT (T-4)
8 SPRAY FAILURE ALARM SWITCH (P.S.)
9 PAN WATER MAKE-UP VALVE
10 SPRAY WATER BLOWDOWN
10.1 TYPICAL AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED BLOWDOWN
11 IDLE CYCLE (PROCESS CIRCULATION)
12 SHUTDOWN
13 POWER FAILURE
4A OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS AND CONTROL PRINCIPLES

1 - GENERAL
The Niagara Wet Surface Air Cooler is essentially a cooling mechanism that uses outdoor air as the cooling
medium. Air moves over the outside of a tubular heat exchange surface while the fluid to be cooled or
condensed passes through the tubes. Captive water charge cascades continuously over the tubular surface,
which always remains completely covered with a blanket of water, thereby preventing exposure to unduly
low temperature and avoiding scale deposits caused by the drying of solids.
Process heat transferred through the tubular surface to the water cascade is balanced by the heat and mass
transfer from water to air.
2 - UNIT CAPACITY
Unit capacity is shown on the General Arrangement Drawing included in the “EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS”
section of this manual.
The capacity of the unit is a function of the temperature difference between the process fluid and the air.
Heat is transferred at a reduced rate if the velocity of the process fluid is decreased or if deposits are fouling
the metallic surface.
The sizing of a Niagara Wet Surface Air Cooler is based on maximum outside air wet bulb temperatures. A
unit installed indoors therefore, without an outside air supply, may be adversely affected.
If conditions are other than those for which the machine is designed, the capacity will not be adequate for
the specific cooling process. Contact the Niagara Blower Company Engineer for his recommendations.
THE OPERATION OF THE NIAGARA WET SURFACE AIR COOLER IS SIMPLE AND REQUIRES
MINIMAL OPERATING ATTENTION. TO ASSURE PERFORMANCE AT FULL CAPACITY, THE
OPERATOR SHOULD BE INFORMED OF SUCH BASIC REQUIREMENTS AS PROPER AIRFLOW,
ADEQUATE SPRAY WATER QUANTITY AND COVERAGE, AND PROPER OPERATION OF AUTOMATIC
TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE CONTROLS.
3 - AIR FLOW
All Niagara Wet Surface Air Coolers are equipped with either centrifugal or propeller fan assemblies. When
equipped with two or more propeller fans, unless equipped with anti-wind milling devices, all propellers must
be started simultaneously. This will prevent the excessive torque and stress that would occur if a fan motor
turning in the reverse direction is energized.
Correct direction of rotation of fans is necessary. Check this carefully. Proper rotation is easily obtained for
three-phase motors by switching any two of the three wires; single-phase motors rotate in the correct
direction. Arrows on equipment indicate the correct direction of rotation.
Restrictions to normal air flow through the unit will decrease capacity. Deposits on the tube bundles will
restrict airflow and decrease heat transfer. Occasional airborne lint, leaves, paper, ect. on the tube bundles
not only restricts the air flow but may also affect the uniformity of air intake velocities.
Any external resistance, for which the fans were not originally selected, will result in decreased air flow and
corresponding loss of capacity. If capacity is reduced because of excessive external duct resistance, consult
with the Niagara Blower Company Engineer. He will advise you of fan performance limitations and, if
possible, recommend corrective action.
Improperly designed or constructed discharge air ducts occasionally result in high turbulence, which might
cause erratic fan performance. To correct this problem, use either full-size, long-radius elbows or directional
vanes.
pg. 1
4 - SPRAY PUMPS AND NOZZLES
The spray pumps of the Niagara Wet Surface Air Cooler must be operated continuously, as the temperature
of the spray water will determine the temperature environment of the tube bundles. It is therefore essential
that the tube bundles be continuously and completely blanketed with the spray water.
Verify the correct direction of pump rotation, which can be easily reversed with three-phase motors by
switching any two of the three wires. Single-phase motors will operate only in the correct rotation. Arrows on
the equipment indicate the correct direction of rotation.
The type of spray nozzle used will not clog easily, and when supplied with water at 5 psig pressure, will
provide uniform distribution. Observe the spray operation when the unit is first placed in operation; if the
pattern changes after a period of time without a change of header pressure, the nozzles may be worn or
dirty or deposits in the spray pipes are excessive. If so, clean the spray system and replace the nozzles. If
the spray header pressure decreases, check the pump impeller for wear or deposits and clean or replace as
necessary, or observe the spray arms for missing or worn nozzles and replace if necessary.
5 - AUTOMATIC SPRAY WATER HEATING CONTROL (T-3, T-4) – (IF APPLICABLE)
Automatic Spray Water Heating Control is provided with Niagara Wet Surface Aircoolers for automatic
operation in cold weather. Steam jet water heaters or electric heating elements mounted in the unit pan are
controlled by two (2) temperature switches, which continuously sense the water temperature in the pan.
Heating and Cooling Controls are interlocked so that the fans are stopped whenever heat is supplied in cold
weather.
6 - LOW PAN TEMPERATURE THERMOSTAT (T-3) – (IF APPLICABLE)
The sensing bulb for this thermostat is located in the spray water basin. When the spray water temperature
drops to a setpoint of 45F (7C), the thermostat will signal to turn on spray water heating and stop the fans.
The spray water temperature should begin to rise at this point. When it has risen 1 to 3 degrees above the
setpoint, the fans will automatically restart and the heaters will be switched off.
7 - HEAT FAILURE ALARM THERMOSTAT (T-4) – (IF APPLICABLE)
This thermostat, with sensing bulb located in the spray water basin, notifies the operator in case of heat
failure.
Should the pan heat called for by T-3 thermostat be inadequate or fail and the pan water temperature
continue to drop to the setpoint of 40F, a danger of freeze-up is imminent and corrective measures must be
taken.
This thermostat will lock out the fans so that they must be manually restarted and energize an audible alarm.
8 - SPRAY FAILURE ALARM SWITCH (P.S.) – (IF APPLICABLE)
This switch, set at 2-1/2 psig, is located in the spray pump discharge. It will warn the operator if the spray
water stops drenching the tube bundles. Place the switch as close as possible to the water flowing in the
spray pump discharge line. For outdoor installations, insulate the discharge pipe and pressure switch.
pg. 2
9 – PAN WATER MAKEUP VALVE
A float-operated water makeup valve is included with Niagara Wet Surface Air Coolers to replace the water
used for evaporation and water lost to blowdown.
Adjust the float valve to shut off approximately 1/2” below the emergency overflow level, as indicated below.
Makeup valve Shutoff Level “A” is approximately 31-9/16”; WSAC Operating level.
pg. 3
10 - SPRAY WATER BLOWDOWN
Fouling of the external tubular heat transfer surface commonly decreases capacity. Scale and corrosion
products are formed by inadequate blowdown and improper neutralization of the spray water.
Excessive acidity or alkalinity and extreme amounts of total dissolved solids (TDS) will prevent proper
operation of Niagara Wet Surface Air Coolers.
Niagara Wet Surface Aircoolers are provided with connections for:
a. Continuous blowdown (manual)

b. Automatically controlled blowdown
c. Adding the water treatment formulation
Continuous blowdown connections are provided either on the spray pump riser (unit sizes 01 to 05) or with a
weir box in the spray pump chamber, to which a valve should be connected for regulating the rate of
blowdown flow. A continuous waste or blowdown of a small amount of water from the spray pan is
recommended only as an immediate temporary measure for keeping dissolved and suspended solids below
a concentration at which they will precipitate on the tubular surface.
We strongly recommend automatically controlled blowdown because it will minimize the cost of water
treatment chemicals and provide a more maintenance-free system.
Blowdown is needed only when the concentration of dissolved solids gets too high. Because treatment
chemicals do not normally evaporate, they are added only when such chemicals are lost by the blowdown or
depleted by their chemical action.
In view of the above, the dissolved solids are measured by a conductivity probe and a blowdown valve is
opened whenever the conductivity is too high. This valve is closed again when the conductivity is back to
normal. While this blowdown is taking place, a chemical feed pump replenishes the water treatment
chemicals lost by the blowdown, thereby maintaining the proper chemical treatment balance.
These functions are done automatically by several locally available instruments, examples of which follow:
1. Leeds and Northrup Company - No. 7085 Conductivity Controller

2. Uniloc No. 711 Industrial Conductivity Transmitter/Analyzer
3. Mogul Corporation "Mogul Solutrol 11" Automatic Bleed and Feed Controller
pg. 4
10.1 – TYPICAL AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED BLOWDOWN
Typical Operation
A. Approx. 1 GPM sample is fed to the conductivity sensor (1) from the spray riser and is returned to
the pump chamber.
B. The conductivity sensor measures the electrical conductivity of a water sample and actuates the
solenoid valve (2) for intermittent blowdown. It also energizes the water treatment chemical pump
(3) to maintain proper chemical treatment balance.
pg. 5
11 - IDLE CYCLE (PROCESS CIRCULATION)
If the process stream to be cooled or condensed by the Niagara Wet Surface Air Cooler is to be shut off over
a weekend, it is extremely important to take steps to prevent freeze-up.
1. Place the "IDLE SWITCH," on the control panel in the "stand-by" position. This switch will turn off the
fans.
2. Be sure pan heat control is in "Auto" position.
3. Make sure spray pumps are operated to blanket tube bundles with the warmer pan water. Cooler is
now in stand-by condition. Heat failure and spray failure alarms will warn the operator of freeze-up
danger.
4. If so equipped, motors and control panels should have space heaters energized to combat formation
of condensation.
12 - COMPLETE SHUT DOWN OF THE WET SURFACE AIR COOLER
When the Niagara Wet Surface Air Cooler is going to be shut down completely it is important to take steps to
prevent freeze-up and corrosion.
1. Open the main disconnect switch to shut down fans, pumps and heaters and to shut off the power
supply to the 115 volt control transformer.
2. Drain pan and pump chambers through drain connections provided.
3. Drain tube bundles. Air vents and drainage valves must be installed in original piping for this purpose.
Note: Galvanized tube bundles have carbon steel tubing and, as such, it is preferred the bundles be
purged and nitrogen charged to 15 psig – check at least every 30 days that the pressure does not fall
below 5 psig.
4. If so equipped, motors and control panels should have space heaters energized to combat formation
of condensation.
13 - POWER FAILURE
Emergency procedure during the time of possible freezing weather calls for opening the drain valve at each
tube bundle. Make sure these drain freely and completely. Covering the intakes with a tarpaulin will prove a
quick and effective protection.
After a power failure in sub-freezing weather the fans should be restarted only after all other components
have first been put into operation. Use the following procedure.
1. Heat spray water by placing heat control system to "on" position.
2. Start spray pump to heat empty tube bundles. This heating should continue until spray water reaches
approximately 70F. This may take several hours.
3. Allow the process stream to enter the tube bundles after the spray water reaches approximately 70F.
4. At this point set all control switches to "Auto" position.
pg. 6
91 Sawyer Avenue, Tonawanda NY 14150
Phone: (716) 875-2000 ~ Fax: (716) 875-1077
Operator Instructions and Control Principles

SO# 25600
Niagara Blower control systems are custom built to add as much convenience as
possible to each customer’s application. In the following section the custom controls for
your system will be described in detail.
Unit Operation
Starting the System:
A) Inspect all system valves to assure they are in the correct operating position.
WSAC basin water level should be adequate to operate pumps.
B) Place the local HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch in AUTO mode.
C) The system will remain in STANDBY mode until the turbine run signal is
received. Once the turbine run signal is received the system will begin to run in
AUTO mode.
Stopping the System:
A) The system can be shut down by turning the local HAND-OFF-AUTO selector
switch to OFF mode.
Alarms:
There is an alarm pilot on the front of the control panel that will indicate one or more of
the following alarms are present. The local HMI will indicate the specific alarms that are
active.
A) Spray pump overload – The WSAC spray pump tripped due to overcurrent. The
spray pump will shut down.
B) Fan 1 overload – The WSAC fan 1 tripped due to overcurrent. VFD 1 will shut
down.
C) Fan 2 overload – The WSAC fan 2 tripped due to overcurrent. VFD 1 will shut
down.
D) Fan 3 overload – The WSAC fan 3 tripped due to overcurrent. VFD 2 will shut
down.
E) Fan 4 overload – The WSAC fan 4 tripped due to overcurrent. VFD 2 will shut
down.
1 of 2
91 Sawyer Avenue, Tonawanda NY 14150
Phone: (716) 875-2000 ~ Fax: (716) 875-1077
F) Spray pump failed to start – The WSAC spray pump has been commanded to
start, but the run signal was not received.
G) VFD 1 failed to start – The WSAC VFD 1 has been commanded to start, but the
run signal was not received.
H) VFD 2 failed to start – The WSAC VFD 2 has been commanded to start, but the
run signal was not received.
I) Fan 1 high vibration – The WSAC fan 1 vibration transmitter has exceeded the
high limit setpoint. VFD 1 will shut down.
J) Fan 2 high vibration – The WSAC fan 2 vibration transmitter has exceeded the
K) Fan 3 high vibration – The WSAC fan 3 vibration transmitter has exceeded the
L) Fan 4 high vibration – The WSAC fan 4 vibration transmitter has exceeded the
M) Process outlet critical high temperature – The WSAC process outlet temperature
is above the critical high setpoint.
N) Spray pump pressure low – The spray pump pressure is below operational
setpoint. The spray pump will shut down.
Functional Description
WSAC Pump Control:
The wet surface air cooler comes with 1 - 100% pump. The pump discharge contains a
pressure indicator to verify operational pressure. When in full automatic, the pump shall
turn on if there are no alarm conditions present and the turbine run signal is active.
WSAC Fan Control:
The wet surface air cooler comes with 4 - 25% fans. To reach the design capacity of the
WSAC, all fans shall activate and run when the local HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch
is in the AUTO position, the turbine run signal is active, and the process outlet
temperature is above the fan run setpoint. The process fans will modulate from 0% to
100% to maintain the desired process outlet setpoint. At times when less cooling is
required the fans will shut off when the process outlet temperature is below the fan run
setpoint.
2 of 2
PHONE: (716) 875-2000  FAX: (716) 875-1077
SECTION 5
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA. DESCRIPTION
1 GENERAL
2 LUBRICATION
3 LUBRICATION SCHEDULE
4 CLEANING
5 SCALE ACCUMULATION REMOVAL
6 CENTRIFUGAL FANS - V-BELT DRIVE
7 SPRAY WATER HEATING - GENERAL
8 SPRAY WATER HEATING - INSPECTION
9 SPRAY ARRANGEMENT - CLEANING
10 SPRAY ARRANGEMENT - NOZZLE CLEANING
11 REPLACEMENT PARTS
5A WSAC SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

5B AFTERMARKET QUOTATION REPLACEMENT PARTS
1 - GENERAL
Normally most maintenance required can be performed without removing the unit from service, and is generally
limited to proper lubrication of bearings and cleaning the air intake, pump suction screens, and drain pan. See also
“OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS” section for further information.
2 - LUBRICATION
All bearings have been pre-lubricated at the factory or by the motor manufacturer with a lubricant which has been
recommended to give satisfactory service for most operating conditions. If it is your practice to use lubricants that
have been standardized in your plant, refer to the lubrication schedule as a guide for selecting a comparable and
compatible lubricant from your standard stores or normal suppliers.
To prevent damage to bearing seals and the forcing of grease into the motor housing or fan section, we
recommend that you remove the bearing housing vent plug (if provided) when greasing bearings. Even with the
vent plug removed, the grease added to the bearing will normally be in excess of that required. Therefore, the fan
or motor should be run until the bearing reaches normal operating temperature, with the vent open. After normal
operating temperature has been attained, the vent should be plugged and excess grease wiped from the shaft and
bearing housing.
Some bearings, particularly centrifugal fan bearings, are not provided with vent plugs; the seals are designed to
release excess lubricant. To grease this type of bearing, add grease with a handgun until there is visible grease
extruded from the bearing. After running the bearing up to operating temperature, wipe it clean.
The inner seal of a flanged type ball bearing as used on centrifugal fans is not visible. If the bearing is lubricated
excessively, the lubricant will be forced into the fan casing section.
Please note: When bearings are equipped with extended grease pipe fittings, these are for convenience of "spot"
greasing. Although some users prefer spot greasing, it is not intended to be substitute for periodic lubrication
service. When "spot" greasing without removing vent plugs; use only a hand grease gun. Frequent "spot" greasing
can lead to bearing seal, bearing, and motor failures from over-lubrication.
Lubricants generally are recommended for continuous operation at normal bearing operating temperatures.
Special lubricants may be required if startup might be expected under low ambient temperature conditions, or
intermittent operation, or to provide for relatively long shutdown periods. Startup under low ambient temperatures
requires a lubricant sufficiently fluid at these temperature conditions to ensure immediate rotation of the balls of
bearings. Intermittent and long shutdown periods require a lubricant that resists deterioration by moisture which
enters the bearing housing only by breathing action with bearing temperature changes. Likewise, the lubricant
should have properties of maintaining a corrosive resistant film on the metal during periods of shutdown. It is not
expected that moisture from the "Process" shall enter the bearing unless bearing wear, excess lubrication, or
undue vibration has damaged the bearing seal.
As a precaution against deterioration of bearings due to moisture and corrosion, we suggest that during periods of
long shutdown the fans or motors be rotated once each week, preferably until normal bearing temperatures are
attained, or, if this is impractical, at least six (6) to ten (10) revolutions.
Intermittent operation generally reduces bearing life in proportion to the frequency and period length of shutdowns,
and ambient temperatures existing at startup.
Your local representative of a lubricant supplier can be of great assistance in recommending a lubricant for your
specific conditions.
With Preventive Maintenance Programs, lubrication and inspection are often performed simultaneously. Periods
between lubrication might vary. However, for greatest assurance we recommend that all points of lubrication be
checked at least at six (6) month intervals.
pg. 1
3 - LUBRICATION SCHEDULE
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED LUBRICANT
Centrifugal Fan Bearings ...............................................................*Texaco, Inc. - Regal AFB No. 2

Shell Oil, Inc. - Aeroshell Grease No. 6
Motor Bearings for Propeller Fans, Centrifugal Fans, Texaco Inc. - Regal AFB No. 2
and Pumps ...........................................................................Shell Oil, Inc. - Aeroshell Grease No. 6
....................................................................................................... *Shell Oil, Inc. - Alvania Grease No. 2
Horizontal Pumps ...........................................................................Texaco, Inc. - Regal AFB No. 2

Shell Oil, Inc. - Aeroshell Grease No. 6
Shell Oil, Inc. - Alvania Grease No. 2
NOTE: Standard Propeller Fans and Standard Vertical Submerged Pumps are direct connected to motor
shaft and are not equipped with separate bearings.
(*) These lubricants have been used in the initial lubrication of bearings. Designation by
manufacturer's trade name does not necessarily constitute an exclusive recommendation of his
product. Similar lubricants are available from other manufacturers, and are suitable providing they
have the same characteristics and are compatible with the initial lubricant.
4 - CLEANING
Depending upon seasonal conditions and the location of the unit, air intake screens should be
inspected and cleaned as frequently as necessary to maintain unobstructed airflow into the unit. The 2" x 2"
mesh screen serves primarily to prevent most leaves, paper, and other airborne objects from entering the
unit and obstructing air flow and water spray.
Likewise, the pump suction strainer should be inspected and cleaned as frequently as necessary. We
suggest that the spray pump be shut off when the screen is removed. Most accumulations on the screen can
be shaken off or flushed off with water.
Do not depend upon a loss of spray header pressure as a guide to the necessity of cleaning the
pump screen. Clean the screen when 25 to 50% of the openings in the screen are obstructed.
The unit inherently washes all air passing through; consequently, any dust, dirt, and lint in the air
accumulate in the drain pan. Excessive accumulation will increase the tendency to load the pump suction
screen, and can accelerate pan corrosion.
For flushing out the drain pan, we suggest that the spray pump be stopped, the pump screen removed,
and the water flushed out the drain provided. Readily available "swimming pool" cleaning equipment can be
used to remove bottom sediment and surface scum without shutting down the spray pump.
pg. 2
5 - SCALE ACCUMULATIONS REMOVAL
Most scale deposits on cooling or condensing coils is of a carbonate type, which generally can be removed
chemically without removing the unit from service. The scale-removing chemical should be properly inhibited
to prevent damage to the protective galvanized finishes.
Consult with a local Water Treatment Service, Chemical Cleaning Service, or Chemical Supply Service to
determine which chemical and procedures can most effectively and efficiently remove the scale deposits.
Please note that scale deposits can be prevented or minimized by the proper application of a
satisfactory water treatment as recommended in the "OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS" section.
Occasionally, due to prevailing water conditions, deposits occur on propeller fan blades, propeller fan motor
housings, and centrifugal fan wheels. These deposits generally are of the less soluble solids and can only
be removed by mechanically chipping and scraping. Quite often these deposits are the result of relatively
high total solids in the spray water. If these deposits are excessive, make-up water softening or increased
blowdown should be considered as a preventive measure.
Non-uniform deposits on propeller fan or centrifugal fan blades can dynamically unbalance the fan and might
cause excessive vibration. We suggest that you inspect the fan blades at six-month intervals. If deposits are
present, the blades should be cleaned.
Propeller fan motors depend upon dissipating heat from the housing to the air moving over the motor at a
velocity of 1200 feet/min. Scale deposits on the motor housing will retard the rate of heat transfer and result
in a motor winding temperature rise. Excessive scale deposits may cause premature motor winding failure.
6 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS - V-BELT DRIVE – (IF APPLICABLE)
On units equipped with centrifugal fans, belt tension should be periodically adjusted to prevent slippage. A
simple method of checking follows. Note: DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN BELTS as this will lead to decreased
life of fan and motor bearings and the life of the belts.
1- Check span length (Fan shaft center to motor shaft center).

2- Hook a Spring Scale on one belt at a time at center of span.
3- Pull down on belt to proper scale load reading from chart below.
4- With steel tape scale, measure deflection. Recommended deflection is 1 /64" per inch of span.
5- When replacing with new belts, increase spring scale reading by 1/3 as shown under “NEW”.
Spring Scale Loading - Pounds

USED NEW
CROSS SECTION MIN MAX MIN MAX
A 2.00 2.75 2.70 2.90
B 4.00 5.50 5.30 6.00
C 8.75 12.00 10.00 16.00
It is advisable when replacing belts to replace all belts of a set - using matched belts.
On drives of 7-1/2 Motor Horsepower and less, the drive pulley may be adjustable and set at the factory for
the fan speed noted on the unit drawing. The pulley should only be adjusted if the fan speed is other than
that noted.
pg. 3
7 - SPRAY WATER HEATING – GENERAL – (IF APPLICABLE)
Since the Automatic Spray Water Heating System is applied principally to protect the equipment from the
hazards of operation in cold weather, it is best to inspect the equipment 6 to 8 weeks before the first
expected fall frost. An inspection at this time would normally offer you sufficient lead-time to procure parts, if
required.
8 - SPRAY WATER HEATING – INSPECTION – (IF APPLICABLE)
To observe the operation of the steam solenoid valve (steam jet heater only) or electric immersion heaters,
and the operation of controls and relays, the unit must be taken out of service.
The controls are normally arranged such that when the spray water heat is turned on, the fans are
stopped.
If the unit cannot be removed from service for inspection, change to manual operation by placing Heater
Test Switch to Heater On-Test.
The following should be specifically observed:
1. Observe spray water drain pan operating level and adjust, if necessary. This water level must be
maintained to ensure complete submergence of the heaters. If not submerged, electric immersion
type heaters will be subject to "burn out," and the steam jet heater will not function properly.
2. Clean the steam strainer, if unit is equipped with a steam jet type spray water heater, or
3. Observe electric immersion type heaters for deposits, and clean if necessary.
4. Test each heater for proper operating voltage and amperes. If heater is defective, the amperes
normally will read lower than the rated amperes.
5. Observe all thermostats.
6. Inspect all contacts of thermostats, pressurestats, switches, and relays for overheating, pitting, and
lost motion.
7. CALIBRATE THERMOSTATS AND PRESSURESTATS ONLY WITH EXPERIENCED
PERSONNEL; OTHERWISE, HAVE THESE INSTRUMENTS SERVICED BY THE
MANUFACTURER'S APPROVED REPRESENTATIVE. NOTE THAT THESE HAVE NOT BEEN
PRE-SET BY NIAGARA.
If any wear, lost motion, deterioration, etc. is observed, arrange to adjust, repair, or replace in
accordance with your operating, maintenance, and production schedules.
9 - SPRAY ARRANGEMENT - CLEANING
The spray system is extremely important and should be checked weekly. When dirt or foreign objects
foul the spray system, it should be cleaned.
To clean either the spray arms or the nozzles, it is necessary to remove the spray arm.
NOTE: - Do not remove nozzles from the spray arms unless it is absolutely necessary. Please read
paragraph on nozzle replacement before attempting to remove or replace any nozzles.
A spray arm is removed by loosening the screw type hose clamp and sliding the spray arm out of the
hose. Then lift the free end of the spray arm up and slide it out of the hanger support located at the far end
of the unit.
Back flush both the nozzles and the spray arm using a garden hose. This should clear any
obstructions but if necessary a long rod can be used to loosen stubborn objects or dirt. Note: When a rod
must be used, back flush spray pipe to make sure all dirt is removed.
pg. 4
10 -SPRAY ARRANGEMENT - NOZZLE CLEANING
Do not attempt to remove or replace spray nozzles without first removing the spray arm per above
instructions.
The nozzles are a force-fit type; to remove them, use two flat-bladed screwdrivers. Slide the
screwdrivers under the lugs located on either side of the nozzle. Then pry up the nozzle, forcing it from the
hole. See detail sketch below.
To replace the nozzle, insert the tapered end of a new nozzle into the hole in the spray arm, tap the
nozzle into the hole using a small mallet. When driving a nozzle, maintain alignment and drive nozzle up to
the shoulder; do not overdrive the nozzle. This is a force-fit; when properly seated, it will provide a leak-proof
seal.
11 - REPLACEMENT PARTS
Replacement parts may be ordered through the AFTER-MARKET SALES department. Please
contact the factory.
Generally, most parts can be ordered by descriptive name from the unit drawing. State the size,
serial number, and Niagara Blower Company Order Number which appears on the drawing. The correct size
and serial number is stamped on the nameplate attached to the unit.
For your convenience, a RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST and/or parts drawings may be
included in this manual for replacement items which may be required during the normal life of the unit.
Usually bearings, motors, and motor parts can be procured from your local supplier. Make a record
of motor nameplate data to facilitate the ordering of replacement parts from a local supplier.
pg. 5
Alfa Laval Niagara Wet Surface Air Coolers (WSAC®)
Genuine parts for guaranteed performance
Spray system
Fan system Spray pumps, pump shafts

and impellers, spray distribution
piping, spray nozzles and
Motor, prop fans, centrifugal pressure gauges.
fan wheels, wheel housings,
bearings, fan shafts, gear
reducers, belts, fan shrouds,
vibration switches and
drift eliminators.
Tube bundles
Replacement tube bundles,
tube bundle covers and
gaskets. Completely cleanable
and serpentine tube bundles
designed to meet ASME/
Ancillary TEMA/API specifications and
components original dimensions to minimize
installed cost.
Water make-up valves, pump
screens, temperature switches,
pan heaters, casing panels,
caulk and sealing tape.
Prepared for emergency breakdown situations? Don’t wait until your tube bundle fails. Schedule replacement of critical components in advance,
and avoid downtime delays by stocking parts with longer lead-times.
Contact our help desk at + 1-800-426-5169 or niagara.parts@alfalaval.com.
Alfa Laval Niagara, Phone: +1 716-875-2000, Email: sales.niagara@alfalaval.com, Web: www.niagarablower.com, www.alfalaval.com/air
Alfa Laval Niagara Wet Surface Air Coolers (WSAC®)
System maintenance
Fan maintenance Spray maintenance

1. Lubricate fan motors monthly. 1. Check spray distribution system weekly.
2. Check oil level on gear drives monthly, Check spray nozzles coverage and clean as
add oil if necessary. necessary.
3. Check fan blades for tightness annually, 2. Check operating water level in basin weekly,
adjust pitch if necessary.
adjust float valve if required.
4. Check shaft/coupling condition annually,
if applicable. 3. Clean and flush basin annually.
5. Check air louvers for proper operation 4. Check for casing leaks monthly, repair
monthly, if applicable. as necessary.
6. Check that drift eliminators are clean and
secure monthly, if applicable.
Tube bundle maintenance
1. Check tube bundle pressure drop monthly,
clean internally if necessary.
Water treatment and Pump maintenance

blowdown maintenance
1. Lubricate pump motors monthly.
1. Check bleed rate weekly and adjust if 2. Check pump seal weekly, replace
necessary.
if necessary.
2. Check for biological growth in the basin
and coil tubes weekly. Consult a water System integrity check 3. Check pump screen weekly. If environment is
treatment specialist if growth is not 1. Check integrity of major components and casing extremely dirty, clean screens daily.
under control. panels annually, replace if necessary.
Be sure to follow all plant safety procedures when servicing your Alfa Laval Niagara WSAC system.
In addition to annual inspection, WSAC systems should be serviced on a regular basis.
Avoid downtime in critical processes – schedule an integrity audit by a qualified Alfa Laval Niagara field service technician today.
Alfa Laval Niagara, Phone: +1 716-875-2000, Email: sales.niagara@alfalaval.com, Web: www.niagarablower.com, www.alfalaval.com/air
91 Sawyer Avenue, Tonawanda, NY 14150
Phone: 716-875-2000 ~ Fax: 716-875-1077
Niagara.Parts@alfalaval.com / www.niagarablower.com
Parts Quotation
AM Quotation No.: NBCP 180905-0 REV.0 Submitted by: Paul Pinak

Orig. SO#: 25600 Date Submitted: September 5, 2018
Customer Data:
Company: BUA Group
Address: c/o NOM (UK) LTD. Contact Name: Roberto Sepulveda
Address 2: Kilometer 164 Benin-Okene Road Phone: 234 8113449918
City, State, Zip: Okpella, EDOP state Fax:
Country: Nigeria E-Mail: Roberto.Sepulveda@buagroup.com
Terms:
Quote Validity: 30 Days Est. Lead Time: 8 Wks.
Payment Options: Net 30 = As Quoted Shipping Payment: Prepay & Add
Net 60 = Add 10% Finance Charge FOB Terms: Origin
Sales Tax: Not Included if Applicable
All Payment Options Pending Credit Approval (Send tax exempt form with PO)
Part/Assembly No. Description Price, ea. Qty. Subtotal
SO 25600 001 Fan Motor, 10HP $ 4,275.00 1 $ 4,275.00

SO 25600 002 Fan, 60" dia. $ 1,533.24 1 $ 1,533.24
SO 25600 003 End Suction Spray Pump with Motor $ 7,275.00 1 $ 7,275.00
SO 25600 004 Vibration Transmitter $ 3,660.00 2 $ 7,320.00
SO 25600 005 Temperture Transmitter $ 521.55 1 $ 521.55
SO 25600 006 Pressure Switch $ 821.88 1 $ 821.88
SO 25600 007 Float Valve $ 450.10 1 $ 450.10
SO 25600 008 Pressure Gauge $ 91.29 1 $ 91.29
SO 25600 009 Pump Screen $ 835.41 1 $ 835.41
SO 25600 010 Set of gaskets (1 front & 1 rear) $ 779.15 1 $ 779.15
AM 1600 0005 Spray Nozzles, 3.5BLK $ 8.13 36 $ 292.68
GRAND TOTAL (US$): $ 24,195.30
NIAGARA BLOWER Heat Transfer Solutions Page 1 of 1 9/7/2018

PHONE: (716) 875-2000  FAX: (716) 875-1077
SECTION 6
EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DRAWING DESCRIPTION
D114853_rev.C General Arrangement Drawing

D114859_rev.A P&ID
D114851 Electrical Drawing Package
110-00-25600-01 Top Level Assembly Drawings
105-00-25600-01 Pump Skid Riser Assembly Drawings
REVISIONS
REV
REV. LOCATION REV BY CHECKED DATE REVISION OR ADDITION
BY
5 8
23 22 21 19 6
3
SEE DETAIL "A"
4 20 21 22 23
DETAIL "A" - PIPING SUPPORT

PIPE REMOVED FOR CLARITY
TYP (2) PLACES
495-01-9803-001 Gasket, Caulk, Tempro/Vulkem Polyurethane Sealant, 626 Gray, 25 TREMPRO 626
26 3 FT/Tube
1 25 2 495-00-0102-001 Gasket, Tape, 1/8" x 3/8" x 50', 3M Weatherban 5354 BUTYL
24 54 653-18-1801-001 WASHER, SQUARE, 2-1/8 x 2-1/8 FOR 3/8", SEND OUT FOR HDG HRS SA-1011
126 465-12-0013-001 NUT, HEX, 3/8" - 16UNC, J995 GR8, ZINC YELLOW
23 CS J-995
DICHROMATE
126 461-12-0814-001 WASHER, 3/8", SPLIT LOCK, ALLOY STEEL, YELLOW ZINC,
22 CS
(FOR GRADE 8 BOLT)
21 252 461-12-0112-001 WASHER, 3/8", FLAT, F436, YELLOW ZINC PLATING CS F-436
72 450-12-0811-001 CAP SCREW, HEX HEAD, 3/8" - 16UNC X 1"L, J429 G8, ZINC
20 CS ZINC PLT
YELLOW DICHROMATE PLATED
54 450-12-1111-001 CAP SCREW, HEX HEAD, 3/8" - 16UNC X 1-1/4"L, J429 G8, ZINC
19 CS ZINC PLT
18 CS J-995
DICHROMATE
17 CS
(FOR GRADE 8 BOLT)
16 16 461-16-0212-001 WASHER, 5/8", SAE FLAT, F436, YELLOW ZINC PLATING CS F-436
15 CS ZINC PLT
14 CS J-995
DICHROMATE
13 CS
(FOR GRADE 8 BOLT)
12 16 461-18-0212-001 WASHER, 3/4", SAE FLAT, F436, YELLOW ZINC PLATING CS F-436
11 CS ZINC PLT
10 1 494-04-1571-001 GASKET - FF FLANGE, 4"- 150#, 1/8" THK NEOPRENE
9 1 494-06-1571-001 GASKET - FF FLANGE, 6"- 150#, 1/8" THK NEOPRENE
2 470-04-1225-001 U-BOLT, 4" PIPE, 3/8" - 16 THD, CS - GALV (MCMASTER 8862T61
8 CS GALV
OR EQUAL)
7 2 305-04-25600-05 BRACKET, SPRAY PIPING, ANGLED HRS A1011
6 2 305-04-25600-04 BRACKET, SPRAY PIPING, HORIZONTAL HRS A1011
5 2 305-04-25600-03 BRACKET, PIPE SUPPORT, VERTICAL HRS A1011
4 1 105-00-25600-01 ASSEMBLY, PUMP SKID & RISER
3 1 102-35-25600-01 ASSEMBLY, SECTION, FAN
2 1 101-28-25600-01 ASSEMBLY, SECTION, BASIN
1 1 104-28-25600-01 ASSEMBLY, SECTION, COIL, CLEANABLE
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER MATERIAL
2 DESCRIPTION
NO. DESCRIPTION
CUST P.O. NO.
APPROVAL SIGNATURES DATE -
20 21 22 23 25 26 DRAWN BY: SERIAL NO.
A. Burgess 7/9/2018
CHECKED BY: SHOP ORDER NO.
BUFFALO NEW YORK
T. Pearce 7/9/2018 - UNAUTHORIZED USE, MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION EITHER IN WHOLE OR PART IS
PROHIBITED. DRAWING DESIGN AND OTHER DISCLOSURES PROPERTY OF NIAGARA BLOWER
19 21 22 23 24 25 26 APPROVED BY:
P. Pinak 7/10/2018
DIMENSIONS IN: COMPANY.
MILLIMETERS TITLE:
INCHES
ASSEMBLY, WATER-COOLER, WSAC A4412L
TOLERANCES UNLESS OTHERWISE CUSTOMER:
RELEASED BY:
-
SPECIFIED:
DECIMALS: .XX .015"
BUA Group
ESTIMATED WEIGHT: 24116 Lbs. .XXX .010"
DWG. SHEET
APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS ANGLES: 1/2 DEG. DRAWING NO. 110-00-25600-01
FIRST USED ON S.O.: 25600 -
FRACTIONS: 1/4"
B -
SCALE: 1:96 1 OF 2
SIZE
SHEET NO.
REVISION
PART NUMBER: C:\PDMWE_Niagara\Orders\SO 25600 BUA Group\Mechanical Engineering\CADD\07_Top Level\110-00-25600-01
3
42 16
3
84 8
1
78 4
1
30 4
PLAN VIEW
10 15 16 17 18
1
39 8
24
SEE DETAIL "A"
1
61 4 40
15
158 16
O.A.
HEIGHT 9
13 11 12 13 14
11 81 16
73 16
5
2 16
3
12 F.O.F. 280 UNIT LENGTH 28 4
11
1
162 16 O.A. WIDTH
322 4 O.A. LENGTH
PROCESS END VIEW PUMP END VIEW
ELEVATION VIEW - 110-00-25600-01

CUST P.O. NO.
DRAWN BY: SERIAL NO.
A. Burgess 7/9/2018
BUFFALO NEW YORK
APPROVED BY: DIMENSIONS IN: COMPANY.
P. Pinak 7/10/2018 MILLIMETERS TITLE:
INCHES
RELEASED BY:
-
SPECIFIED:
DECIMALS: .XX .015"
BUA Group
.XXX .010"
DWG. SHEET
FRACTIONS: 1/4"
B -
SCALE: 1:96 2 OF 2
SIZE
SHEET NO.
REVISION
PART NUMBER: C:\PDMWE_Niagara\Orders\SO 25600 BUA Group\Mechanical Engineering\CADD\07_Top Level\110-00-25600-01
REVISIONS
REV
REV. LOCATION REV BY CHECKED DATE REVISION OR ADDITION
BY
465-12-0013-001 NUT, HEX, 3/8" - 16UNC, J995 GR8, ZINC YELLOW

31 6 - CS J-995
DICHROMATE
461-12-0814-001 WASHER, 3/8", SPLIT LOCK, ALLOY STEEL, YELLOW
30 6 - CS
7 ZINC, (FOR GRADE 8 BOLT)
461-12-0212-001 WASHER, 3/8", SAE FLAT, F436, YELLOW ZINC
29 12 - CS F-436
PLATING
450-12-0811-001 CAP SCREW, HEX HEAD, 3/8" - 16UNC X 1"L, J429 G8,
28 2 - CS ZINC PLT
ZINC YELLOW DICHROMATE PLATED
450-12-1311-001 CAP SCREW, HEX HEAD, 3/8" - 16UNC X 1-1/2"L, J429
27 4 - CS
G8, ZINC YELLOW DICHROMATE PLATED
465-16-0013-001 NUT, HEX, 5/8" - 11UNC, J995 GR8, ZINC YELLOW
26 24 - CS J-995
DICHROMATE
461-16-0814-001 WASHER, 5/8", SPLIT LOCK, ALLOY STEEL, YELLOW
25 24 - CS
ZINC, (FOR GRADE 8 BOLT)
24 48 - CS F-436
PLATING
16
23 24 CS ZINC PLT
22 24 - CS F-436
PLATING
21 24 CS ZINC PLT
470-07-1035-001 U - Bolt, 1/4"PIPE, 1/4" - 20 THD, SS 304, (MCMASTER
20 1 SS 304 SA-240
8896T91 OR EQUAL
19 1 305-04-25600-02 BRACKET, UPPER, PIPING SUPPORT 6 7/8" SS 304
18 1 305-04-25600-01 BRACKET, LOWER, PIPING SUPPORT 5 1/2 SS 304
17 3 494-06-1571-001 GASKET - FF FLANGE, 6"- 150#, 1/8" THK - NEOPRENE
16 3 494-04-1571-001 GASKET - FF FLANGE, 4"- 150#, 1/8" THK - NEOPRENE
435-50-5101-001 PLUG, SQUARE HEAD, 1/2" NPT, CL3000, B16.11,
15 1 - CS SA-105
B1.20.1, BLK
GAUGE, PRESSURE, 0-30 PSI, 2-1/2" DIAL, 1/4" NPT
14 1 488-07-2500-002 BOTTOM CONNECTION, LIQUID FILLED, WINTERS -
MODEL Q802
6 13 2 472-50-0407-001 VALVE, BALL, 1/4" NPT - BRASS
12 2 416-07-5015-001 ELBOW, 90°, 1/4" NPT, 150#, B1.20.1 - SS 304 SA-351
415-07-1310-001 NIPPLE, PIPE, 1/4" NPT, TBE, SCH 40, 1-1/2"L, SA-312
11 1 1 1/2 SS 304 SA-312
304/304L,(B1.20.1)
10 1 415-07-3310-001 NIPPLE, PIPE, 1/4" NPT, TBE, SCH 40, 4"L, SA-312 4 SS 304 SA-312
304/304L,(B1.20.1)
415-07-0710-001 NIPPLE, PIPE, 1/4" NPT, TBE, SCH 40, 7/8"L, SA-312
9 3 7/8 SS 304 SA-312
304/304L,(B1.20.1)
8 1 205-05-25600-01 ASSEMBLY, SUPPORT, PUMP MOTOR (TOP-HAT)
26 25 24 23 7 1 205-04-25600-02 ASSEMBLY, PIPING, INLET
16
6 1 205-04-25600-01 ASSEMBLY, SPOOL, DISCHARGE
5 1 205-02-25600-01 ASSEMBLY, SPOOL PIECE, SUCTION
2
4 1 476-06-1201-001 VALVE, BUTTERFLY, 6" NPS, LUG - Gray Cast Iron
15 3 1 205-02-25600-02 ASSEMBLY, PIPING, SUCTION
1 2 1 205-03-25600-01 ASSEMBLY, SPRAY RISER
SPRAY PUMP, (GOULDS 3656) 17BF4L5C0, 9-1/8"
16 1 1 484-06-0400-001 IMPELLER W/10 HP, 190-380-415/50/3, 2900 RPM, TEFC - -
22 21 MOTOR, 210JM FRAME
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER MATERIAL
DESCRIPTION LENGTH DESCRIPTION
NO.
CUST P.O. NO.
DRAWN BY:
8
SERIAL NO.
A. Burgess 7/5/2018
BUFFALO NEW YORK
APPROVED BY: DIMENSIONS IN: COMPANY.
P. Pinak 7/9/2018 MILLIMETERS TITLE:
31 30 29 27 17 21 22 3 17 4 17 5 INCHES
ASSEMBLY, PUMP SKID & RISER
105-00-25600-01
RELEASED BY:
-
SPECIFIED:
DECIMALS: .XX .015"
BUA Group
ESTIMATED WEIGHT: 366 Lbs. .XXX .010"
DWG. SHEET
ASSEMBLY, PUMP SKID & RISER APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS ANGLES: 1/2 DEG. DRAWING NO. 105-00-25600-01
FRACTIONS: 1/4"
B -
SCALE: 1:64 1 OF 2
SIZE
SHEET NO.
REVISION
PART NUMBER: C:\PDMWE_Niagara\Orders\SO 25600 BUA Group\Mechanical Engineering\CADD\05_Pump-Skid-Riser\105-00-25600-01
13
5 1 6 16
33 8 14 8
PRESSURE
SWITCH
1
144 4
9
13
11
7
2 16
20
19
19
7 12
10
3
47 4
31 30 29 28
PLAN VIEW 1
163 4
18
DETAIL "A"
PRESSURE GAUGE COMPONENTS REMOVED FOR CLARITY
1 3
15 8 34
14
143 13
3
14
SEE DETAIL "A" SEE DETAIL "B" 9
12
5
33 8 9
DETAIL "B"

CUST P.O. NO.
DRAWN BY: SERIAL NO.
A. Burgess 7/5/2018
3
14 16 CHECKED BY: SHOP ORDER NO.
BUFFALO NEW YORK
3 1 PROHIBITED. DRAWING DESIGN AND OTHER DISCLOSURES PROPERTY OF NIAGARA BLOWER
81 8 23 16
APPROVED BY:
P. Pinak 7/9/2018
DIMENSIONS IN: COMPANY.
MILLIMETERS TITLE:
ASSEMBLY, PUMP SKID & RISER
ELEVATION VIEW - 105-00-25600-01 END VIEW RELEASED BY:
INCHES
SPECIFIED:
BUA Group
ASSEMBLY, PUMP SKID & RISER - DECIMALS: .XX .015"
.XXX .010"
DWG. SHEET
FRACTIONS: 1/4"
B -
SCALE: 1:64 2 OF 2
SIZE
SHEET NO.
REVISION
PART NUMBER: C:\PDMWE_Niagara\Orders\SO 25600 BUA Group\Mechanical Engineering\CADD\05_Pump-Skid-Riser\105-00-25600-01
Section 7
OTHER LITERATURE SECTION CONTENTS
Control Panel Manual
Pump Data
Fan Data
Fan Motor Data
Vibration Transmitter Data
Pressure Switch Data
Temperature Transmitter Data
Float Valve
Pressure Gauge
Sealant Tape & Caulk MSDS Sheets
Recommended Spare Parts

Section 7
Other Literature – Control Panel Manual

MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER
The Color Touchscreen, and Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (HOA) comprise the operator
interface to control the WSAC system.
HAND-OFF-AUTO
The Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch (HOA) is used to select the system operating mode and to
reset the system after a fault shutdown. Normal system operating modes are as follows:
AUTO
The AUTO mode is the normal operating mode of the WSAC system. The spray pump and all
fans are energized and all safeties are enabled.
HAND
The HAND mode is used to recover from a fault condition. The spray pump is energized and
the fans can be operated using the temperature PID manual mode. All non-critical safeties are
disabled.
OFF
In the OFF mode, the system is stopped and most safeties are disabled.
When the HOA switch is moved to the HAND or AUTO position, hand mode or auto mode
begins immediately and “HAND” or “AUTO” is displayed on the message display.
When the HOA switch is moved to the OFF position, there will be a two second time delay
(HOA time delay) before the system enters off mode and “OFF” is displayed on the message
display. This delay prevents the system from stopping and immediately restarting while passing
through the OFF position if the HOA switch is moved from HAND to AUTO or from AUTO to
HAND.
To reset the system after a failure, position the HOA to the off position for two to three seconds
(HOA time delay) then move the HOA to the hand or auto position and the system will be reset.
The alarm reset button can also be pressed.
8-1
HOME SCREEN
LOGIN – pops up keypad for operator to enter password for access to PID & system settings
LOGOUT – clears password to prevent access to PID and system settings screen
ALARM BANNER – window with scrolling alarm and warning messages
MENU – opens a menu which allows access to overviews, settings, trends, and PID screens
8-2
MENU
The menu button is located on the bottom right corner on all screens. It allows the authorized
operator to access screens necessary for proper monitoring and operation of the WSAC
equipment. Once the button is pressed, the menu will pop up.
GRAPHIC OVERVIEW – opens the graphic overview screen

TEXT OVERVIEW – opens the text overview screen
ALARMS – opens the alarms screen which lists all active alarms
ALARMS HISTORY – opens the alarms history screen which lists all active and past alarms
VIBRATION TREND – opens the fan vibration trend screen
SYSTEM SETTINGS – opens the system settings screen (if operator is logged in)
TEMP PID – opens the process outlet temperature PID screen (if operator is logged in)
ANALOG OUTPUT – opens the analog output setup screen (if operator is logged in)
ANALOG INPUT – opens the analog intput setup screen (if operator is logged in)
8-3
GRAPHIC OVERVIEW
This screen shows the status of the system in a graphical format. The color of the symbols for
the fans and pump changes from red to green when the motor starters or VFDs are energized. The
outlet air temperature is displayed along with the fan speed and fan vibration readings. In the
upper left-hand corner, the current operating condition is displayed: Off, Run, Hand, and Alarm.
Between the screen select pushbuttons is a window with scrolling alarm messages.
HOME – opens the home screen

BACK – returns to previous screen
8-4
TEXT OVERVIEW
This screen shows the status of the system in a text-based format. The fan and pump status changes
from red to green while the text message changes from STOPPED to RUNNING when the motor
starters or VFDs are energized. In the upper left-hand corner, the current operating condition is
displayed: Off, Run, Hand, and Alarm. Between the screen select pushbuttons is a window with
scrolling alarm messages.

8-5
SYSTEM SETTINGS
The system settings screen allows the authorized user to change the operating mode of the system as
well as operational setpoints. In the upper left-hand corner, the current operating condition is
displayed: Off, Run, Hand, and Alarm. Between the screen select pushbuttons is a window with
scrolling alarm messages.
FAN ON SETPOINT – operator entry of temperature at which the fans will energize.
FAN OFF SETPOINT – operator entry of temperature at which the fans will de-energize.
PROCESS OUTLET CRITICAL HIGH TEMP– operator entry of temperature at which the high
process outlet temperature alarm is activated.
ALARM SETPOINTS & ANALOG CONFIG. – opens the alarms setpoints and analog signals
configuration screen
MOTOR HOURS OF OPERATION – opens motor hours of operation display and reset screen
DATA MANAGEMENT & HMI SETUP – opens data management and HMI setup screen

8-6
ANALOG INPUT SETUP
The analog input setup screen allows the authorized operator to set the filter and alarm setpoints for
each analog input signal. This screen is used to assist the operator in troubleshooting the analog input
components along with monitoring critical process variables with high/low alarm notifications. In the
upper left-hand corner, the current operating condition is displayed: Off, Run, Hand, and Alarm.
Between the screen select pushbuttons is a window with scrolling alarm messages.
SIGNAL (mA) – displays 4-20mA value calculated by PLC used for troubleshooting
INPUT MIN – displays the minimum value which the analog input component can read
INPUT MAX – displays the maximum value which the analog input component can read
FILTER – operator entry of filter for smoothing of erratic analog input signal (if needed)
LOW ALARM – operator entry of low alarm setpoint for scaled analog input value
HIGH ALARM – operator entry of high alarm setpoint for scaled analog input value
TIME DELAY – operator entry of time delay used for both low and high alarms

NEXT – opens the analog outputs setup screen
8-7
ANALOG OUTPUT SETUP
The analog output setup screen allows the authorized operator to set the low and high clamp setpoints
for each analog output signal. This screen is also used to assist the operator in troubleshooting the
analog output components along with monitoring the raw PID output values. In the upper left-hand
corner, the current operating condition is displayed: Off, Run, Hand, and Alarm. Between the
screen select pushbuttons is a window with scrolling alarm messages.
LOW CLAMP (%) – operator entry of minimum value at which the analog output will operate
HIGH CLAMP (%) – operator entry of maximum value at which the analog output will operate
RAW 14-BIT OUTPUT – display value of raw output scaled 0 to 16383
SCALED OUTPUT – display value of PID output scaled 0 to 100%
ANALOG SIGNAL (mA) – displays 4-20mA value calculated by PLC used for troubleshooting

8-8
MOTOR HOURS OF OPERATION
The motor hours of operation screen allows the authorized operator to monitor the hours of operation
of each motor and VFD in the system. In the upper left-hand corner, the current operating
condition is displayed: Off, Run, Hand, and Alarm. Between the screen select pushbuttons is a
window with scrolling alarm messages.
PRESS AND HOLD TO RESET TIMER – press and hold the pushbutton to reset the
corresponding motor run timer

8-9
DATA MANAGEMENT & HMI SETUP
The data management and HMI setup screen allows the authorized operator to transfer trend and
alarm history data from the HMI to a USB device as well as access HMI settings. In the upper left-
hand corner, the current operating condition is displayed: Off, Run, Hand, and Alarm. Between
the screen select pushbuttons is a window with scrolling alarm messages.
PRESS TO TRANSFER DATA – once a USB storage device has been connected to the back
of the HMI, press the desired pushbutton to transfer the data files (the READY display will
change to PLEASE WAIT… until the file transfer is complete)
UNIT PERFORMANCE TREND HISTORY – data stored up to 90 days
ALL PID TREND HISTORY – data stored up to 90 days
ALARM HISTORY – data stored up to 30 days
SET TIME & DATE FOR HMI – Changing the time and date for the HMI affects the data files
stored in the HMI and should only be performed during daylight savings. To change the time
and date press any of the pushbuttons. A pop-up screen will prompt a message. Once
PROCEED has been pressed, the operator has 60 seconds to enter the correct time and date.
Each occurrence is stored in the alarm history.
PRESS AND HOLD TO REBOOT HMI – press pushbutton to reboot the HMI
PRESS AND HOLD TO OPEN HMI SETTINGS – dialog box will appear requesting the local
password. Use the virtual keyboard which appears to enter the password 111111 in the
box.

8-10
PROCESS TEMP PID
This screen displays the process outlet temperature PID control loop parameters, setpoint (SP),
process variable (PV) and control variable (CV). In the upper left-hand corner, the current
operating condition is displayed: Off, Run, Hand, and Alarm. Between the screen select
pushbuttons is a window with scrolling alarm messages.
SETPOINT – pops up keypad for operator entry of process outlet temperature set point
MANUAL OUTPUT – pops up keypad for operator entry of manual control valve position
MANUAL – places PID control loop in manual mode
AUTO – place PID control loop in automatic mode
GAIN (Kp) – pops up keypad for operator entry of PID loop’s gain tuning parameter
RESET (Ki) – pops up keypad for operator entry of PID loop’s reset tuning parameter
RATE (Kd) – pops up keypad for operator entry of PID loop’s rate tuning parameter
TEMP PID TREND – opens the process outlet temperature PID trend screen

8-11
ALARMS
This screen displays all active alarm messages that are displayed on the scrolling alarm bar. In
the upper left-hand corner, the current operating condition is displayed: Off, Run, Hand, and
Alarm.
RESET – once the issue has been resolved, press pushbutton to reset active alarms
HISTORY – opens the alarm history screen

8-12
ALARM HISTORY
This screen displays history of all recorded alarm messages up to 30 days. Each day a file is
created and stored in the HMI memory. The operator can choose which day to view using the
select drop-down menu. In the upper left-hand corner, the current operating condition is
displayed: Off, Run, Hand, and Alarm.
DROP-DOWN MENU – allows operator to select the day of alarm history data
RED TEXT – active alarms

GREEN TEXT – resolved alarms
BLACK TEXT – acknowledged alarms
VIEW ALL – shows all recorded alarm messages

HIDE ACKNOW. – hides acknowledged alarms
HIDE RESOLVED – hides resolved alarms
RESET – once the issue has been resolved, press pushbutton to reset active alarms
ACKNOWLEDGE – acknowledges all current alarms

8-13
VIBRATION TREND
This screen trends the fan vibration readings. In the upper left-hand corner, the current
operating condition is displayed: Off, Run, Hand, and Alarm. Between the screen select
pushbuttons is a window with scrolling alarm messages.
OFF/ON – toggle switch allows operator to control the visibility of each trend channel (ON =
shown, OFF = hidden)
MIN – pops up keypad for operator entry of Y-axis minimum value for each channel
MAX – pops up keypad for operator entry of Y-axis maximum value for each channel
X-AXIS RANGE - pops up keypad for operator entry of total time range displayed on trend
RESTORE DEFAULTS – momentary pushbutton which loads the default values for each trend
channel into the min/max values for the Y-axis

8-14
TEMP PID TREND
This screen trends the process outlet temperature, process outlet temperature PID setpoint,
and VFD speed. In the upper left-hand corner, the current operating condition is displayed: Off,
Run, Hand, and Alarm. Between the screen select pushbuttons is a window with scrolling alarm
messages.
OFF/ON – toggle switch allows operator to control the visibility of each trend channel (ON =
shown, OFF = hidden)
MIN – pops up keypad for operator entry of Y-axis minimum value for each channel
MAX – pops up keypad for operator entry of Y-axis maximum value for each channel
X-AXIS RANGE - pops up keypad for operator entry of total time range displayed on trend
RESTORE DEFAULTS – momentary pushbutton which loads the default values for each trend
channel into the min/max values for the Y-axis

8-15
Section 7
Other Literature – Pump Data

ÐÛÎÚÑÎÓßÒÝÛ ÝËÎÊÛÍ Š ëð ØÆô ïìëð ÎÐÓ
ÝËÎÊßÍ ÜÛ ÜÛÍÛÓÐÛOÑ Š ëð ØÆô ïìëð ÎÐÓ
Ó±¼»´ ïéÞÚ ñ Í·¦» øÌ¿³¿/±÷ ì ¨ ê Š ïð ÒÑÌÛæ Ò±¬ ®»½±³³»²¼»¼ º±® ±°»®¿¬·±² Ñ°¬·±²¿´ ×³°»´´»®
¾»§±²¼ °®·²¬»¼ ØóÏ ½«®ª»ò ×³°«´-±® ±°¬¿¬·ª±
ÓÛÌÛÎÍ ÚÛÛÌ ÎÐÓ ïìëð Ý«®ª» øÝ«®ª¿÷
ÒÑÌßæ Ò± -» ®»½±³·»²¼¿ °¿®¿ º«²½·±²¿³·»²¬±
ÓÛÌÎÑÍ Ð×ÛÍ Ñ®¼»®·²¹ Ý±¼» Ü·¿ò
×ÓÐò ÜÉÙò Ò±ò îééóéè ³?- ¿´´? ¼»´ ·²¼·½¿¼± »² ´¿ ½«®ª¿ ØóÏò
Ý-¼·¹± ¼» °»¼·¼± Ü·?ò
ï
ïê þ
íð ïðð Þ çç ïê
Ý çï
ÒÐÍØÎ Š ÚÛÛÌ øÐ×ÛÍ÷ Ü ïï
ïê
ï
êù
èð
Ú éb
ëçû ÛÚÚò êç
éì éç ÒÑÌÛæ Ð«³° ©·´´
ß èï èî éù °¿-- ¿ -°¸»®» ¬± é ïêþ
îð
ïðù ¼·¿³»¬»®ò
êð Þ ïë ØÐ
èî ÒÑÌßæ Ô¿ ¾±³¾¿ ¼»¶¿®?
èï °¿-¿® «²¿ »-º»®¿ ¼»
Ý ïíù
Ü éç ¸¿-¬¿ é ¼» °«´¹¿¼¿ ¼»
¼·?³»¬®±ò
Û éì
ìð
Ú
ïð
ïð ØÐ
éïñî ØÐ
îð ë ØÐ
ð ð
ð ïðð îðð íðð ìðð ëðð êðð éðð èðð çðð ËòÍò ÙÐÓ
ð îð ìð êð èð ïðð ïîð ïìð ïêð ïèð îðð ³íñ¸®

ÝßÐßÝ×ÌÇ øÝßÐßÝ×ÜßÜ÷
Ó±¼»´ ïëß×ñÞÚ ñ Í·¦» øÌ¿³¿/±÷ ì ¨ ê Š ïí ÒÑÌÛæ Ò±¬ ®»½±³³»²¼»¼ º±® ±°»®¿¬·±² ¾»§±²¼ Ñ°¬·±²¿´ ×³°»´´»®
°®·²¬»¼ ØóÏ ½«®ª»ò
ÓÛÌÛÎÍ ÚÛÛÌ ÎÐÓ ïìëð Ý«®ª» øÝ«®ª¿÷ ÝÒðíîîÎðð ×³°«´-±® ±°¬¿¬·ª±
ÓÛÌÎÑÍ Ð×ÛÍ ÒÑÌßæ Ò± -» ®»½±³·»²¼¿ °¿®¿ º«²½·±²¿³·»²¬±
×ÓÐò ÜÉÙò Ò±ò îéêóìì ³?- ¿´´? ¼»´ ·²¼·½¿¼± »² ´¿ ½«®ª¿ ØóÏò Ñ®¼»®·²¹ Ý±¼» Ü·¿ò
ïëð
Ý-¼·¹± ¼» °»¼·¼± Ü·?ò
ïìð Ó ïíï ïêþ
éî û ÛÚÚ êù ÒÐÍØÎ Š ÚÛÛÌ øÐ×ÛÍ÷
ìð ß ïîé
ïíð Ó éè éù èù
èî Þ ïîc
ß ïðù
ïîð
Ý ïîd
Þ
èî
ïïð Ý ïîù Ü ïïé
éè Û ïïí
Ü
íð ïðð Û ïìù
éî Ú ïïï ïê
Ú
çð Ù é
Ù
èð Ø
Ö êî Ö
éð Õ
îð çé
êð Ô
Ô çí
ëð ÒÑÌÛæ Ð«³° ©·´´ °¿-- ¿
-°¸»®» ¬± é ïêþ ¼·¿³»¬»®ò
ìð
ÒÑÌßæ Ô¿ ¾±³¾¿ ¼»¶¿®?
ïð °¿-¿® «²¿ »-º»®¿ ¼»
íð
¸¿-¬¿ é ¼» °«´¹¿¼¿ ¼»
îð ¼·?³»¬®±ò
ïð
ËòÍò
ð ð ÙÐÓ
ð ïðð îðð íðð ìðð ëðð êðð éðð èðð çðð ïððð ïïðð ïîðð ïíðð
ð ëð ïðð ïëð îðð îëð ³íñ¸®
ÝßÐßÝ×ÌÇ øÝßÐßÝ×ÜßÜ÷
ÐßÙÛ îí
íêëê Ó ú ÔóÙ®±«° Ü·³»²-·±²- ¿²¼ É»·¹¸¬- Ó»½¸¿²·½¿´ Í»¿´
Ù®«°± Ó § Ôô ³±¼»´± íêëê ó Ð»-± § ¼·³»²-·±²»- Í»´´± ³»½?²·½±
Ü×ÍÝØßÎÙÛ ÒÑÌÛæ ÒÑÌßæ
ßÞ Æ Î ÜÛÍÝßÎÙß ÝÐ
ßÐÐÎÑÈò Ç É ÓßÈ »³¾¿®½¿² ½±² ´¿ ¼»-½¿®¹¿
ó
±¬®¿- ±®·»²¬¿½·±²»-ô ®»¬·®»
È ÍËÝÌ×ÑÒ ´±- °»®²±- ¼» ´¿ ½¿®½¿-¿ô
ÍËÝÝ×MÒ
¸¿¹¿ ®±¬¿® ´¿ ¼»-½¿®¹¿
í
Ð ÓßÈ è ¸¿-¬¿ ´¿ °±-·½·-² ¼»-»¿¼¿
có ïí
Ü ÜÝ ÜÜ í
ñ ¼» °«´¹¿¼¿ ¿ «²¿ ¬±®ó
Ù ÓßÈ -·-² ¼» íé °·»-ñ´·¾®¿ô § ´±-
Ö Ú Ú
Û Û Ô
ß Þ ó îò Ü·³»²-·±²»- »² °«´¹¿¼¿-ô
ßÐÐÎÑÈò ÓßÈò ÜÎß×Ò ÐÔËÙ °»-± »² ´·¾®¿-ò
½±²-¬®«½½·-²ò
Ð«³° Ü·³»²-·±²- ¿²¼ É»·¹¸¬- øÜ·³»²-·±² •ÔŒ ¼»¬»®³·²»¼ ¾§ Ð«³° ¿²¼ Ó±¬±®÷ô Ð»-± § ¼·³»²-·±²»- ¼» ´¿ ¾±³¾¿ ø´¿ ¼·³»²-·±² •ÔŒ »-¬¿ ¼»¬»®³·²¿¼¿ °±® ´¿ ¾±³¾¿ § »´ ³±¬±®÷
ÒÐÌ É»·¹¸¬ Ô
Ð«³° Í«½¬·±² Ü·-½¸¿®¹» ÝÐ ÜÝ Ü®¿·² ø´¾-÷
ÜÜ Î É È Ç Æ Ó±¬±® Ú®¿³»ô Þ¿-¬·¼±® ¼»´ ³±¬±®
Þ±³¾¿ Í«½½·-² Ü»-½¿®¹¿ Ó¿¨ò Ó¿¨ò Ü®»²¿¶» Ð»-±-
ÒÐÌ ø´·¾®¿-÷ ïìð ïèð îïð îëðñîèð íîð íêð
ïc¨îŠïð îö ïcö íðd êb ëéè ïd ë í ëc çí ïðéè ïïc ïîc ïîb Š Š
ïd ê
îc¨íŠ è íö îcö íðb êd ëd ïïíïê ëïè ííè ë éè ïïíè ïî ïí ïíd Š Š
îc¨íŠ ç
ííc éïè ê í
éc îb ëc èë ïðëè ïïd ïîd ïîc ïí ïíëè
îc¨íŠ ïð í îc íc è ë
îc¨íŠ ïí íðd èéè éëè ç í éc ïíç Š Š ïîc ïîb Š Š
í¨ìŠ è íðçïê êd ëíè d ëëïê é ëëè èî ïïíïê ïïïíïê ïîïíïê ïíïïê ïíëè Š
í¨ìŠ ïð ì í íðíè éíè êc íb ëïè éc ëc çç ïï ïïëè ïîëè ïîéè Š Š
í
í¨ìŠ ïí ííd çc èïè ë ç éc ïëë Š Š ïîc ïîb Š Š
ì¨ëŠ è ë íìd êéè ëb í
è ëc è ë çç ïïíè ïî ïí ïíd ïíb ïìíè
ì¨êŠ ïð ì íðéè èëè éc ìc ëc èc íïè é ïíë Š Š ïíïè ïííè Š Š
ê
ì¨êŠ ïí íî çb èïè ëd ç í éc ïéï Š Š ïîc ïîb ïí Š
ê¨èŠ ïí
ì¨êŠ ïê
Ó±¬±® Ú®¿³»- ¿²¼ Ø±®-»°±©»®

Þ¿-¬·¼±®»- ¼»´ ³±¬±® § °±¬»²½·¿ »² ØÐ
Ú®¿³» Í·¦» ÖÓ
ÑÜÐ ÌÛÚÝ ÎÐÓ
Ì¿³¿/± ¼»´ ¾¿-¬·¼±® ÖÓ
Ó±¬±® Ü·³»²-·±²- ¿²¼ É»·¹¸¬- ø³¿§ ª¿®§ ©·¬¸ ³¿²«º¿½¬«®»®÷ö ïìíÖÓ ï ï
ïìëÖÓ ïcô î ïcô î
Ð»-±- § ¼·³»²-·±²»- ¼»´ ³±¬±® ø°«»¼»² ª¿®·¿® ¼» ¿½«»®¼± ¿´ º¿¾®·½¿²¬»÷ö
ïèîÖÓ í í
Ó±¬±® Ú®¿³» ïèìÖÓ ë ë
ßÞ Ðö É»·¹¸¬ ø´¾-ò÷
Þ¿-¬·¼±® ß Þ Ü Û Ú Ù Ø îïíÖÓ éc éc
øÓ¿¨ò÷ øÓ¿¨ò÷ Ð»-±- ø´·¾®¿-÷
¼»´ ³±¬±® ïéëð
îëìÖÓ ïë ïë
ïìíÖÓ ìï
êc ëd ê íc îb î ï
è
ë
ïê êë
è
îëêÖÓ îð îð
ïìëÖÓ ëé îèìÖÓ îë îë
ïèîÖÓ îd éé îèêÖÓ íð íð
èc ëéè êc ìc íb í
ïê
í
è ééè íîìÖÓ ìð ìð
ïèìÖÓ îb çé
íîêÖÓ ëð ëð
îïíÖÓ îb ïîî ïìíÖÓ ïc ïc
d c çëè
îïëÖÓ íc ïëë ïìëÖÓ îô í î
çc éíè è ëd ìd ïèîÖÓ ë í
îb í í
ïîî
ïê è çëè ïèìÖÓ éc ë
ïëë
îïíÖÓ ïð éc
îëìÖÓ ìïè îêë îïëÖÓ ïë ïð
ïïd ç çc êd ë d c ïïc
îëêÖÓ ë íîð
îèìÖÓ ìb ìïç îëìÖÓ îð ïë íëðð
ïîd ïîd ïðb é ëc d c ïíd îëêÖÓ îë îð
îèêÖÓ ëc ìîî îèìÖÓ íð îë
íîìÖÓ ëd ë ë
ëêî îèêÖÓ ìð íð
ïíd ïíd ïî è êd ïê è ïëïè íîìÖÓ ëð ìð
íîêÖÓ ê ëèè
ë íîêÖÓ êð ëð
è ééë
ïéc ïëïè ïìc ç é ï
ï ë
è ïèíè
ê è ïððë
ÐßÙÛ íë
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
IM010R09
Models 3656 / 3756

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
OWNER’S INFORMATION TABLE OF CONTENTS
Please fill in information and give this booklet to homeowner. SUBJECT PAGE
Warranty information is on page 14. Safety Instructions.......................................................................2
Description and Specifications....................................................2
Model Number: Engineering Data.........................................................................2
Serial Number: Installation...................................................................................2
Dealer: Location...................................................................................2
Close-Coupled Units...............................................................2
Dealer’s Phone No. Frame-Mounted Units.............................................................3
Date of Purchase: Installation Date: SAE Engine Driven Pumps..........................................................3
Coupling Alignment....................................................................6
Frame-Mounted Units Only...................................................6
Piping...........................................................................................6
Suction.....................................................................................6
Discharge.................................................................................6
Wiring and Grounding................................................................7
Rotation.......................................................................................7
Operation....................................................................................7
Maintenance................................................................................7
Disassembly.................................................................................8
Reassembly..................................................................................8
Packed Box Instructions..............................................................9
Troubleshooting.........................................................................10
Repair Parts................................................................................11
Limited Warranty......................................................................14
2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ENGINEERING DATA
TO AVOID SERIOUS OR FATAL PERSONAL INJURY Maximum Liquid Temperature:
OR MAJOR PROPERTY DAMAGE, READ AND 212º F (100º C) – standard seal or packing
FOLLOW ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IN THE 250º F (120º C) – Optional high temp. seal
MANUAL AND ON THE PUMP. Maximum Working Pressure (Fluid temperature dependant):
– NPT connections, 200 PSI (1379 kPa)
This is a SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL. – 125# ANSI flanged connections, 200 PSI (1379 kPa)
When you see this symbol on the pump or Maximum Suction Pressure: 100 PSI (689.5 kPa)
in the manual, look for one of the following Starts per Hour: 20, evenly distributed
signal words and be alert to the potential for
personal injury or property damage. Group Size Suction Discharge
1½ x 2-6 (H) 2" NPT 1½" NPT
DANGER Warns of hazards that WILL cause serious 1 x 2-7 2" NPT 1" NPT
personal injury, death or major property 2½ x 3-7 3" NPT 2½" NPT
damage.
S
3 x 4-7 4" Flange 3" Flange
Warns of hazards that CAN cause serious 1 x 2-8 2" NPT 1" NPT
WARNING
personal injury, death or major property 1½ x 2-8 2" NPT 1½" NPT
damage. 2 x 2-5 2" NPT 2" NPT
2½ x 2½-5 2½" NPT 2½" NPT
CAUTION Warns of hazards that CAN cause personal LH 3 x 3-5 3" NPT 3" NPT
injury or property damage. 4 x 4-5 4" Flange 4" Flange
NOTICE: INDICATES SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
2½ x 3-8 3" NPT 2½" NPT
WHICH ARE VERY IMPORTANT AND
MUST BE FOLLOWED.
THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED TO ASSIST IN THE 1½ x 2-10 2" NPT 1½" NPT
INSTALLATION AND OPERATION OF THIS UNIT. 2½ x 3-10 3" Flange 2½" Flange
M
THOROUGHLY REVIEW ALL INSTRUCTIONS AND 3 x 4-10 4" Flange 3" Flange
WARNINGS PRIOR TO PERFORMING ANY WORK 4 x 6-10 6" Flange 4" Flange
ON THIS PUMP. 2½ x 3-13 3" Flange 2½ " Flange
MAINTAIN ALL SAFETY DECALS.
NOTICE: INSPECT UNIT FOR DAMAGE AND 6 x 8-13 8" Flange 6" Flange
REPORT ALL DAMAGE TO CARRIER L 8 x 10-13 10" Flange 8" Flange
IMMEDIATELY. 4 x 6-16 6" Flange 4" Flange
UNIT NOT DESIGNED FOR USE

WARNING INSTALLATION
WITH HAZARDOUS LIQUIDS OR
FLAMMABLE GASES. LOCATION
• Locate the pump as near liquid source as practical; below
level of liquid for automatic repriming capability.
• Allow adequate space for servicing and ventilation. Protect
Hazardous fluids can the unit from weather and water damage due to rain,
cause fire, burns
or death. flooding or freezing temperatures.
• Protect the pump and piping from freezing temperatures.
DESCRIPTION and SPECIFICATIONS • Allow adequate space around the unit for service and
The series 3656/3756 are single stage, end suction, centrifugal ventilation.
pumps for general liquid transfer, booster applications, irriga-
CLOSE-COUPLED UNITS
tion and general service pumping. Pumps are available in three
different materials of construction: all iron, bronze-fitted and • Units may be installed horizontally, inclined or vertically with
all bronze (“S” group only). the motor above the pump.
Pump impellers are fully enclosed, key driven and held in • The motor feet MUST be bolted to a substantial surface
position by an impeller bolt and washer. Casings are full volute (horizontal or vertical) that is capable of complete and rigid
in design with replaceable wear rings. support for the pump and motor. For L-Group pumps, the
motor adapter feet must also be bolted to the supportive
Dependant on the pump size, the suction and discharge
surface.
connections will be threaded or flanged. Shafts are protected
with stainless steel shaft sleeves. • For vertical operation, the motor should be fitted with a drip
cover or otherwise protected against liquid entering the mo-
Close-coupled units have NEMA standard JM or JP motors
tor (rain, spray, condensation, etc.)
with C-face mounting and key driven shaft extension. SAE
drive units bolt directly to the engine flywheel housing for SAE NOTICE: DO NOT INSTALL WITH MOTOR
sizes 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Optional elastomer element couplings BELOW PUMP. ANY LEAKAGE OR
are available for 6½, 7½, 8, 10, 11½ and 14 inch flywheels. CONDENSATION WILL AFFECT
Frame mounted units can be coupled to motors through a THE MOTOR.
spacer coupling, or belt driven.
3
FRAME-MOUNTED UNITS indicated. Maximum working pressure for class 30 cast iron,
• A flat substantial foundation surface MUST be provided to per ANSI B16.1, is 175 PSI.
avoid distortion and/or strain when tightening the founda- Internal combustion engines are variable speed and variable
tion bolts. A rubber mounting is acceptable to reduce noise power machines. The power output depends on the engine
or excessive vibration. speed (RPM) and will be reduced when operating altitude,
• Tighten motor hold-down bolts BEFORE connecting piping and/or the air temperature increases. When driving the pump
to pump. at the RPM required to deliver water into the system piping,
the engine must operate within the Engine Manufacturers
Grout hole Base
Finished grouting
(1/4")
minimum and maximum RPM limits. The power output to
supply the pump power demand must not exceed the continu-
Grout ous power rating of the engine, after derating for all power
(1/2 to 3/4")
Allowance Leveling wedges or shims—left in place consuming engine accessories, and adjustmaner for installation
for leveling
Top of foundation—
site altitude and air temperature.
clean and wet down
DRIVE-TRAIN SIZING (BHP)
Wood
frame Sleeve The BHP Equation is: (Flow x TDH) / 3960 x Eff.)
Note: For internal combustion units the BHP calculation must
be de-rated for the following conditions:
Washer • 20% for continuous duty
Lug • 5% for right-angle drive
• 3% for each 1,000 feet above sea level
Figure 1 • 1% for each 10º F above 60º F.
• It is recommended that the baseplate be grouted to a DRIVE-TRAIN SIZING (TORQUE)
foundation with solid footing. Refer to Figure 1. Other than sizing an engine for BHP, torque calculations also
• Place unit in position on wedges located at four points, two are required for proper sizing. Typically the horsepower and
below approximate center of driver and two below torque rating do not follow the same relationship throughout
approximate center of pump. Adjust wedges to level unit. the usable range of a diesel engine (Figure 2). The equation for
Level or plumb suction and discharge connections. torque (lbs/ft) is (5250 x BHP) / RPM.
• Make sure bedplate is not distorted and final coupling 600 180
alignment can be made within the limits of movement of 178

500
motor and by shimming, if necessary. 176
TORQUE (LBS/FT)
174
• Tighten foundation bolts finger tight and build dam around 400
172
foundation. Pour grout under bedplate making sure the areas
HP
300 170
under the pump and motor feet are filled solid. Allow grout 168
to harden 48 hours before fully tightening foundation bolts. 200
166
• Tighten pump and motor hold-down bolts before aligning 164
100
shaft or connecting the piping to pump. 162
• Allow grout to harden for 48 hours before tightening 4 0

1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200
160
2300
foundation bolts. RPM
Figure 2: HP (◆) vs. Torque (■)

SAE – ENGINE DRIVEN PUMPS
The SAE engine drive bearing frame is designed to bolt directly VERIFY MATCH OF PUMP END TO ENGINE
to the flywheel housing for engines with an SAE no. 1, 2, SAE Bracket Size:
3, 4 or 5 mount. The pump shaft extension is sized for use Engine drive pumps are available to fit engines having a stan-
with couplings bolted directly to the flywheel. Goulds Water dard SAE 5 through SAE 1 flywheel housing.
Systems optional couplings are sized for 6½", 7½", 8", 10", and For a new engine, the engine supplier can provide the SAE
14" flywheels. Although other flywheel mount couplings may housing number.
be used, it is recommended that the Goulds Water Systems
coupling be used to ensure long and trouble-free operation For an existing engine, the flywheel housing bore and bolt
from your Goulds Pump. circle can be measured and compared against the standard SAE
housing dimensions listed in Table 1, to identify the housing
REQUIREMENTS FOR PROPER OPERATION SAE number.
Pump End: • Measure the flywheel housing bore (A), and the bolt circle
When delivering the required capacity (GPM) to the system (B), as accurately as possible with a tape measure (to the
piping, the pump must add the amount of Head required nearest 1/32 inch).
by the system at the capacity. The operating head-capacity • Count the number of threaded holes in the flywheel housing
point should be as close as possible to the highest efficiency (C). Test the threaded holes with a bolt, to determine the
line shown on the performance curve, and must be below the thread series.
head-capacity line labeled “maximum” RPM. The maximum • Compare the measured dimensions (A), (B), and (C) against
operaton RPM for the pump is determined by bearing life, or Table 1, to determine the SAE number of the flywheel hous-
in some cases, by the pressure limits of the pump. Suction and ing, to be sure it matches the SAE number of your pump.
discharge openings are NPT tapped for standard pipe, or faced
and drilled per ANSI B16.1, class 125 for standard flanges as
4
Flywheel
SAE Flywheel Housing Size • Examine shaft spline closely. Use a file, if necessary, to
Housing remove any burrs that would prevent coupling from sliding

Dimensions 1 2 3 4 5 freely onto the shaft.
A 201⁄8 175⁄8 161⁄8 141⁄4 123⁄8 • Lubricate pump shaft spline sparingly with light grease.
B 207⁄8 183⁄8 167⁄8 15 131⁄8 Don’t lubricate straight keyed shaft.
No. 12 12 12 12 8
C
Size 7⁄16-14 3⁄8-16 3⁄8-16 3⁄8-16 3⁄8-16 • Slide the coupling onto shaft until it is stopped against the
shaft (refer to page 5 for straight shaft installation).
Table 1
• Measure the distance from the engine side of the flywheel
coupling adapter ring to the mounting face of the pump
bracket. Refer to Figure 4 below, Dimension “A”.
• Next, measure depth from face of flywheel housing on
engine, to face on flywheel against which coupling will be
bolted. Refer to Figure 4 below, Dimension “B”.
• Pump measurement must be less than engine measurement
or axial interference will result in thrust force on engine
crank shaft bearings. Simply stated, Dimension “A” must be
less than Dimension “B”.
FLYWHEEL COUPLING
Figure 3 • The flywheel coupling transmits power from the engine
flywheel to the pump shaft. The maximum power that a
INSTALLATION coupling can safely handle is shown by a rating number, “R”,
• The pump may be installed horizontally, with the discharge which is listed in the coupling dimensions tables.
rotated to any position allowed by the casing bolt pattern • When selecting a flywheel coupling for a pump and engine,
(13). It is recommended that the discharge be located hori- first determine the power rating that the pump will demand.
zontally, above the suction. On the pump performance curve, find the RPM and BHP
• The casing must be supported on all pumps by a rigid sup- values required to produce the spplication head-capacity
port which is anchored to the unit base or foundation. point.
• For M-Group pumps it is recommended that this support • Divide the BHP by the RPM, then multiply the result times
is bolted to the motor adapter ring using 2 or more of the 100. The result will be the demand number for the pump.
casing bolts (13). It is likely that longer bolts will be required For example, a 20BFSAE1AO can deliver 800 GPM at 270
for the additional support thickness. Use SAE grade 5 bolts, feet Total Head when running at 1800 RPM. The power
torqued as indicated in this manual. required by the pump will be 75 BHP. The demand number
• For L-Group pumps it is recommended that the pump is will be: (75 / 1800) x 100 = 4.16
supported beneath the two feet cast into the motor adapter • Next, select a coupling that can safely transmit the power,
(3). These feet must be bolted to the support. and which will fit the flywheel dimensions. For a coupling to
PUMP TO ENGINE ASSEMBLY (SPLINE COUPLING) be suitable, it must have an “R” rating number GREATER
THAN the pump demand number. In the above example,
Preparation for Assembly of Pump on Engine the minimum coupling “R” number whould be 5.
• Clean face and register fit of flywheel housing and flywheel
as necessary to remove all grease, dirt, or rust (and all traces • Torsional compatibility of the engine, pump, and coupling
of rust preventative) which would interfere with installation is the responsibility of the assembler. Goulds Water Systems
of pump and/or prevent correct alignment. If flywheel is fit- will supply data for the pump and coupling for use by the
ted with a pilot bearing for a transmission shaft, remove and assembler for a torsional analysis.
discard. The pilot bearing is not required for installation of NOTE: If the flywheel is fitted with a pilot bearing pressed
the pump end, and could interfere with the pump shaft. into a bore at the center, remove it to avoid interference with
the pump shaft.
Figure 4 Figure 5
5
FLYWHEEL FOR INDUSTRIAL TYPE OVERCENTER Table IB –
CLUTCHES Wide RPM Range, Elastomer Mounted Hub – Straight Shaft
• Figure 6 shows the hollowed-out appearance of the fly- Flywheel Dimensions Flywheel Coupling
wheels made for use with overcenter type clutch power Clutch D Shaft
take-off assemblies. Size Size E
Qty. (UNC)
BC F G H R* Catalog Spline
Number Dia.
• These flywheels will have a recessed bore machined into the
2.28 CD616
face, and a set of tapped holes, which will be used to attach 6½" 6 5⁄16-18 8½ OD 7.88 3.94 1.19 1.69
the coupling to the flywheel. Dimensions are governed by 3.51 CD625
an SAE standard and are listed in Tables 1A and 1B, Figure 2.28 CD716
7½" 8 5⁄16-18 9½" OD 8.75 3.69 1.19 1.69
3. The “clutch size” shown in the table is the nominal clutch 3.51 CD725
facing diameter for Drive Ring Type Overcenter Clutches.
8" 6 3⁄8-16 103⁄8" OD 9.62 4.81 2.44 2.94
2.28 CD816
OTHER FLYWHEELS 3.51 CD825
2.28 CD1016
• Some engines are fitted with flywheels especially machined
3.51 CD1025
for coupling to other kinds of machinery (electrical gen-
erators, torque converters, etc.), and require nonstandard 10" 8 3⁄8-16 123⁄8" OD 11.62 4.47 2.13 2.75 5.71 CD1030
flywheel couplings. These may be purchased from third party 8.57 CD1050
1.625-
vendors or suppliers. 11.23 CD1080 1.624Ø
2.28 CD1116 3⁄8 x 3⁄16
3.51 CD1125 Keyway
5.71 CD1130
11½" 8 3⁄8-16 137⁄8" OD 13.12 5.06 1.56 2.69 8.57 CD1150
11.23 CD1180
12.62 CD1190
16.85
CD11110H
2.28 CD1416
3.51 CD1425
5.71 CD1430
14" 8 3⁄8-16 183⁄8" OD 17.25 6.63 1.00 2.13 8.57 CD1450
11.23 CD1480
Figure 6 12.62 CD1490
Table IA – 16.85
CD14110H
Wide RPM Range, Elastomer Mounted Hub – Spline Shaft Dimensions in inches
* R = Coupling Rating Max.
Flywheel Dimensions Flywheel Coupling (Spline) Coupling Rating = (Rated horsepower x 100) / Rated RPM

Clutch D Shaft
Size Size E BC F G H R* Catalog Spline • For Goulds Water Systems straight shaft keyed couplings –
Qty. (UNC) Ensure that the coupling hub set screw is backed out enough
Number Dia.
6½" 6 5⁄16-18 8½ OD 7.88 3.94 1.19 1.69 7 A00569C 1 1½" 10T to ensure clearance for the shaft key during assembly.
7½" 8 5⁄16-18 9½" OD 8.75 3.69 1.19 1.69 7 A00569C 2 1½" 10T • Mount the coupling assembly to the engine flywheel using
8" 6 3⁄8-16 103⁄8" OD 9.62 4.81 2.44 2.94 7 A00569C 3 1½" 10T the bolts provided torqued as follows in a crossing sequence:
10" 8 3⁄8-16 123⁄8" OD 11.62 4.47 2.13 2.75 7 A00569C 4 1½" 10T 6½" or 7½" Flywheel – 11 lbs.-ft. (15 N. m)
10" 8 3⁄8-16 123⁄8" OD 11.62 4.47 2.13 2.75 9 A00569C 6 1½" 10T 8", 10" or 11½" Flywheel – 20 lbs.-ft. (27 N.m)
11½" 8 3⁄8-16 137⁄8" OD 13.12 5.06 1.56 2.69 7 A00569C 5 1½" 10T
14" Flywheel – 50 lbs.-ft. (68 N.m)
(For other couplings follow manufacturers
11½" 8 3⁄8-16 137⁄8" OD 13.12 5.06 1.56 2.69 9 A00569C 7 1½" 10T
recommended installation procedure.)
14" 8 ½-13 183⁄8" OD 17.25 6.63 1.00 2.13 9 A00569C 8 1½" 10T
• Place the pump shaft key into the pump shaft (122) and align
* R = Coupling Rating Max.
Coupling Rating = (Rated horsepower x 100) / Rated RPM
the shaft to the coupling. Slide the pump into the coupling
until the engine adapter ring (340) contacts the engine
flywheel housing.
INSTALLATION OF COUPLING ON FLYWHEEL
Flywheel Coupling Overcenter Type:
• These couplings are aligned concentrically with the flywheel
by register fit on the flywheel.
• Be sure to remove all preservatives from the engine’s fly-
wheel.
• Fit the coupling into the flywheel. Align the bolt holes and
engage coupling with register fit on flywheel. Tap coupling
with a soft heavy hammer, if necessary, to be sure that it is
seated flat against flywheel. Secure coupling tightly to fly-
wheel with capscrews and lockwasher.
INSTALLATION OF PUMP ON ENGINE
• Lift pump with suitable lifting apparatus and align pump shaft
with coupling. End of pump shaft has a pilot diameter which
epermits wasy engagement of pump shaft into coupling.
6
• Reach into pump suction opening and rotate impeller slightly • All piping MUST be independently supported and MUST
until the shaft will engage the coupling. Verify that there is NOT place any piping loads on the pump
no gap between bracket and flywheel housing faces. Rotate NOTICE: DO NOT FORCE PIPING INTO PLACE
pump as necessary to align bracket holes with engine. Install AT PUMP SUCTION AND DISCHARGE
capscrews and bolt pump end securely to engine. CONNECTIONS.
NOTE: If any interference, or incompatibility of parts is • All pipe joints MUST be airtight.
detected during installation, DO NOT proceed with
assembly. Direct the problem to your nearest Goulds PIPING – SUCTION
Pumps distributor. • For suction lifts over 10 ft. (3 m) and liquid temperatures
• Mount the pump to the engine using the bolts and lock- over 120° F (49° C), consult pump performance curve for
washers provided, torqued as follows in a crossing sequence: net positive suction head required (NPSHR).
SAE #2, #3, #4, #5 – 20 lbs.-ft. (27 N. m) • If a pipe size larger than pump suction is required, an ec-
SAE #1 – 50 lbs.-ft. (68 N. m) centric pipe reducer, with the straight side up, MUST be
• Install coupling guards (501N). installed at the pump suction.
• Bolt motor adapter (3) to the rigid support described above. • If pump is installed below the liquid source, install a gate
valve in the suction for pump inspection and maintenance.
COUPLING ALIGNMENT NOTICE: DO NOT USE THE GATE VALVE TO
THROTTLE PUMP. THIS MAY CAUSE LOSS
WARNING FAILURE TO DISCONNECT AND OF PRIME, EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURES
LOCKOUT ELECTRICAL POWER AND DAMAGE TO PUMP, VOIDING
BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY WARRANTY.
MAINTENANCE CAN CAUSE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY. • If the pump is installed above the liquid source, the following
MUST be provided:
• To avoid air pockets, no part of the piping should be above
Hazardous machinery
can cause personal the pump suction connection.
injury or death.
• Slope the piping upward from liquid source.
FRAME-MOUNTED UNITS ONLY • Use a foot valve or check valve ONLY if necessary for
• Alignment MUST be checked prior to running. See Figure 7. priming or to hold prime during intermittent duty.
• The suction strainer or suction bell MUST be at least
Parallel 3 times the suction pipe diameter area.
• Insure that the size and minimum submergence over suc-
tion inlet is sufficient to prevent air from entering pump
through a suction vortex. See Figures 8 through 11.
Angular
H min. H min.
---------
D --------- D
Figure 7
---------
---------
• Tighten all hold-down bolts before checking alignment.
• If realignment is necessary, always move the motor. Shim
Figure 8 Figure 9
as required. H
16
H = Min. Submergence in feet
15
• Parallel misalignment, shafts with axis parallel but not 14
13
concentric. Place dial indicator on one hub and rotate this 12
11
hub 360° while taking readings on the outside diameter of 10
9
the other hub. Parallel alignment is achieved when reading is 8
3.0D 7
0.010" (0.254 mm) TIR, or less. min.
6
5
• Angular misalignment, shaft with axis concentric but not par- 1.5D
4
3
allel. Place dial indicator on one hub and rotate this hub 360° min. H min. 2
1
while taking readings on the face of the other hub. Angular D D min. D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 V
alignment is achieved when reading is 0.020" (0.508 2 V = Velocity in feet per second
=GPM x 0.321 GPM x 0.4085
mm) TIR, or less. Area D2
• Final alignment is achieved when parallel and angular re- Figure 10 Figure 11
quirements are satisfied with motor hold-down bolts tight. PIPING – DISCHARGE
NOTICE: ALWAYS RECHECK BOTH ALIGNMENTS • Install a check valve suitable to handle the flow, liquids and
AFTER MAKING ANY MECHANICAL to prevent backflow. After the check valve, install an ap-
ADJUSTMENTS. propriately sized gate valve to be used to regulate the pump
capacity, pump inspection and for maintenance.
PIPING • When required, pipe increaser should be installed between
• Piping should be no smaller than pump’s discharge and the check valve and the pump discharge.
suction connections and kept as short as possible, avoiding
unnecessary fittings to minimize friction losses. See Table 1.
7
WIRING AND GROUNDING WARNING OPERATION AT OR NEAR ZERO
FLOW CAN CAUSE EXTREME HEAT,
WARNING Install, ground and wire according PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY
to local and National Electrical Code DAMAGE.
Requirements.
Install an all leg electrical power
disconnect switch near the pump.
Extreme heat can
Disconnect and lockout electrical cause personal injury
Hazardous voltage power before installing or servicing or property damage.
can shock, burn or
the pump.
cause death.
NOTICE: NO NOT RUN PUMP DRY OR SEAL
Electrical supply MUST match DAMAGE WILL RESULT.
pump’s nameplate specifications. In-
correct voltage can cause fire, damage • After stabilizing the system at normal operating conditions,
motor and void the warranty. check the piping. If necessary, adjust the pipe supports.
Motors without built-in protection MUST be provided • On frame-mounted units, coupling alignment may have
with contactors and thermal overloads for single phase changed due to the temperature differential between pump
motors, or starters with heaters for three phase motors. and motor. Recheck alignment following procedures and
See motor nameplate. hazard warnings in “COUPLING ALIGNMENT” section
• Use only copper wire to motor and ground. The ground of this manual.
wire MUST be at least as large as the wire to the motor.
Wires should be color coded for ease of maintenance. MAINTENANCE
• Follow motor manufacturer’s wiring diagram on the motor
WARNING FAILURE TO DISCONNECT AND
nameplate or terminal cover carefully. LOCKOUT ELECTRICAL POWER
BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
WARNING FAILURE TO PERMANENTLY MAINTENANCE CAN CAUSE SHOCK,
GROUND THE PUMP, MOTOR AND
Hazardous CONTROLS BEFORE CONNECTING BURNS OR DEATH.
voltage TO ELECTRICAL POWER CAN CAUSE
SHOCK, BURNS OR DEATH. Hazardous voltage
can shock, burn or
ROTATION cause death.
NOTICE: INCORRECT ROTATION MAY CAUSE CAUTION FAILURE TO RELIEVE SYSTEM

DAMAGE TO THE PUMP AND VOIDS PRESSURE AND DRAIN SYSTEM
THE WARRANTY. BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
MAINTENANCE CAN CAUSE
• Correct rotation is right-hand, CLOCKWISE when viewed PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL
from the motor end. For frame mounted units, switch power INJURY OR DEATH.
on and off quickly to observe rotation. On close coupled
units, remove motor end plug or cover to observe rotation. Hazardous pressure can
cause personal injury,
• To reverse three phase motor rotation, interchange any two property damage or death.
power supply leads. WARNING IF PIPING HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC

FLUIDS, SYSTEM MUST BE FLUSHED
OPERATION PRIOR TO PERFORMING SERVICE.
WARNING DO NOT OPERATE FRAME

MOUNTED OR SAE UNITS WITHOUT
SAFETY GUARDS IN PLACE OR
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY MAY Hazardous fluids can
cause personal injury
RESULT. or property damage.
Hazardous machinery CLOSE-COUPLED UNITS

can cause personal
injury or death. • Bearings are located in and are part of the motor. For lubrica-
tion information, refer to motor manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING SPLASHING OR IMMERSING OPEN FRAME-MOUNTED UNITS
DRIP PROOF MOTORS IN FLUID
CAN CAUSE FIRE, SHOCK, BURNS OR • Model 3756 S-group has greased for life bearings.
DEATH. No regreasing is possible or necessary.
• Model 3756 M or L-group bearing frame and SAE drive
bearing frame should be regreased every 2,000 hours or
at a three month interval, whichever occurs first. Use a #2
Hazardous voltage
can shock, burn or sodium or lithium based grease. Fill until grease comes out of
cause death.
relief fittings, or lip seals, then wipe off excess.
• Follow motor or engine and coupling manufacturer’s lubri-
cation instructions.
• Recheck alignment.
8
SEASONAL SERVICE 5. Remove retaining ring (361).
• To REMOVE pump from service, remove drain plug and 6. Use bearing puller or arbor press to remove ball
drain all unprotected piping. bearings (112, 168).
• To RETURN pump to service, replace drain plug using
Teflon™ tape or equivalent on male threads. REASSEMBLY
• Reconnect suction line if removed, examine union and repair • All parts should be cleaned before assembly.
if necessary. NOTICE: O-RING SHOULD BE REPLACED AFTER ANY
• Refer to OPERATION section of manual. DISASSEMBLY OF UNIT.
BEARING FRAME
DISASSEMBLY
1. Replace lip seals if removed.
• Follow ALL warnings and instructions in the “MAINTE-
2. Replace ball bearings if loose, rough or noisy when rotated.
NANCE” section of this manual.
3. Check shaft (122) for runout. Maximum permissible is
• Close-coupled units: Remove motor hold-down bolts.
0.002" (0.05 mm) TIR.
• Frame-mounted units: Remove coupling guard, spacer, cou-
4. Refer to the “MAINTENANCE” section of this manual
pling and frame hold-down bolts.
for M-group bearing frame regreasing instructions.
LIQUID END
LIQUID END
1. Remove casing bolts (13).
1. Inspect shaft removing any debris or burrs.
2. Remove back pull-out assembly from casing (1).
2. Treat shaft with LOCQUIC® Primer “T”, or equivalent,
3. Remove casing wear ring (4) if excessively worn. following manufacturer’s instructions carefully.
NOTICE: DO NOT INSERT SCREWDRIVER BETWEEN 3. When replacing shaft sleeve, spray new shaft sleeve’s bore
IMPELLER VANES TO PREVENT ROTATION. with LOCQUIC® Primer “T”, or equivalent. Let parts dry
4. On close-coupled units, remove motor end plug or cover and then apply LOCTITE® #262 on the same surfaces.
to expose screwdriver slot or flats on end of motor shaft. Slide new sleeve over shaft with a twisting motion, wipe
5. While restraining shaft with an appropriate tool (close- off excess. Let cure according to instructions.
coupled units) or with a strap wrench (frame-mounted NOTICE: MECHANICAL SEAL MUST BE REPLACED
units) remove impeller bolt (6). Impeller bolt may need WHENEVER SEAL HAS BEEN REMOVED.
to be heated with torch to remove. Discard. FOLLOW SEAL MANUFACTURER’S
NOTICE: EXERCISE CAUTION WHEN HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY. FOR PACKED
HOT IMPELLER BOLT. BOX PUMPS SEE “PACKED BOX
INSTRUCTIONS”.
NOTICE: FOR SAE DRIVE UNITS, REMOVE IMPELLER
NUT SET SCREW (22A) PRIOR TO 4. Replace seal housing wear ring, if removed.
REMOVING IMPELLER NUT (22). IMPELLER 5. For mechanical seal pumps, stationary seal seat may be
SET SCREW AND IMPELLER NUT MAY NEED dipped in water to ease installation. Place stationary seal
TO BE HEATED TO BE REMOVED. seat squarely into seal housing bore. Cover the polished
6. Remove impeller washer (7). face of the seat with a thin piece of cardboard or paper
towel. Press seat firmly into bore using a round piece of
7. Insert two pry bars, 180° apart, between impeller (2) and plastic or wood that disperses the force over the entire
seal housing (3). CAREFULLY pry off impeller. seal face. NOTE: If mechanical seal is supplied with a
8. Remove impeller key (8). spring retainer, remove and discard the retainer.
9. Remove seal housing bolts (14) and seal housing (3) 6. Place adapter, concave face pointing up, over motor
pulling with it the mechanical seal assembly. Discard seal shaft and lower it onto the motor.
assembly and seal housing o-ring (9). For packed box
7. Replace seal housing o-ring. This o-ring may be lubricated
pumps see “PACKED BOX INSTRUCTIONS”.
with water or glycerin to ease in installation. Install seal
10. Remove adapter (108). housing on adapter. Exercise care in that the motor shaft
11. Inspect shaft sleeve (11). If badly scored, remove by does not dislodge or damage seal seat.
heating with torch. Discard. 8. Fully and squarely install the rotary assembly of seal
12. Push out the mechanical seal stationary seat from the against the stationary seat.
seal housing. Discard. NOTICE: REPLACE IMPELLER BOLT AND WASHER
13. On units equipped, remove seal housing wear ring (5) WHENEVER IMPELLER IS REMOVED.
if excessively worn. 9. Install impeller key in shaft keyway. Mount impeller on
DISASSEMBLY OF BEARING FRAME OR shaft and push until it bottoms. Hold in place. For SAE
SAE BEARING FRAME units, apply LOCTITE 271 to the impeller bore, keyway
1. Remove deflector (123) from shaft. and shaft. Mount impeller on shaft and push until it
bottoms. Hold in place.
2. Remove bearing cover (134).
10. Install new impeller washer. Impeller washer not used for
3. Remove shaft assembly from frame. SAE units.
4. Remove lip seals (138, 139) from bearing frame (228) and
bearing cover (134) if worn. Discard.
9
11. Apply LOCTITE® #271 or equivalent, to new impeller bolt 3. Install the two piece Teflon lantern ring supplied as shown
threads and tighten to: in figure 13. Note: two pieces make one ring. Notches on
3⁄8"-16 bolts 20 lbs.-ft. (27 N. m) ring must face each other, but alignment is not necessary.
½"-13 bolts 38 lbs.-ft. (51 N. m)
Impeller bolt not used for SAE units.
12. For SAE units apply LOCTITE® #271 to the external
threads of the shaft and internal threads of the impeller
nut (22). Tighten impeller nut to the following:
½"-Impeller Nut (SAE M-Group) 80 lbs.-ft. (107 N. m)
¾"-Impeller Nut (SAE L-Group) 100 lbs.-ft. (134 N. m)
13. For SAE units, after impeller nut (22) has been installed,
apply LOCTITE® #271 to set screw (22A). Install impeller
set screw into face of impeller nut (22) and tighten Teflon Lantern Ring
hand-tight. Figure 13
14. Replace casing wear ring, if removed. 4. Install the packing rings and lantern ring in the following
15. Replace casing bolts and tighten, in a crossing sequence, sequence to pack the packed box. Install two rings of
to torque values indicated below: packing, then the lantern ring, followed by the final three
rings of packing. Install each ring separately and firmly
3⁄8"-16 bolts (bronze casing) 25 lbs.-ft. (34 N. m)
seat. The use of a wooden split bushing is recommended
½"-16 bolts (cast iron casing) 37 lbs.-ft. (50 N.m)
to accomplish this. See Figure 14. Use gland to jack the
½"-13 bolts (cast iron casing) 90 lbs.-ft. (122 N.m)
bushing and ring into the box. Stagger joints in each ring
¾"-10 bolts (cast iron casing) 175 lbs.-ft. (237 N. m)
90°. Make sure the flush tap in the packed box lines up
16. Check reassembled unit for binding by rotating shaft with with the center of the lantern ring. Any extra rings are
appropriate tool from motor end. spares.
17. If rubbing exists, loosen casing bolts and proceed with
tightening sequence again.
WOODEN “SPLIT BUSHING”
18. Replace motor hold-down bolts and motor end plug or
cover on close-coupled units.
19. Replace coupling, spacer, coupling guard and frame GLAND
hold-down bolts on frame-mounted units.
NOTICE: ALWAYS RECHECK BOTH ALIGNMENTS STUFFING
AFTER MAKING ANY ADJUSTMENTS. BOX
20. Refer to the “COUPLING ALIGNMENT” section of SHAFT
this manual to realign shaft.
21. Assembly is complete. Figure 14
5. Tighten gland nuts evenly, but not tight. When the pump
PACKED BOX is started, slowly tighten the gland nuts until the leak rate
1. Make sure stuffing box is free of foreign materials and is between 40 and 60 drops per minute. A grease lubricant
clean before beginning packing of packed box. Refer to can be used when the pumpage contains abrasive particles
Sectional Assembly in the repair parts section. or for a suction lift condition.
2. Take special care during installation of packing rings REMOVAL OF PACKED BOX
because they are die-formed. To install, twist the ring • Follow these steps to remove the packing from the
sideways just enough to fit it around the shaft sleeve. packed box.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PULL RINGS STRAIGHT 1. Remove gland assembly.
OUT. See Figure 12.
CORRECT WRONG
2. With a “packing hook” remove packing.
3. Insert a wire hook into the ring on the outer edge to
remove the lantern ring.
4. Clean the packed box.
PRIME SAFE ARRANGEMENT
(Optional – M & L Group Only)
Figure 12 • The Prime Safe arrangement can be provided with grease or
an oiler feed lubrication.
1. The grease gland (24) will have the letters "G" and "O"
stamped on the outside diameter and have two 1⁄8" NPT
connections for mounting a grease feeder or oiler.
10
2. For grease feed applications, the grease gland is assembled TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
with the “G” stamp in the 12 o' clock position. The grease
feeder (23) will mount in the grease gland at a 30 degree WARNING DISCONNECT AND LOCKOUT
angle from the horizontal. This is done to gain access to the ELECTRICAL POWER BEFORE
grease fitting located on the grease feeder. The lip seal (26) ATTEMPTING ANY MAINTENANCE.
mounted in the grease gland will be assembled as shown in FAILURE TO DO SO CAN CAUSE A
Figure 15. SHOCK, BURN OR DEATH.
3. For oiler feed applications, the grease gland is assembled
with the “O” stamp in the 12 o' clock position. The two Hazardous voltage
can shock, burn or
1⁄8" NPT connections on the grease gland will be located on
cause death.
the horizontal, which is to ensure proper function of the
oiler. The lip seal (26) is to be mounted in the reverse or SYMPTOM
opposite direction as shown in Figure 10. MOTOR NOT RUNNING
See Probable Cause – 1 through 5
4. The mounting of a grease feeder or oiler may require
additional pipe extensions and/or fittings that will be LITTLE OR NO LIQUID DELIVERED
provided from the factory as needed. See Probable Cause – 6 through 13
5. The grease feeder (23) will come with three springs (blue, EXCESSIVE POWER CONSUMPTION
red and silver). The use of the different springs will be See Probable Cause – 3, 13, 14, 15
varied depending on the operating temperature and the EXCESSIVE NOISE and VIBRATION
lubricant (grease) to be used. See Probable Cause – 3, 6, 7, 10, 12, 14, 16, 17
Grease Feeder Spring Size PROBABLE CAUSE
Operating Temperature No. 1 Grease No. 2 Grease No. 3 Grease 1. Motor thermal protector tripped
2. Open circuit breaker or blown fuse
-10ºF (-23ºC) to 40ºF (4ºC) SILVER RED —
3. Impeller binding
-40ºF (-40ºC) to 110ºF (43ºC) SILVER SILVER RED 4. Motor improperly wired
-110ºF (-79ºC) to 200ºF (93ºC) BLUE SILVER SILVER 5. Defective motor
6. Pump is not primed, air or gases in pumpage
Use SAE 30W oil for oiler application. 7. Discharge, suction plugged or valve closed
8. Incorrect rotation (3 phase only)
9. Low voltage or phase loss
10. Impeller worn or plugged
11. System head too high
12. NPSHA too low – Excessive Suction lift or losses
13. Incorrect impeller diameter
23 14. Discharge head too low – excessive flow rate
15. Fluid viscosity, specific gravity too high
16. Worn bearing
17. Pump, motor or piping loose
26
24
Figure 15
11
REPAIR PARTS SERIES 3656/3756
4 6 7 8 2 5 9 10 3 11
SAE M & L
13
Replaces 6 & 7
23
22A 22
3 10 3
16 17 18
11
12 1 14
19
24
20
21 26
25
Packed Box Arrangement Prime Safe Arrangement (optional – M & L group only)
LIQUID END COMPONENTS LIQUID END COMPONENTS
Item No. Description Material Item No. Description Material
1 Casing 24 Grease gland Aluminum
2 Impeller Cast iron or Sil-brass* 25 Pipe plug Zinc plated steel
3 Adapter 26 Lip seal Buna
4 Wear ring (casing) Cast iron or bronze* * Lead free
5** Wear ring (seal housing) ** Item #5 supplied on S-group model 2½ x 3-7 (7½, 10 and 15 HP) and
M-group (except 3 x 4-10).
6 Impeller bolt AISI Type 300
stainless steel POWER END COMPONENTS (shown on next page)
7 Impeller washer
Item No. Description Material
8 Impeller key Steel
112 Ball bearing (outboard) Steel
9 Seal housing o-ring (optional materials) BUNA-N/EPR/Viton
122 Pump shaft
10 Mechanical seal Consult factory
122A Pump shaft (SAE) AISI 4140 steel
11 Shaft sleeve AISI Type 300
stainless steel 123 V-ring, deflector BUNA-N
12 Drain plug – ¼ or 3⁄8 NPT 134 Bearing cover Cast iron
13 Hex head cap screw (casing to adapter) Zinc plated steel 138 Lip seal (outboard) BUNA-N
14 Hex head cap screw (adapter to motor/frame) 139 Lip seal (inboard)
15 Hex head cap screw (Adapter to seal housing) 168 Ball bearing (inboard) Steel
16 Lantern ring Teflon™ 193 Grease fitting (M & L group)
17 Packing, 5 rings Teflon™ impregnated 327C Screw (cover to adapter) (SAE only) Zinc plated steel
18 Gland AISI 300SS 340 Adapter/engine (SAE only) Cast iron
19 Shaft sleeve 361 Retaining ring Steel
AISI Type 300 370C Hex head cap screw (frame to cover) Zinc plated steel
20 Gland stud stainless steel
21 Gland nut 371C Hex head cap screw (adapter to frame)
(SAE only) NOT SHOWN Steel
22 Impeller nut (SAE only) 304 SS
399 Key, coupling
22A Set screw, impeller nut (SAE only)
501N Cover/adapter (SAE only) Galvanized steel
23 Grease feeder (oiler optional) Polycarbonate
12
3656/3756 POWER FRAMES
112 361 370C 361 370C

168
139 399
399
138
138
123 168 122 134
123 193 122 112 193 134
S-Group Power Frame M-Group Power Frame
123 139 371L 193

361 370C
168
361
139 399 399
327C
138
501N
370C
138
340
123 193 122 112 193 134
168 193 122A 112 134
L-Group Power Frame SAE Power Frame
13
COMMERCIAL WARRANTY
For goods sold to commercial buyers, Seller warrants the goods sold to Buyer hereunder (with the exception of membranes, seals, gaskets,
elastomer materials, coatings and other “wear parts” or consumables all of which are not warranted except as otherwise provided in the quotation or
sales form) will be (i) be built in accordance with the specifications referred to in the quotation or sales form, if such specifications are expressly made
a part of this Agreement, and (ii) free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of installation or twelve
(12) months from the date of shipment (which date of shipment shall not be greater than eighteen (18) months after receipt of notice that the goods
are ready to ship), whichever shall occur first, unless a longer period is specified in the product documentation (the “Warranty”).
Except as otherwise required by law, Seller shall, at its option and at no cost to Buyer, either repair or replace any product which fails to conform
with the Warranty provided Buyer gives written notice to Seller of any defects in material or workmanship within ten (10) days of the date when any
defects or non-conformance are first manifest. Under either repair or replacement option, Seller shall not be obligated to remove or pay for the
removal of the defective product or install or pay for the installation of the replaced or repaired product and Buyer shall be responsible for all other
costs, including, but not limited to, service costs, shipping fees and expenses. Seller shall have sole discretion as to the method or means of repair
or replacement. Buyer’s failure to comply with Seller’s repair or replacement directions shall terminate Seller’s obligations under this Warranty and
render the Warranty void. Any parts repaired or replaced under the Warranty are warranted only for the balance of the warranty period on the parts
that were repaired or replaced. Seller shall have no warranty obligations to Buyer with respect to any product or parts of a product that have been:
(a) repaired by third parties other than Seller or without Seller’s written approval; (b) subject to misuse, misapplication, neglect, alteration, accident,
or physical damage; (c) used in a manner contrary to Seller’s instructions for installation, operation and maintenance; (d) damaged from ordinary
wear and tear, corrosion, or chemical attack; (e) damaged due to abnormal conditions, vibration, failure to properly prime, or operation without flow;
(f) damaged due to a defective power supply or improper electrical protection; or (g) damaged resulting from the use of accessory equipment not
sold or approved by Seller. In any case of products not manufactured by Seller, there is no warranty from Seller; however, Seller will extend to Buyer
any warranty received from Seller’s supplier of such products.
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES,
CONDITIONS OR TERMS OF WHATEVER NATURE RELATING TO THE GOODS PROVIDED HEREUNDER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WHICH ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED AND
EXCLUDED. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY LAW, BUYER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND SELLER’S AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR BREACH OF
ANY OF THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED TO REPAIRING OR REPLACING THE PRODUCT AND SHALL IN ALL CASES BE LIMITED
TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY THE BUYER FOR THE DEFECTIVE PRODUCT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY OTHER FORM OF
DAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, LIQUIDATED, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY OR SPECIAL DAMAGES,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, LOSS OF ANTICIPATED SAVINGS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF INCOME, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS
OF PRODUCTION, LOSS OF OPPORTUNITY OR LOSS OF REPUTATION.
Xylem Inc.
2881 East Bayard Street Ext., Suite A
Seneca Falls, NY 13148
Phone: (800) 453-6777
Fax: (888) 322-5877
www.gouldswatertechnology.com
Goulds is a registered trademark of Goulds Pumps, Inc. and is used under license.
© 2015 Xylem Inc. IM010 Revision Number 9 September 2015
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIÓN
IM010R09
Modelos 3656 y 3756

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN, FUNCIONAMIENTO Y MANTENIMIENTO
INFORMACIÓN DEL PROPIETARIO ÍNDICE
Por favor anote los siguientes datos y entregue el manual al TÓPICO PÁGINA
dueño de casa. Encontrará información sobre garantía en Instrucciones de seguridad............................................ 16
la página 28. Descripción y especificaciones...................................... 16
Número de modelo: Datos de ingeniería....................................................... 16
Instalación.................................................................... 16
Número de serie:
Ubicación.................................................................. 16
Comercio donde se adquirió: Bombas de acoplamiento corto................................. 16
Teléfono del comercio: Bombas de montaje en bastidor................................. 17
Bombas accionadas por motor SAE.............................. 17
Fecha de compra: Fecha de instalación:
Alineación del acoplamiento......................................... 20
Bombas de montaje en bastidor únicamente.............. 20
Tuberías........................................................................ 20
Succión..................................................................... 20
Descarga................................................................... 21
Cableado y puesta a tierra............................................ 21
Rotación....................................................................... 21
Operación.................................................................... 21
Mantenimiento............................................................. 22
Desarmado................................................................... 22
Reensamblaje................................................................ 23
Instrucciones para la caja prensaestopas........................ 24
Guía de identificación y resolución de problemas......... 25
Partes de repuesto........................................................ 26
Garantía limitada.......................................................... 28
16
INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD para montaje en bastidor se pueden acoplar a motores a
PARA EVITAR LESIONES PERSONALES GRAVES O través de un acoplamiento espaciador, o pueden ser acciona-
FATALES Y SERIOS DAÑOS MATERIALES, LEA Y SIGA das por correa.
TODAS LAS INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD EN EL
MANUAL Y EN LA BOMBA. DATOS DE INGENIERÍA
Este es un SÍMBOLO DE ALERTA Temperatura máxima del líquido:
relacionado con la seguridad. Cuando 212ºF (100ºC) - sello o empaque estándar
encuentre este símbolo en la bomba o en el 250ºF (120ºC) - sello de alta temperatura opcional
manual, busque una de las siguientes palabras Presión máxima de trabajo (dependiendo de la temperatura
de advertencia y esté alerta a las potenciales del fluido):
lesiones personales o daños materiales. - conexiones NPT, 200 PSI (1379 kPa)
PELIGRO Advierte sobre peligros que CAUSARÁN - conexiones con brida ANSI de 125 lbs., 200 PSI (1379 kPa)
lesiones personales graves, muerte o daños Presión máxima de succión: 100 PSI (689.5 kPa)
materiales mayores. Arranques por hora: 20, distribuidos uniformemente
ADVERTENCIA
Advierte sobre peligros que PUEDEN causar Grupo Tamaño Succión Descarga
lesiones personales graves, muerte o daños 1½ x 2-6 (H) 2" NPT 1½" NPT
materiales mayores. 1 x 2-7 2" NPT 1" NPT
2½ x 3-7 3" NPT 2½" NPT
PRECAUCIÓN
Advierte sobre peligros que PUEDEN causar
S
3 x 4-7 4" Brida 3" Brida
Presión lesiones personales o daños materiales. 1 x 2-8 2" NPT 1" NPT
ATENCIÓN:
Peligrosa INDICA QUE A CONTINUACIÓN 1½ x 2-8 2" NPT 1½" NPT
ENCONTRARÁ INSTRUCCIONES 2 x 2-5 2" NPT 2" NPT
ESPECIALES MUY IMPORTANTES, 2½ x 2½-5 2½" NPT 2½" NPT
LAS CUALES DEBE OBSERVAR. LH 3 x 3-5 3" NPT 3" NPT
ESTE MANUAL HA SIDO CREADO COMO UNA GUÍA
PARA LA INSTALACIÓN Y OPERACIÓN DE
2½ x 3-8 3" NPT 2½" NPT
LA UNIDAD. REPASE EN DETALLE TODAS 3 x 4-8 4" Brida 3" Brida
LAS INSTRUCCIONES Y ADVERTENCIAS ANTES 4 x 5-8 5" Brida 4" Brida
DE REALIZAR CUALQUIER TRABAJO EN ESTA 1½ x 2-10 2" NPT 1½" NPT
BOMBA. 2½ x 3-10 3" Brida 2½" Brida
M
CONSERVE TODAS LAS CALCOMANÍAS DE 3 x 4-10 4" Brida 3" Brida
SEGURIDAD. 4 x 6-10 6" Brida 4" Brida
2½ x 3-13 3" Brida 2½ " Brida
ATENCIÓN: INSPECCIONE LA UNIDAD E INFORME 3 x 4-13 4" Brida 3" Brida
INMEDIATAMENTE AL TRANSPORTISTA 4 x 6-13 6" Brida 4" Brida
DE CUALQUIER DAÑO QUE ENCUENTRE. 6 x 8-13 8" Brida 6" Brida
L 8 x 10-13 10" Brida 8" Brida
ADVERTENCIA
ESTA UNIDAD NO HA SIDO DISEÑA-
DA PARA OPERAR CON LÍQUIDOS
PELIGROSOS O GASES INFLAMABLES.
INSTALACIÓN
UBICACIÓN
• Ubique la bomba tan cerca de la fuente de líquido como
Los fluidos peligrosos
pueden causar
resulte práctico y por debajo del nivel del líquido para
incendios, quemaduras permitir el cebado automático.
o la muerte.
• Deje suficiente espacio para ventilación y tareas de
DESCRIPCIÓN Y ESPECIFICACIONES manteni-miento. Proteja la unidad de las inclemencias del
Las bombas de la serie 3656/3756 son bombas centrífugas tiempo y daños causados por lluvias, inundaciones o
de una etapa con succión en el extremo, para la transferencia temperaturas bajo cero.
general de líquidos, aplicaciones de refuerzo, riego y servicios • Proteja la bomba y las cañerías de temperaturas bajo cero.
generales de bombeo. Están disponibles en tres materiales • Deje suficiente espacio alrededor de la unidad para
distintos: todo hierro, con accesorios de bronce o todo bronce ventilación y tareas de mantenimiento.
(grupo “S” únicamente). BOMBAS DE ACOPLAMIENTO CORTO
Los impulsores de la bomba están completamente encerrados, • Estas unidades se pueden instalar en forma horizontal,
son accionados por chaveta y se mantienen en posición con inclinada o vertical con el motor sobre la bomba.
un perno y una arandela. Las carcasas tienen diseño de voluta
completa con anillos de desgaste reemplazables. • Los pies del motor DEBEN abulonarse a una superficie
resistente (horizontal o vertical) que sea capaz de brindar un
Dependiendo del tamaño de la bomba, las conexiones de soporte completo y rígido para la bomba y el motor. Para
succión y descarga son roscadas o con bridas. Los ejes están las bombas del grupo L, los pies del adaptador del motor
protegidos por camisas de acero inoxidable. también deben estar abulonados a la superficie de apoyo.
Las unidades de acoplamiento corto tienen motores NEMA • Para la operación vertical, el motor debe equiparse con una
JM o JP estándar con montaje en cara C y extensión del eje cubierta antigoteo o protegerse de alguna otra manera para
accionado por chaveta. Las unidades con accionamiento SAE evitar que entre líquido (lluvia, rociado, condensación, etc.).
se sujetan con pernos directamente a la cubierta del volante del
motor en los modelos de tamaño SAE 1, 2, 3, 4 y 5. Para los ATENCIÓN: NO INSTALE EL MOTOR POR DEBAJO DE
volantes de 6½, 7½, 8, 10, 11½ y 14 pulgadas, hay disponi- LA BOMBA. CUALQUIER PÉRDIDA O
bles elementos elastómeros para acoplamiento. Las unidades CONDENSACIÓN AFECTARÁ AL MOTOR.
17
BOMBAS DE MONTAJE EN BASTIDOR por los límites de presión de la bomba. Las aberturas de suc-
• Se DEBE proveer una superficie de base substancial para ción y descarga tienen roscas NPT para tuberías estándar, o
evitar la distorsión o la tensión al ajustar los bulones de la recubiertas y taladradas según norma ANSI B16.1, clase 125
base de montaje. Se puede utilizar un montaje de caucho para bridas estándar de acuerdo con lo indicado. La presión
para reducir el ruido y la vibración excesiva. máxima de trabajo para el hierro fundido clase 30, según la
norma ANSI B16.1, es 175 PSI.
• Ajuste los pernos de sujeción del motor ANTES de conectar
la tubería a la bomba. Los motores de combustión interna son de velocidad variable
y de potencia variable. La salida de potencia depende de la
Enlechado (1/4”) Agujero para lechada Base velocidad del motor (RPM) y se reducirá al operar la altitud
terminado
y/o los aumentos de la temperatura aérea. Cuando se acciona
Lechada
la bomba a las RPM requeridas para distribuir el agua en la
(1/2” a 3/4”)
Cuñas o calzas de nivelación –
tubería del sistema, el motor debe operar dentro de los límites
Tolerancia
de nivelación dejadas en posición mínimos y máximos de RPM establecidos por el fabricante
Extremo superior del
cimiento – límpielo y mójelo
del motor. Luego de la reducción de la potencia nominal de
todos los accesorios del motor que consumen energía y el
Bastidor
de madera Camisa ajuste de la altitud y la temperatura aérea del sitio de instala-
ción, la salida de potencia que suministra la potencia deman-
dada por la bomba no debe exceder la potencia nominal
Arandela continua del motor.
Lengüeta
CALIBRACIÓN DEL GRUPO DE ENGRANAJES
CONDUCTORES (BHP)
Figura 1
La ecuación para obtener el BHP es: (Flujo x TDH) / 3960 x
• Se recomienda enlechar la placa de base a un cimiento con Rendimiento).
zapata sólida. Consulte la figura 1. Nota: Para las unidades de combustión interna el cálculo del
• Coloque la unidad en posición sobre cuñas ubicadas en las BHP debe disminuirse de acuerdo con las siguientes
cuatro puntas, dos debajo del centro aproximado del motor condiciones:
accionador y dos debajo del centro aproximado de la bomba. • 20% por servicio continuo
Ajuste las cuñas para nivelar la unidad. Nivele o verifique con • 5% por accionamiento de ángulo recto
plomada las conexiones de succión y descarga. • 3% por cada 1.000 pies sobre el nivel del mar
• Asegúrese de que la placa de base no está distorsionada y que • 1% por cada 10º F sobre 60º F.
la alineación final del acoplamiento se puede efectuar dentro
de los límites de movimiento del motor, con la ayuda de cuñas CALIBRACIÓN DEL GRUPO DE ENGRANAJES
si fuera necesario. CONDUCTORES (TORQUE)
Además de la calibración de un motor por BHP, también se
• Ajuste los pernos de la base con la mano y construya una presa
requieren cálculos de torque para una correcta calibración.
alrededor de la base. Vierta la lechada debajo de la placa de base
Generalmente, la potencia y el torque nominal no mantienen
asegurándose de llenar completamente las áreas debajo de los
la misma relación durante el rango utilizable de un motor
pies del motor y de la bomba. Deje endurecer la lechada por 48
diesel (Figura 2). La ecuación para obtener el torque (libras/
horas antes de ajustar completamente los pernos de la base.
pies) es (5250 x BHP) / RPM.
• Ajuste los bulones de sujeción de la bomba y el motor antes de
600 180
alinear el eje o conectar la cañería a la bomba.
178
• Deje endurecer la lechada por 48 horas antes de ajustar los 4 500
176
pernos de la base.
Torque (libras/pies)
174
400
172
BOMBAS ACCIONADAS POR MOTOR SAE
HP
300 170
La caja de cojinetes del motor de accionamiento SAE está dise- 168

200
ñada para sujetarla directamente a la cubierta del motor para 166
los montajes SAE tamaño 1, 2, 3, 4 y 5. La extensión del eje de 100

164
la bomba es del tamaño apropiado para acoplamientos abulo- 162
nados directamente al volante. Goulds Water Systems ofrece 0

1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200
160
2300
acoplamientos opcionales para los volantes de 6½, 7½, 8, 10 RPM
y 14 pulgadas. Si bien se pueden utilizar otros acoplamientos Figura 2: HP (◆) vs. Torque (■)
de montaje en el volante, recomendamos el uso de los acopla-
mientos de Goulds Water Systems para asegurar la operación VERIFIQUE LA COINCIDENCIA DEL EXTREMO DE
prolongada y sin inconvenientes de la bomba. LA BOMBA Y EL MOTOR
REQUISITOS PARA UNA CORRECTA OPERACIÓN Tamaño de la abrazadera SAE
Extremo de la bomba A las bombas accionadas por motor se les pueden colocar
Cuando se libere la capacidad requerida (GPM) a la tubería motores que poseen desde una cubierta del volante estándar
del sistema, la bomba deberá añadir la cantidad de Altura SAE 5 hasta una SAE 1.
requerida por el sistema a tal capacidad. El punto de capacidad En el caso de un motor nuevo, el proveedor del motor puede
de altura de operación debe encontrarse lo más cerca posible suministrar el número de cubierta SAE.
a la mayor línea de rendimiento que se muestra en la curva En el caso de un motor existente, puede medir el orificio de
de desempeño, y debe encontrarse por debajo de la línea de la cubierta del volante y la circunferencia de los agujeros de
capacidad de altura indicada como “máxima” RPM. La máxi- los pernos y luego compararlos con las dimensiones estándar
ma velocidad de operación RPM para la bomba se encuentra de cubierta SAE detalladas en la Tabla 1, para identificar el
determinada por la antigüedad del cojinete o, en ciertos casos, número de cubierta SAE.
18
Mida el orificio de la cubierta del volante (A) y la circunferen- • Para las bombas del grupo L, se recomienda que la bomba
cia de los agujeros de los pernos (B), con la mayor precisión se apoye debajo de los dos pies fundidos en el adaptador
posible, con una cinta métrica (a la medida más cercana a del motor (3). Dichos pies deben sujetarse con pernos al
1/32 pulgada). soporte.
• Cuente la cantidad de orificios roscados en la cubierta del MONTAJE DE LA BOMBA SOBRE EL MOTOR
volante (C). Pruebe los orificios roscados con un perno, (ACOPLAMIENTO RANURADO)
para determinar la serie de rosca.
Preparación para el montaje de la bomba sobre el motor
• Compare las dimensiones tomadas (A), (B), (C) con la Tabla • Limpie la superficie y controle que coincidan la cubierta del
1 para determinar el número SAE de la cubierta del volante, volante y el volante según sea necesario para quitar toda
para asegurarse de que coincida con el número SAE de su la grasa, suciedad o polvo (y todos los rastros de antioxi-
bomba. dante), que interferirían en la instalación de la bomba y/o
Dimensiones
Tamaño de la cubierta del volante SAE impedirían la correcta alineación. Si el volante se coloca
de la cubierta mediante un cojinete piloto para un eje de transmisión,

del volante 1 2 3 4 5 quítelo y deséchelo. No se necesita el cojinete piloto para la
A 201⁄8 175⁄8 161⁄8 141⁄4 123⁄8 instalación del extremo de la bomba, y puede interferir con
B 207⁄8 183⁄8 167⁄8 15 131⁄8 el eje de la bomba.
Nº 12 12 12 12 8 • Examine detenidamente la ranura del eje. Utilice una lima,
C
Tamaño 7⁄16-14 3⁄8-16 3⁄8-16 3⁄8-16 3⁄8-16
si es necesario, para quitar toda la rebaba que impediría el
Tabla 1 libre desplazamiento del acoplamiento sobre el eje.
• Lubrique moderadamente la ranura del eje de la bomba con
MOTOR grasa liviana. No lubrique el eje recto con chaveta.
• Deslice el acoplamiento sobre el eje hasta que se detenga
contra el eje (remítase a la página 5 para la instalación del
eje recto).
• Mida la distancia existente desde el lado del motor del ani-
llo adaptador de acoplamiento del volante hasta la superfi-
cie de montaje de la abrazadera de la bomba. Remítase a la
Figura 4 debajo, Dimensión “A”.
• Luego, mida la profundidad existente desde la superficie de
la cubierta del volante sobre el motor hasta la superficie del
Figura 3 volante contra la cual se colocará con pernos el acoplamien-
to. Remítase a la Figura 4 debajo, Dimensión “B”.
INSTALACIÓN • La medición de la bomba debe ser inferior a la medición
• La bomba se puede instalar en posición horizontal, con la del motor porque sino la interferencia axial producirá una
descarga girada hacia cualquier posición permitida por el fuerza de empuje sobre los cojinetes de cigüeñal del motor.
patrón de los pernos de la carcasa (13). Se recomienda que Dicho de manera simple, la Dimensión “A” debe ser inferior
la descarga se encuentre en posición horizontal, por encima a la Dimensión “B”.
de la succión. ACOPLAMIENTO DEL VOLANTE
• En todas las bombas la carcasa debe estar sostenida por un • El acoplamiento del volante transmite la potencia desde el
soporte rígido sujeto al cimiento o base de la unidad. volante del motor hasta el eje de la bomba. El máximo de
• Para las bombas del grupo M, se recomienda que dicho potencia que un acoplamiento puede manejar sin peligros
soporte se sujete con 2 o más pernos de la carcasa (13) al se demuestra en un número nominal, “R”, que se detalla en
anillo adaptador del motor. Probablemente se requieran las tablas de dimensiones de acoplamiento.
pernos más largos para el grosor adicional del soporte. • Al escoger un acoplamiento del volante para una bomba y
Utilice pernos SAE grado 5, torsionados según se indica en un motor, primero determine la potencia nominal que la
este manual.
NOTA: Cuando el acoplamiento se encuentre correctamente montado, el
buje no llegará al fondo en las ranuras del eje. Si tocara fondo, retraiga el
acoplamiento en el eje según se muestra, para ganar espacio.
Controle la distancia antes
de operar la bomba
Abrazadera
de la bomba
Abrazadera Abrazadera
de la bomba de la bomba
Motor
Motor
Instalación Instalación
preferida alternativa
Imposible – (A es Posible – (A es
mayor que B) menor que B)
La dimensión “A” DEBE ser inferior a
la dimensión “B”.
Figura 4 Figura 5
19
bomba demandará. En la curva de desempeño de la bomba, Tabla IA –
obtenga los valores de RPM y BHP necesarios para produ- Rango amplio de RPM, Buje montado elastomérico –
cir el punto de aplicación de la capacidad de altura. Eje ranurado
• Divida el BHP por EL RPM, luego multiplique el resultado Tamaño Dimensiones del volante Acoplamiento del volante (Ranurado)
por 100. El resultado será el número de demanda de la del D diám. de
bomba. Por ejemplo, una 20BFSAE1AO puede liberar 800 emb- Tamaño E BC F G H R* Nº del la ranura
Cant.
GPM a 270 pies de Altura total mientras funciona a 1800 rague (UNC) Catálago del eje
RPM. La potencia requerida por la bomba será de 75 BHP. 6½" 6 ⁄ -18 8½ OD
516 7.88 3.94 1.19 1.69 7 A00569C 1 1½" 10T
El número de demanda será: (75 / 1800) x 100 = 4.16 7½" 8 ⁄ -18 9½" OD
516 8.75 3.69 1.19 1.69 7 A00569C 2 1½" 10T
• Luego, seleccione un acoplamiento que pueda transmitir sin 8" 6 3⁄8-16 103⁄8" OD 9.62 4.81 2.44 2.94 7 A00569C 3 1½" 10T
peligros la potencia y que se adecuará a las dimensiones del 10" 8 3⁄8-16 123⁄8" OD 11.62 4.47 2.13 2.75 7 A00569C 4 1½" 10T
volante. Para que un acoplamiento resulte adecuado debe 10" 8 3⁄8-16 123⁄8" OD 11.62 4.47 2.13 2.75 9 A00569C 6 1½" 10T
poseer un número nominal “R” MAYOR QUE el número 11½" 8 3⁄8-16 137⁄8" OD 13.12 5.06 1.56 2.69 7 A00569C 5 1½" 10T
de demanda de la bomba. En el ejemplo anterior, el mínimo 11½" 8 3⁄8-16 137⁄8" OD 13.12 5.06 1.56 2.69 9 A00569C 7 1½" 10T
número “R” de acoplamiento sería 5.
14" 8 ½-13 183⁄8" OD 17.25 6.63 1.00 2.13 9 A00569C 8 1½" 10T
• La compatibilidad de torsión del motor, la bomba y el
OD = Diámetro exterior
acoplamiento es responsabilidad de quien realiza el monta- *R = Máxima potencia nominal del acoplamiento
je. Goulds Water Systems suministrará los datos necesarios Potencia nominal del acoplamiento = (Potencia Nominal x 100) / RPM nominal
sobre la bomba y el acoplamiento para ser utilizados por
quien realiza el montaje en una análisis torsional. Table IB –
NOTA: Si el volante se coloca con un cojinete piloto pre- Rango amplio de RPM, Buje montado elastomérico –
sionado en un orificio en el centro, quítelo para evitar la Eje recto
interferencia con el eje de la bomba. Tamaño Dimensiones del volante Acoplamiento del volante (Ranurado)
VOLANTE PARA EMBRAGUES DE SOBRECENTRO del D diám. de

emb- Tamaño E BC F G H R* Nº del la ranura
DE TIPO INDUSTRIAL
Cant.
rague (UNC) Catálago del eje
• La Figura 3 muestra la apariencia ahuecada de los 2.28 CD616
6½" 6 5⁄16-18 8½ OD 7.88 3.94 1.19 1.69
volantes fabricados para ser utilizados en montajes de 3.51 CD625
despegue propulsados con embragues de sobrecentro. 2.28 CD716
• Dichos volantes poseerán un orificio empotrado 7½" 8 ⁄16-18 9½" OD 8.75 3.69 1.19 1.69
5
3.51 CD725
mecanizado en la superficie, y un conjunto de agujeros
2.28 CD816
de colada, que serán utilizados para conectar el aco- 8" 6 ⁄8-16 10 ⁄8" OD 9.62 4.81 2.44 2.94
3 3
3.51 CD825
plamiento al volante. Las dimensiones se encuentran
determinadas por el estándar SAE y se detallan en las 2.28 CD1016
Tabla 1A y 1B, Figura 3. El “tamaño del embrague” 3.51 CD1025
que se muestra en la tabla es el diámetro nominal del 10" 8 3⁄8-16 123⁄8" OD 11.62 4.47 2.13 2.75 5.71 CD1030
recubrimiento del embrague para Embragues de sobre- 8.57 CD1050
1.625-
centro con anillo de accionamiento. 11.23 CD1080 1.624 Ø
2.28 CD1116 Ranura de
OTROS VOLANTES ⁄8 x ⁄16
3 3
3.51 CD1125
• Ciertos motores están equipados con volantes espe- 5.71 CD1130
cialmente mecanizados para acoplarse a otros tipos de
11½" 8 3⁄8-16 137⁄8" OD 13.12 5.06 1.56 2.69 8.57 CD1150
maquinaria (generadores eléctricos, convertidores de
11.23 CD1180
torque, etc.) y necesitan de acoplamientos de volante
que no sean estándar. Estos pueden adquirirse por 12.62 CD1190
medio de vendedores o proveedores. 16.85
CD11110H
2.28 CD1416
3.51 CD1425
Volantes para embrague de
sobrecentro de tipo industrial 5.71 CD1430
Motor
14" 8 3⁄8-16 183⁄8" OD 17.25 6.63 1.00 2.13 8.57 CD1450
Acoplamiento 11.23 CD1480
del volante
12.62 CD1490
Diámetro
de la ranura
16.85
CD14110H
OD = Diámetro exterior
-10T
(número de ranura) Dimensiones en pulgadas
*R = Máxima potencia nominal del acoplamiento
Potencia nominal del acoplamiento = (Potencia Nominal x 100) / RPM nominal
• Para los acoplamientos Goulds Water Systems con chaveta
de eje recto – Asegúrese de que el tornillo de fijación del
Figura 6 rodete de acoplamiento se encuentre lo suficientemente
retraído como para asegurar espacio para la chaveta del eje
durante el montaje.
20
• Monte el ensamblaje de acoplamiento en el volante del BOMBAS DE MONTAJE EN BASTIDOR ÚNICAMENTE
motor utilizando los pernos suministrados, ajustándolos en • Se DEBE controlar la alineación antes de operar la bomba.
zigzag de la siguiente manera: Observe la figura 7.
Volante de 6½ ó 7½ " – 11 libras-pie (15 N·m)
Volante de 8, 10 o 11½ ” – 20 libras-pie (27 N·m) Paralelo
Volante de 14” - 50 libras-pie (68 N·m)
(Para otros acoplamientos, respete el procedimiento de
instalación recomendado por sus fabricantes.)
• Coloque la chaveta del eje de la bomba en el eje (122) y
alinee el eje con el acoplamiento. Deslice la bomba dentro
Angular
del acoplamiento hasta que el anillo adaptador del motor
(340) esté en contacto con la cubierta del volante del motor.
Figura
Figura67
INSTALACIÓN DEL ACOPLAMIENTO EN EL VOLANTE
Acoplamiento del volante de sobrecentro: • Ajuste todos los bulones de sujeción antes de verificar
• Estos acoplamientos se encuentran alineados en forma la alineación.
concéntrica con el volante mediante el montaje de registro • Si fuera necesario realinear, mueva siempre el motor.
del volante. Coloque planchas de relleno según sea necesario.
• Asegúrese de quitar todos los protectores del volante del • Desalineación paralela, ejes con línea de centro paralela pero
motor. no concéntrica. Coloque el indicador de dial en un rodete y
• Coloque el acoplamiento dentro del volante. Alinee los haga girar el rodete 360° mientras registra las lecturas en el diá-
agujeros de los pernos y conecte el acoplamiento con el metro exterior del otro rodete. La alineación paralela se logra
montaje de registro en el volante. Golpee ligeramente el cuando la lectura es 0.010 pulg. (0.254 mm) TIR o menos.
acoplamiento con un martillo pesado dúctil, si es necesario, • Desalineación angular, ejes con línea de centro concéntrica
para asegurarse que se encuentra aplastado contra el pero no paralela. Coloque el indicador de dial en un rodete
volante. Asegure fuertemente el acoplamiento al volante y haga girar el rodete 360º mientras registra las lecturas
con tornillos tipo “capscrew” y arandela de presión. en la cara del otro rodete. La alineación angular se alcanza
cuando la lectura es 0.020 pulg. (0.508 mm) TIR o menos.
INSTALACIÓN DE LA BOMBA EN EL MOTOR
• La alineación final se alcanza cuando se satisfacen los requi-
• Eleve la bomba utilizando un aparato de elevación ade- sitos paralelos y angulares con los bulones de sujeción del
cuado y alinee el eje de la bomba con el acoplamiento. El motor completamente ajustados.
extremo del eje de la bomba posee un diámetro piloto que ATENCIÓN: SIEMPRE VUELVA A VERIFICAR AMBAS
facilita el encaje del eje de la bomba en el acoplamiento. ALINEACIONES LUEGO DE EFECTUAR
• Introdúzcalo en la abertura de succión de la bomba y gire CUALQUIER AJUSTE MECÁNICO.
el impulsor ligeramente hasta que el eje se conecte con el
acoplamiento. Verifique que no existan espacios entre las TUBERÍAS
superficies de la abrazadera y la cubierta del volante. Gire la
bomba lo necesario para alinear los agujeros de la abraza- • La tubería no debe ser menor que las conexiones de
dera con el motor. Instale los tornillos tipo “capscrew” y succión y descarga de la bomba, y debe ser lo más corta
sujete con pernos el extremo de la bomba al motor. posible. Evite conexiones innecesarias para minimizar las
NOTA: Si se detectara alguna interferencia o pérdidas por fricción. Observe la tabla 1.
incompatibilidad de las partes durante • Toda la tubería DEBE estar soportada en forma indepen-
la instalación, NO prosiga con el montaje. Notifique diente y NO DEBE existir ninguna carga de la tubería sobre
el problema al distribuidor de Goulds Water Systems la bomba.
más cercano. ATENCIÓN: NO FUERCE LA TUBERÍA EN LAS
• Monte la bomba en el motor utilizando los pernos y CONEXIONES DE SUCCIÓN O
arandelas de seguridad provistos y ajústelos en zigzag DESCARGA.
como sigue: • Todas las juntas de la tubería DEBEN ser herméticas.
SAE No. 2, 3, 4, 5 – 20 libras-pie (27 N . m) TUBERÍA – SUCCIÓN
SAE No. 1 - 50 libras-pie (68 N . m) • Para elevaciones de succión de más de 10 pies (3 m) y líqui-
• Instale los protectores de acoplamiento (501N). dos con temperaturas de más de 120º F (49° C), consulte la
• Sujete con pernos el adaptador del motor (3) al soporte curva de desempeño de la bomba para la carga de succión
rígido descripto anteriormente. positiva neta requerida (NPSHR).
• Si es necesario utilizar un tamaño de tubería mayor que
ALINEACIÓN DEL ACOPLAMIENTO el tamaño de la succión de la bomba, se DEBE instalar un
ADVERTENCIA EL NO DESCONECTAR Y BLOQUEAR reductor de caño excéntrico (con el lado recto hacia arriba)
LA ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA en la succión de la bomba.
ANTES DE INTENTAR TAREAS DE • Si la bomba se instala por debajo de la fuente de líquido,
MANTENIMIENTO PUEDE CAUSAR instale una válvula de aislamiento total de flujo en la succión
LESIONES PERSONALES GRAVES. de la bomba para tareas de inspección y mantenimiento.
ATENCIÓN: NO USE LA VÁLVULA DE AISLAMIENTO
Las maquinarias
peligrosas pueden
DE SUCCIÓN PARA AHOGAR LA BOMBA.
causar lesiones
personales o la muerte.
DE HACERLO, PODRÍA OCASIONAR LA
PÉRDIDA DE CEBADO, TEMPERATURAS
EXCESIVAS O DAÑOS A LA BOMBA, Y
ADEMÁS ANULARÁ LA GARANTÍA. 21
• Si la bomba se instala por encima de la fuente de líquido, se • Use únicamente cable de cobre para la conexión al motor y
DEBEN seguir los siguientes pasos: a tierra. El cable a tierra DEBE ser por lo menos del mismo
• Para evitar baches de aire, ninguna sección de la tubería tamaño que el cable al motor. Los cables deben estar codifi-
debe estar más elevada que la conexión de succión de la cados con colores para facilitar el mantenimiento.
bomba. • Siga cuidadosamente el diagrama de cableado indicado por
• Incline la tubería hacia arriba desde la fuente de líquido. el fabricante del motor en la placa nominal o en la tapa de
• Utilice una válvula de pie o una válvula de retención la terminal.
SÓLO si fuera necesario para cebar la bomba o mantener
el cebado durante el servicio intermitente. ADVERTENCIA SI LA BOMBA, EL MOTOR O LOS
CONTROLES NO SE CONECTAN A
• La pantalla o campana de succión DEBE ser al menos 3 Tensión TIERRA EN FORMA PERMANENTE
veces más grande que el diámetro de la tubería de succión. peligrosa ANTES DE CONECTAR LA ALIMEN-
• Asegúrese de que el tamaño de la succión de entrada y la
TACIÓN ELÉCTRICA, SE PUEDEN
inmersión mínima de la succión de entrada sean suficien-
PRODUCIR DESCARGAS ELÉCTRICAS,
tes para que no se produzca la entrada de aire a la bomba
QUEMADURAS Y HASTA LA MUERTE.
a causa de un arremolinamiento de succión. Consulte las
figuras 8 a 11.
ROTACIÓN
ATENCIÓN: LA ROTACIÓN INCORRECTA PUEDE
H min. H min. DAÑAR LA BOMBA Y ANULA
D D LA GARANTÍA.
• La rotación correcta es hacia la derecha, en el SENTIDO
DE LAS AGUJAS DEL RELOJ cuando se mira desde el
extremo del motor. En las unidades montadas en bastidor,
Figura 8 Figura 9
H encienda y apague la bomba rápidamente para observar la
16
rotación. En las unidades de acoplamiento corto, retire el
H = inmersión mínima en pies
15
14
13 motor y el tapón o la cubierta para observar la rotación.
12
11
10
• Para invertir la rotación de un motor trifásico, intercambie
9
8
dos conductores eléctricos cualesquiera.
3.0D 7
6
min.
5
4
OPERACIÓN
1.5D 3
min.
H min. 2
1 ADVERTENCIA NO HAGA FUNCIONAR LAS UNI-
D D min. D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 121314 1516 V DADES SAE O LAS UNIDADES
2 V = Velocidad en pies por segundo
= GPM x 0.321 GPM x 0.4085
MONTADAS EN BASTIDOR SIN LAS
Área D2 PROTECCIONES DE SEGURIDAD
Figura 10 Figura 11 CORRESPONDIENTES. DE HACERLO,
PODRÍA SUFRIR GRAVES LESIONES
TUBERÍA – DESCARGA Las maquinarias
PERSONALES.
peligrosas pueden
• Instale una válvula de retención capaz de manejar el flujo, causar lesiones
personales o la muerte.
los líquidos y evitar el retroflujo. Después de la válvula de
retención, instale una válvula de compuerta del tamaño ADVERTENCIA SALPICAR O SUMERGIR EN FLUIDOS
apropiado para regular la capacidad de la bomba y realizar UN MOTOR ABIERTO A PRUEBA DE
inspecciones y tareas de mantenimiento. FILTRACIONES PUEDE PROVOCAR
• Cuando sea necesario, se debe instalar un aumentador del UN INCENDIO, UNA DESCARGA
caño entre la válvula de retención y la descarga de la bomba. ELÉCTRICA, QUEMADURAS, O IN-
CLUSO LA MUERTE.
CABLEADO Y PUESTA A TIERRA Un voltaje peligroso puede
producir golpes eléctricos,
ADVERTENCIA Instale el cableado y la puesta a quemaduras o la muerte.
tierra de acuerdo con los requisitos

locales y al Código Eléctrico Nacio- ADVERTENCIA EL FUNCIONAMIENTO SIN FLUJO O
nal Requisitos. CON FLUJO MÍNIMO PUEDE CAUSAR
Instale un interruptor de desconexión TEMPERATURAS EXCESIVAS, LESIO-
de todos los circuitos de alimentación NES PERSONALES O DAÑOS MATE-
eléctrica cerca de la bomba. RIALES.
Un voltaje peligroso puede
producir golpes eléctricos, Desconecte y bloquee el suministro
quemaduras o la muerte.
eléctrico antes de instalar la bomba o El calor extremo puede
causar lesiones
realizar tareas de mantenimiento. personales o daños
materiales.
El suministro eléctrico DEBE ser el que se especifica en
la placa nominal de la bomba. Un voltaje incorrecto ATENCIÓN: NO HAGA FUNCIONAR LA BOMBA EN
puede provocar un incendio, dañar el motor y anular SECO. DE HACERLO, SE DAÑARÁ
la garantía. EL SELLO.
Los motores sin protección incorporada DEBEN equi- • Luego de estabilizar el sistema en las condiciones normales
parse con contactores y protectores contra sobrecarga de operación, verifique la tubería. Si fuera necesario, ajuste
térmica si son monofásicos, o con arrancadores con los soportes de la tubería.
calentadores si son trifásicos. Consulte la placa nomi- • En las unidades de montaje en bastidor, la alineación del
nal del motor. acoplamiento puede haber variado debido a las diferencias de
22
temperatura entre la bomba y el motor. Vuelva a controlar la • Unidades de acoplamiento corto: Retire los bulones de
alineación siguiendo los procedimientos y advertencias de la sujeción del motor.
sección “ALINEACIÓN DEL ACOPLAMIENTO” de este • Unidades montadas en bastidor: Retire los bulones de
manual. sujeción del protector de acoplamiento, espaciador, acopla-
miento y bastidor.
MANTENIMIENTO EXTREMO DEL LÍQUIDO
ADVERTENCIA EL NO DESCONECTAR Y BLOQUEAR 1. Retire los bulones de la carcasa (13).
LA ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA 2. Retire de la carcasa el conjunto posterior retractable (1).
ANTES DE INTENTAR TAREAS DE
MANTENIMIENTO PUEDE CAUSAR 3. Retire el anillo de desgaste de la carcasa (4) si se
DESCARGAS ELÉCTRICAS, encuentra muy gastado.
QUEMADURAS E INCLUSO ATENCIÓN: NO INSERTE UN DESTORNILLADOR
LA MUERTE. ENTRE LAS ALETAS DEL IMPULSOR
PARA EVITAR LA ROTACIÓN.
4. En las unidades de acoplamiento corto, retire el tapón o
cubierta del extremo del motor para dejar a la vista
PRECAUCIÓN SI NO SE LIBERA LA PRESIÓN Y SE las partes planas o ranuras para el destornillador en
DRENA EL SISTEMA ANTES DE el extremo del eje del motor.
INTENTAR TAREAS DE 5. Mientras inmoviliza el eje con una herramienta apropiada
MANTENIMIENTO, SE PUEDEN (unidades de acoplamiento corto) o con una llave de
PRODUCIR DAÑOS MATERIALES Y lengüeta (unidades de montaje en bastidor), retire el perno
LESIONES PERSONALES, del impulsor (6). Puede ser necesario tener que calentar
Niveles de presión INCLUYENDO LA MUERTE. el perno del impulsor con una antorcha para poder
peligrosos pueden
causar lesiones personales retirarlo. Deséchelo.
o daños materiales.
ATENCIÓN: TENGA CUIDADO AL MANIPULAR EL
SI SE BOMBEAN FLUIDOS TÓXICOS PERNO CALIENTE DEL IMPULSOR.
ADVERTENCIA
O PELIGROSOS, EL SISTEMA DEBE AVISO: PARA UNIDADES DE IMPULSIÓN SAE, QUITE
LAVARSE COMPLETAMENTE CON EL TORNILLO DE FIJACIÓN DE LA TUERCA
UNA DESCARGA DE AGUA ANTES DEL IMPULSOR (22A) ANTES DE CALENTAR
DE REALIZAR TAREAS DE CON EL SOPLETE.
MANTENIMIENTO. 6. Retire la arandela del impulsor (7).
Los fluidos peligrosos
pueden causar lesiones
7. Inserte dos barras de palanca a 180° de distancia entre sí,
personales o daños
materiales.
entre el impulsor (2) y el compartimiento del sello (3).
CON SUMO CUIDADO, haga palanca y retire
BOMBAS DE ACOPLAMIENTO CORTO el impulsor.
• Los cojinetes están ubicados en el motor y forman parte del 8. Retire la chaveta del impulsor (8).
mismo. Para obtener información sobre lubricación, consulte 9. Retire los tornillos del compartimiento de sellos (14) y
las instrucciones del fabricante del motor. el compartimiento (3), sacando con él el conjunto del
BOMBAS DE MONTAJE EN BASTIDOR sello mecánico. Deseche el conjunto del sello y el anillo en
O del compartimiento del sello (9). Para las bombas con
• El modelo 3756 del grupo S cuenta con cojinetes engrasados caja prensaestopas, consulte las “INSTRUCCIONES
de por vida. No es posible lubricarlos, y tampoco es necesario. PARA CAJA PRENSAESTOPAS”.
• La caja de cojinetes del modelo 3756 de los grupos M y L y 10. Retire el adaptador (108).
de accionamiento SAE debe ser lubricada cada 2000 horas o 11. Inspeccione la camisa del eje (11). Si tiene muchas muescas,
cada 3 meses, lo que se presente primero. Use grasa con base retírela calentándola con una antorcha. Deséchela.
de litio o sodio No. 2. Llene hasta que la grasa salga por los
accesorios de alivio o los sellos, luego limpie la grasa excesiva. ATENCIÓN: TENGA CUIDADO AL MANIPULAR
LA CAMISA DEL EJE CALIENTE.
• Siga las instrucciones de lubricación del fabricante del motor y
el acoplamiento. 12. Empuje y saque del compartimiento de sellos el asiento
del sello mecánico estacionario. Deséchelo.
• Verifique nuevamente la alineación.
13. En las unidades equipadas con anillo de desgaste (5) en
SERVICIO REGULAR el compartimiento de sellos, retírelo si se encuentra muy
• Para RETIRAR la bomba del servicio, saque el tapón de gastado.
drenaje y drene toda la tubería no protegida. DESMONTAJE DE LA CAJA DE COJINETES O CAJA
• Para VOLVER A PONER la bomba en servicio, vuelva a DE COJINETES SAE
colocar el tapón de drenaje utilizando cinta de Teflon™ o
equivalente en las roscas macho. 1. Retire el deflector (123) del eje.
• Reconecte la línea de succión si ha sido desconectada, 2. Retire la cubierta de cojinetes (134).
inspeccione la unión y repare si fuera necesario. 3. Retire del bastidor el conjunto del eje.
• Consulte la sección “OPERACIÓN” del manual. 4. Retire los sellos de reborde (138, 139) de la caja de
cojinetes (228) y la cubierta de cojinetes (134) si se
DESARMADO encuentran gastados. Deséchelos.
5. Retire el anillo de retención (361).
• Observe TODAS las instrucciones y advertencias de la
sección “MANTENIMIENTO” de este manual. 6. Use un jalador de cojinetes o una prensa de eje para retirar
los cojinetes de bola (112, 168).
23
REENSAMBLAJE 9. Instale la chaveta del impulsor en la ranura de
posicionamiento. Monte el impulsor sobre el eje y
• Antes de volver a armar la bomba se deben limpiar todas las empújelo hasta que llegue al fondo. Sosténgalo en su lugar.
piezas. Para las unidades del SAE, aplique el loctite 271 al alesaje, a
ATENCIÓN: EL ANILLO EN O SE DEBE REEMPLAZAR la chavetera y al eje del impeledor. Monte el impeledor en
CADA VEZ QUE SE DESARMA el eje y empuje hasta que él bottome. Sostenga en lugar.
LA UNIDAD.
10. Instale una nueva arandela del impulsor. Para unidades
CAJA DE COJINETES SAE, aplique Loctite 271 al diámetro interior, chavetero y
1. Reemplace los sellos de reborde si han sido retirados. eje del impulsor. Después de haber ajustado la tuerca del
2. Reemplace los cojinetes de bola si están sueltos o hacen impulsor SAE, aplique 271 al tornillo de fijación y apriete
ruido al rotar. con la mano hacia la cara del perno del impulsor.
3. Controle el descentramiento del eje (122). El valor máximo 11. Aplique LOCTITE® #271 o su equivalente a las roscas del
permitido es 0.002 pulgadas (0.05 mm) TIR. perno nuevo del impulsor y apriete a:
4. Consulte la sección “MANTENIMIENTO” de este Pernos de 3⁄8 pulg.-16 20 lbs.-pie (27 N. m)
manual para las instrucciones de lubricación de la caja de Pernos de ½ pulg.-13 38 lbs.-pie (51 N.m)
cojinetes en las bombas del grupo M. Perno del impeledor no usado para las unidades del SAE.
EXTREMO DEL LÍQUIDO 12. Para el SAE las unidades aplican el loctite 271 a los hilos
1. Inspeccione el eje y limpie toda basura o rebaba. de rosca externos del eje y a los hilos de rosca internos del
2. Aplique LOCQUIC® Primer “T” o equivalente al eje, impeledor (22). Apriete la tuerca del impeledor al siguiente:
siguiendo cuidadosamente las instrucciones del fabricante. ½ pulg. – Tuerca Del Impeledor 80 lbs.-pie (107 N. m)
3. Al colocar la nueva camisa del eje, rocíe el diámetro (SAE grupo M)
interior de la camisa con LOCQUIC® Primer “T” o ¾ pulg. – Tuerca Del Impeledor 100 lbs.-pie (134 N. m)
equivalente. Deje secar las piezas y aplique LOCTITE® (SAE Grupo L)
#262 a las mismas superficies. Deslice la nueva camisa 13. Para las unidades del SAE, después de que la tuerca del
sobre el eje con un movimiento de torsión y limpie el impeledor (22) haya estado instalada, aplique el loctite 271
excedente. Deje curar de acuerdo con las instrucciones. al tornillo de presión (2À). Instale el tornillo de presión del
ATENCIÓN: EL SELLO MECÁNICO DEBE SER impeledor en la cara de la tuerca del impeledor (22) y
REEMPLAZADO CADA VEZ QUE SE apriete hand-tight.
RETIRA EL SELLO. SIGA ATENTAMENTE 14. Reemplace el anillo de desgaste de la carcasa si es que
LAS INSTRUCCIONES DEL FABRICANTE ha sido retirado.
DEL SELLO. PARA BOMBAS CON CAJA 15. Coloque y ajuste los pernos de la carcasa en una secuencia
PRENSAESTOPAS, CONSULTE de zigzag hasta los valores indicados a continuación:
LAS “INSTRUCCIONES PARA CAJA 3⁄8"-16 pernos (carcasa de bronce) 25 lbs.-pie (34 N . m)
PRENSAESTOPAS”. 3⁄8"-16 pernos (carcasa de hierro fundido) 37 lbs.-pie (50 N . m)
4. Reemplace el anillo de desgaste del compartimiento ½"-13 pernos (carcasa de hierro fundido) 90 lbs.-pie (122 N . m)
de sellos si es que ha sido retirado. ¾"-10 pernos (carcasa de hierro fundido) 175 lbs.-pie (237 N . m)
5. En el caso de bombas de sello mecánico, el asiento del sello 16. Verifique que la unidad reensamblada no experimente
estacionario puede sumergirse en agua para facilitar la insta- agarrotamiento. Haga rotar el eje con la herramienta
lación. Coloque el asiento del sello estacionario encuadrado apropiada desde el extremo del motor.
en el agujero de la caja del sello. Cubra la cara pulida del 17. Si hubiera rozamiento, afloje los pernos de la carcasa y
asiento con una sección delgada de cartón o toalla de papel. realice la secuencia de ajuste otra vez.
Oprima firmemente el asiento en el agujero usando una
sección de plástico o madera que disperse la fuerza sobre 18. Vuelva a colocar los pernos de sujeción del motor y el
la cara completa del sello. NOTA: Si el sello mecánico está tapón o la cubierta del extremo del motor en las unidades
equipado con un retén a resorte, retire y descarte el retén. de acoplamiento corto.
6. Coloque el adaptador, con la cara cóncava hacia arriba, 19. Vuelva a colocar los pernos de sujeción del acoplamiento,
sobre el eje del motor y hágalo descender hasta el motor. el espaciador, el protector de acoplamiento y el bastidor en
las unidades montadas en bastidor.
7. Reemplace el anillo en O del compartimiento de sellos. Este
anillo en O puede ser lubricado con agua o glicerina para ATENCIÓN: SIEMPRE VUELVA A VERIFICAR AMBAS
facilitar la instalación. Instale el compartimiento del sello ALINEACIONES LUEGO DE EFECTUAR
sobre el adaptador. Tenga cuidado para que el eje del motor ALGÚN AJUSTE.
no dañe o desaloje el asiento del sello. 20. Para realinear el eje, consulte la sección “ALINEACIÓN
8. Instale de frente y completamente el conjunto rotativo del DEL ACOPLAMIENTO” en este manual.
sello contra el asiento estacionario. 21. El reensamblaje está ahora completo.
AVISO: REEMPLACE EL PERNO Y LA ARANDELA DEL
IMPULSOR CADA VEZ QUE SE RETIRE ESTE
ÚLTIMO.
24
INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA CAJA 5. Ajuste las tuercas del casquillo en forma pareja pero sin
PRENSAESTOPAS ajustar mucho. Cuando se arranca la bomba, lentamente
ajuste las tuercas del casquillo hasta que la pérdida llegue a
1. Asegúrese de que la caja prensaestopas esté limpia y libre entre 40 y 60 gotas por minuto. Se puede utilizar un
de materias extrañas antes de comenzar la empaquetadura. lubricante a base de grasa cuando el líquido bombeado
Consulte el título Ensamblaje por Secciones en la sección contiene partículas abrasivas o para mejorar la carga de
de repuestos. succión.
2. Sea especialmente cuidadoso durante la instalación de
PARA RETIRAR LA CAJA PRENSAESTOPAS
los anillos de empaque porque están formados con matriz.
Para instalarlos, retuerza el anillo hacia el costado lo • Para retirar las empaquetaduras de la caja prensaestopas
suficiente como para poder colocarlo alrededor de la siga estos pasos.
camisa del eje. NO INTENTE RETIRAR LOS ANILLOS 1. Retire el conjunto del casquillo.
JALANDO DIRECTAMENTE. Observe la figura 12. 2. Retire la empaquetadura con un “gancho de empaque”.
CORRECTO INCORRECTO 3. Inserte un gancho de alambre en el anillo en el borde
exterior para retirar el aro de linterna.
4. Limpie la caja prensaestopas.
DISPOSICIÓN DE CEBADO SEGURO
(Opcional – Grupo M y L únicamente)
• La disposición Prime Safe puede lubricarse con grasa o por
Figura 12 alimentación de aceitador.
3. Instale el aro de linterna de Teflon de dos piezas provisto 1. El casquillo para grasa (24) tendrá las letras “G” y “O”
según se muestra en la figura 13. Nota: dos piezas estampadas en el diámetro exterior y dos conexiones NPT
conforman un aro. Las muescas del anillo deben enfrentarse, de 1⁄8 pulg. para montar una grasera o aceitador.
pero el alineamiento no es necesario. 2. Para las aplicaciones de alimentación de grasa, el casquillo
para grasa se instala con la marca “G” en la posición de
las 12:00. El alimentador de grasa (23) se montará en
el casquillo para grasa en un ángulo de 30 grados con
respecto a la horizontal. Esto se hace para ganar acceso a
la grasera situada en el alimentador de grasa. El sello de
reborde (26) montado en el casquillo para grasa se insta-
lar· en la forma mostrada en la Figura 10.
3. Para las aplicaciones de alimentación con aceitador, el
casquillo para grasa se instala con la marca “O” en la
posición de las 12:00. Las dos conexiones NPT de 1⁄8
Aro de linterna de Teflon pulg. sobre el casquillo para grasa estarán situadas sobre la
Figura 13 horizontal, lo cual asegurará el funcionamiento apropiado
del aceitador. El sello de reborde (26) debe montarse en
4. Para empacar la caja prensaestopas, instale los anillos de la dirección inversa u opuesta, tal como se muestra en la
empaque y el aro de linterna en la secuencia siguiente. Figura 15.
Instale dos anillos de empaquetadura, luego el aro de
linterna, y luego los tres anillos de empaquetadura restantes. 4. El montaje del alimentador de grasa o aceitador podría re-
Instale cada anillo por separado y asiéntelo firmemente. Se querir extensiones de tubos y/o accesorios adicionales que
recomienda el uso de un manguito dividido de madera para serán suministrados por la fábrica según sea necesario.
esta operación. Vea la figura 14. Use el casquillo para mover 5. El alimentador de grasa (23) incluirá tres resortes (azul, rojo
el manguito y el anillo dentro de la caja. Alterne las juntas en y plateado). El uso de resortes diferentes variará dependien-
cada aro 90º. Asegúrese de que la toma embutida en la caja do de la temperatura de operación y del lubricante (grasa) a
prensaestopas se alinea con el centro del aro de linterna. utilizarse.
Los anillos extra son de repuesto.
“MANGUITO DIVIDIDO” DE MADERA
CASQUILLO
CAJA
PRENSAESTOPAS EJE
Figura 14
25
Tamaño del resorte del alimentador de grasa GUÍA DE RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS
Temperatura de operación Grasa Nº 1 Grasa Nº 2 Grasa Nº 3 ADVERTENCIA DESCONECTE Y BLOQUEE
-10ºF (-23ºC) a 40ºF (4ºC) PLATEADO ROJO — LA ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA
ANTES DE INTENTAR TAREAS DE
-40ºF (-40ºC) a 110ºF (43ºC) PLATEADO PLATEADO ROJO MANTENIMIENTO. EL NO HACER-
-110ºF (-79ºC) a 200ºF (93ºC) AZUL PLATEADO PLATEADO LO PUEDE OCASIONAR DESCARGAS
Utilice aceite SAE 30W para la aplicación del engrasador. ELÉCTRICAS, QUEMADURAS O IN-
CLUSO LA MUERTE.
SÍNTOMA
EL MOTOR NO FUNCIONA
Vea las causas probables N° 1 a 5
SE ENTREGA POCO O NADA DE LÍQUIDO
23
Vea las causas probables N° 6 a 13
CONSUMO EXCESIVO DE ELECTRICIDAD
Vea las causas probables N° 3, 13, 14 y 15
RUIDO O VIBRACIÓN EXCESIVOS
Vea las causas probables N° 3, 6, 7 10, 12, 14, 16 y 17
CAUSA PROBABLE
26
1. Se disparó el protector térmico del motor
2. Interruptor de circuito abierto o fusible quemado
3. Agarrotamiento del impulsor
4. El cableado del motor es incorrecto
5. El motor es defectuoso
6. La bomba no está cebada, hay aire o gases en el bombeo
7. Descarga o succión bloqueadas o válvula cerrada
8. Rotación incorrecta (motor trifásico solamente)
9. Bajo voltaje o pérdida de fase
24 10. Impulsor gastado o tapado
11. Altura del sistema muy alta
12. NPSHA muy baja – Elevación excesiva de succión o pérdidas
13. Diámetro incorrecto del impulsor
14. Altura de descarga muy baja — velocidad excesiva del flujo
Figura 15 15. Viscosidad o gravedad específica del fluido muy altas
16. Cojinete gastado
17. Bomba, motor o tubería flojos
26
PARTES DE REPUESTO DE LA SERIE 3656/3756
4 6 7 8 2 5 9 10 3 11
SAE M y L
13
Substituye 6 y 7
22A 22 23
3 10 3
16 17 18
11
12 1 14
19
24
20
21 26
25
Conjunto de la caja prensaestopas Disposición de cebado seguro (opcional – grupo M y L únicamente)
COMPONENTES DEL EXTREMO DEL LÍQUIDO COMPONENTES DEL EXTREMO DEL LÍQUIDO
No. Ítem Descripción Material No. Ítem Descripción Material
1 Carcasa 24 Casquillo para grasa Aluminum
Hierro fundido o
2 Impulsor 25 Tapón de tubería Acero zincado
silicio-latón*
3 Adaptador 26 Sello del reborde Buna
4 Anillo de desgaste (carcasa) * Sin plomo
Hierro fundido o bronce*
5** Anillo de desgaste (compartimiento de sellos) ** El ítem No. 5 se provee con los modelos 21⁄2 x 3-7 (71⁄2 , 10 y 15 HP) del grupo S y con
6 Perno del impulsor el grupo M (excepto 3 x 4-10).
7 Arandela del impulsor Acero inoxidable
tipo AISI 300 COMPONENTES DEL EXTREMO DE POTENCIA
8 Chaveta del impulsor (ilustrados en la página siguiente)
9 Anillo en O de la caja del sello (materiales opcionales) BUNA-N/EPR/Viton No. Ítem Descripción Material
10 Sello mecánico Consulte la tabla 112 Cojinete de bolas (exterior) Acero
Acero inoxidable
11 Camisa del eje 122 Eje de la bomba
tipo AISI 300
122A Eje de la bomba (SAE) Acero AISI 4140
12 Tapón de drenaje – 1⁄4 ó 3⁄8 NPT Acero zincado
123 Anillo en V (Deflector) BUNA-N
13 Tornillo de cabeza hexagonal (de la carcasa al adaptador)
134 Cubierta del cojinete Hierro fundido
14 Tornillo de cabeza hexagonal
(del adaptador al motor/bastidor) Acero zincado 138 Sello de reborde (exterior) BUNA-N
15 Tornillo de cabeza hexagonal 139 Sello de reborde (interior)
(del adaptador al compartimiento de sellos) 168 Cojinete de bolas (interior) Acero
16 Aro de linterna Teflon™ 193 Grasera (grupo M y L)
17 Empaque, 5 anillos Impregnado de Teflon 327C Tornillo (cubierta a adaptador) (SAE únicamente) Acero zincado
18 Casquillo Acero inoxidable AISI 316 340 Adaptador/motor (SAE únicamente) Hierro fundido
19 Camisa del eje 361 Anillo de retención Acero
Acero inoxidable 370C Tornillo de cabeza hexagonal (del marco a la cubierta) Acero zincado
20 Perno del casquillo
tipo AISI 300
21 Tuerca del casquillo 371C Tornillo de cabeza hexagonal (del adaptador al marco)
22 Tuerca del impulsor (SAE únicamente) 304 SS Acero inoxidable 304 (SAE únicamente) NO SE MUESTRA Acero
399 Chaveta, acoplamiento
22A Tornillo de fijación, tuerca del impulsor (SAE únicamente)
501N Cubierta/adaptador (SAE únicamente) Acero galvanizado
23 Engrasador (aceitador opcional) Policarbonato
27
CUADROS DE FUERZA, 3656/3756
112 361 370C 361 370C
168
139 399
399
138
138
123 168 122 134
123 193 122 112 193 134
Cuadro de fuerza, Grupo S Cuadro de fuerza, Grupo M
123 139 371L 193

361 370C
168
361
139 399 399
327C
138
501N
370C
138
340
123 193 122 112 193 134
168 193 122A 112 134
Cuadro de fuerza, Grupo L Cuadro de fuerza, SAE
28
NOTES
29
GARANTÍA COMERCIAL
Para los productos vendidos a compradores comerciales, el Vendedor garantiza que los productos vendidos al Comprador en virtud del
presente (con excepción de membranas, sellos, juntas, materiales de elastómero, revestimientos y otras “partes de desgaste” o consumibles,
que no se garantizan, con excepción de lo dispuesto por el contrario en la cotización o formulario de venta) (i) se construirán de acuerdo con las
especificaciones referidas en la cotización o formulario de venta, si tales especificaciones se realizan expresamente como parte de este Acuerdo, y
(ii) están libres de defectos en material y mano de obra por un período de un (1) año desde la fecha de instalación o doce (12) meses desde la fecha
de envío (y tal fecha de envío no deberá ser posterior a dieciocho (18) meses posteriores a la recepción del aviso que los productos están listos para
ser enviados), lo que ocurra primero, a menos que se especifique un período mayor en la documentación del producto (la “Garantía”).
Con excepción de lo requerido por ley, el Vendedor, a su opción y sin costo alguno para el Comprador, reparará o reemplazará el producto que
no se ajuste a la Garantía en tanto que el Comprador envíe un aviso escrito al Vendedor sobre todo defecto en material o mano de obra dentro
de diez (10) días de la fecha en que aparecen por primera vez los defectos o no conformidades. Según la opción de reparación o reemplazo, el
Vendedor no estará obligado a remover o pagar la remoción del producto defectuoso ni instalar o pagar la instalación del producto reemplazado
o reparado y el Comprador será responsable de todos los demás costos, que incluyen, entre otros, los costos de servicio, aranceles y gastos de
envío. El Vendedor tendrá la exclusiva facultad de decisión con respecto al método o medio de reparación o reemplazo. El incumplimiento del
Comprador de las instrucciones de reparación o reemplazo del Vendedor rescindirá las obligaciones del Vendedor en virtud de esta Garantía y
anulará esta Garantía. Toda pieza reparada o reemplazada en virtud de la Garantía es garantizada solo por el resto del período de garantía por las
piezas reparadas o reemplazadas. El Vendedor no tendrá obligaciones de garantía frente al Comprador con respecto a ningún producto o pieza de
un producto que haya sido: (a) reparado por terceros que no sean el Vendedor o sin la aprobación escrita del Vendedor; (b) sujeto a uso incorrecto,
aplicación incorrecta, descuido, alteración, accidente o daño físico; (c) usado de forma contraria a las instrucciones del Vendedor para la instalación,
operación y mantenimiento; (d) dañado por el uso y desgaste normal, corrosión o ataque químico; (e) dañado debido a condiciones anormales,
vibración, falta de cebado correcto o funcionamiento sin flujo; (f) dañado debido a una fuente de alimentación defectuosa o protección eléctrica
incorrecta; o (g) dañado debido al uso de equipos accesorios no vendidos o aprobados por el Vendedor. En el caso de productos no fabricados por
el Vendedor, no hay garantía del Vendedor; sin embargo, el Vendedor extenderá al Comprador toda garantía recibida del proveedor del Vendedor
de tales productos.
LA GARANTÍA ANTERIOR ES EXCLUSIVA Y REEMPLAZA TODA OTRA GARANTÍA, CONDICIÓN O TÉRMINO EXPRESO O IMPLÍCITO DE CUALQUIER
NATURALEZA RELACIONADO CON LOS PRODUCTOS PROVISTOS EN VIRTUD DEL PRESENTE, INCLUYENDO, SIN CARÁCTER LIMITATIVO, LAS
GARANTÍAS IMPLÍCITAS DE COMERCIABILIDAD E IDONEIDAD PARA UN PROPÓSITO EN PARTICULAR, QUE POR EL PRESENTE SE RECHAZAN Y
EXCLUYEN EXPRESAMENTE. CON EXCEPCIÓN DE LO DISPUESTO POR LA LEY EN CONTRARIO, EL EXCLUSIVO REMEDIO DEL COMPRADOR Y
LA RESPONSABILIDAD TOTAL DEL VENDEDOR POR EL INCUMPLIMIENTO DE ALGUNA DE LAS GARANTÍAS ANTERIORES SE LIMITA A REPARAR
O REEMPLAZAR EL PRODUCTO Y EN TODO CASO SE LIMITARÁ AL IMPORTE PAGADO POR EL COMPRADOR POR EL PRODUCTO DEFECTUOSO.
EN NINGÚN CASO EL VENDEDOR SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR OTRA FORMA DE DAÑOS, YA SEA DIRECTOS, INDIRECTOS, LIQUIDADOS,
INCIDENTALES, RESULTANTES, PUNITIVOS, EJEMPLARES O ESPECIALES, INCLUYENDO, ENTRE OTROS, LA PÉRDIDA DE GANANCIAS, LA
PÉRDIDA DE AHORROS ANTICIPADOS O GANANCIAS, LA PÉRDIDA DE INGRESOS, LA PÉRDIDA DEL NEGOCIO, LA PÉRDIDA DE PRODUCCIÓN,
LA PÉRDIDA DE OPORTUNIDAD O LA PÉRDIDA DE REPUTACIÓN.
Xylem Inc.
Teléfono: (800) 453-6777
Fax: (888) 322-5877
Goulds es una marca registrada de Goulds Pumps, Inc. y se utiliza bajo licencia.
© 2015 Xylem Inc. IM010 Revisión Número 9 Septiembre 2015
MANUEL D'UTILISATION
IM010R09
Modèles 3656 et 3756

DIRECTIVES D’INSTALLATION, D’UTILISATION ET D’ENTRETIEN
INFORMATIONS POUR LE PROPRIÉTAIRE TABLE DES MATIÈRES
Noter les informations pertinentes ci-dessous et remettre le livret à SUJET PAGE
la ou au propriétaire. La garantie est présentée en page 44. Consignes de sécurité................................................... 30
Numéro de modèle : Description et caractéristiques...................................... 30
Données techniques...................................................... 30
Numéro de série : Installation................................................................... 30
Détaillant : Emplacement............................................................ 30
No de téléphone du détaillant : Groupes monobloc (pompes sur moteur).................. 30
Pompes sur palier...................................................... 31
Date d’achat : Date d’installation : Pompes sur palier SAE (moteur thermique)............... 31
Alignement de l’accouplement...................................... 34
Pompes sur palier seulement..................................... 34
Tuyauterie.................................................................... 34
Aspiration................................................................. 34
Refoulement............................................................. 35
Câblage et mise à la terre.............................................. 35
Sens de rotation............................................................ 35
Utilisation..................................................................... 35
Entretien...................................................................... 35
Démontage................................................................... 36
Remontage................................................................... 36
Presse-garniture............................................................ 37
Diagnostic des anomalies.............................................. 39
Pièces de rechange – séries 3656 et 3756...................... 40
Garantie limitée............................................................ 44
32
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ Les groupes monobloc (pompes sur moteur) sont dotés de
AFIN DE PRÉVENIR LES BLESSURES GRAVES OU moteurs JM ou JP conformes aux normes NEMA, d’un
MORTELLES ET LES DOMMAGES MATÉRIELS adaptateur en C et d’un arbre-rallonge claveté. Les paliers
IMPORTANTS, LIRE ET SUIVRE TOUTES LES SAE sont vissés au carter de volant du moteur thermique
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ FIGURANT DANS par l’intermédiaire d’un support SAE de format no 1, 2, 3,
LE PRÉSENT MANUEL ET SUR LA POMPE. 4 ou 5. Des accouplements en élastomère sont offerts en
option pour les diamètres de volant de 6½ po, 7½ po, 8
Le symbole ci-contre est un SYMBOLE DE po, 10 po, 11½ po et 14 po. Les pompes montées sur palier
SÉCURITÉ employé pour signaler les peuvent être entraînées par accouplement ou par courroie.
mots-indicateurs dont on trouvera la
description ci-dessous. Sa présence sert à DONNÉES TECHNIQUES
attirer l’attention afin d’éviter les blessures
et les dommages matériels. Température maximale du liquide :
100 °C (212 °F), avec garniture mécanique ou
DANGER Prévient des risques qui VONT causer des d’étanchéité standard ;
blessures graves, la mort ou des dommages 120 °C (250 °F), avec garniture mécanique pour
matériels importants. hautes températures, en option.
Prévient des risques qui PEUVENT causer Pression de service maximale (selon la température du
AVERTISSEMENT
des blessures graves, la mort ou des liquide) :
dommages matériels importants. 1,379 MPa (200 lbf/po2), avec raccords NPT ;
1,379 MPa (200 lbf/po2), avec raccords à bride
ATTENTION Prévient des risques qui PEUVENT causer ANSI 125.
des blessures ou des dommages matériels.
Pression d’aspiration maximale : 689,5 kPa (100 lbf/po2)
AVIS : SERT À ÉNONCER LES DIRECTIVES Démarrages par heure : 20, répartis uniformément
SPÉCIALES DE GRANDE IMPORTANCE
Groupe Dimensions Aspiration Refoulement
QUE L’ON DOIT SUIVRE.
1½ x 2-6 (H) 2 po, NPT 1½ po, NPT
LE PRÉSENT MANUEL A POUR BUT DE FACILITER 1 x 2-7 2 po, NPT 1 po, NPT
L’INSTALLATION ET L’UTILISATION DE LA POMPE. 2½ x 3-7 3 po, NPT 2½ po, NPT
S
LIRE SOIGNEUSEMENT CHAQUE DIRECTIVE ET 3 x 4-7 4 po, à bride 3 po, à bride
AVERTISSEMENT AVANT D’EFFECTUER TOUT 1 x 2-8 2 po, NPT 1 po, NPT
TRAVAIL SUR LA POMPE. 1½ x 2-8 2 po, NPT 1½ po, NPT
2 x 2-5 2 po, NPT 2 po, NPT
N’ENLEVER AUCUNE DÉCALCOMANIE DE SÉCURITÉ. 2½ x 2½-5 2½ po, NPT 2½ po, NPT
LH 3 x 3-5 3 po, NPT 3 po, NPT
AVIS : INSPECTER L’APPAREIL ET SIGNALER 4 x 4-5 4 po, à bride 4 po, à bride
IMMÉDIATEMENT TOUT DOMMAGE AU 5 x 5-6 5 po, à bride 5 po, à bride
TRANSPORTEUR OU AU DÉTAILLANT. 2½ x 3-8 3 po, NPT 2½ po, NPT
AVERTISSEMENT
APPAREIL NON CONÇU POUR LES 3 x 4-8 4 po, à bride 3 po, à bride
LIQUIDES DANGEREUX NI POUR LES 4 x 5-8 5 po, à bride 4 po, à bride
GAZ INFLAMMABLES. 1½ x 2-10 2 po, NPT 1½ po, NPT
2½ x 3-10 3 po, à bride 2½ po, à bride
M
3 x 4-10 4 po, à bride 3 po, à bride
Les fluides dangereux 2½ x 3-13 3 po, à bride 2½ po, à bride
peuvent causer un
incendie, des brûlures
ou la mort. 4 x 6-13 6 po, à bride 4 po, à bride
DESCRIPTION et CARACTÉRISTIQUES L 8 x 10-13 10 po, à bride 8 po, à bride
Les pompes de séries 3656 et 3756 sont des pompes
centrifuges à un étage, à aspiration en bout, servant au
transfert de liquides et au pompage de nature générale, ainsi INSTALLATION
qu’à l’augmentation de pression et à l’irrigation. Elles sont EMPLACEMENT
offertes en trois versions : tout fonte, avec composants en • Placer la pompe aussi près de la source de liquide que
bronze ou tout bronze (groupe S seulement). possible, plus bas que celle-ci pour assurer l’amorçage
Les pompes sont munies d’une roue fermée, clavetée sur automatique.
l’arbre et retenue par une rondelle et une vis. Le corps de • Le dégagement autour du groupe de pompage doit être
pompe est du type à volute, à bagues d’usure remplaçables. suffisant pour faciliter l’entretien et l’aération.
Selon les dimensions de la pompe, les raccords d’aspiration • Protéger l’appareil contre les intempéries, les inondations
et de refoulement sont filetés ou à brides. Des chemises et le gel.
d’arbre en inox protègent l’arbre.
• Protéger la tuyauterie contre le gel.
GROUPES MONOBLOC (POMPES SUR MOTEUR)
• Le groupe monobloc peut être installé à l’horizontale,
à la verticale ou sur une surface inclinée, le moteur plus
haut que la pompe.
33
• Les pattes de fixation du moteur DOIVENT être ancrées 6½ po, 7½ po, 8 po, 10 po, 11½ po et 14 po. Bien que l’on
à une surface solide et rigide pouvant supporter tout le puisse employer d’autres accouplements, il est recommandé
poids du groupe monobloc. Dans le cas du groupe L, les d’utiliser les accouplements Goulds, conçus pour assurer un
pattes de l’adaptateur de moteur doivent aussi être ancrées fonctionnement fiable et de longue durée.
à cette surface. EXIGENCES VISANT LE BON FONCTIONNEMENT
• S’il s’agit d’une installation verticale, protéger le moteur con- Pompe
tre les intempéries, les éclaboussures, la condensation, etc. Outre le débit requis (en gal US/min) fourni par la pompe, la
AVIS : NE PAS PLACER LE MOTEUR PLUS BAS QUE hauteur manométrique totale à pareil débit doit être prise en
LA POMPE AFIN DE LE PROTÉGER CONTRE compte. Le point de fonctionnement débit-hauteur manomé-
LES FUITES ET L’EAU DE CONDENSATION. trique totale devrait être aussi près que possible du point de
POMPES SUR PALIER rendement le plus haut de la courbe de performances, mais
• On DOIT fixer le groupe de pompage à une surface plane doit être sous la vitesse de rotation « maximale » (en r/min),
et solide pour prévenir toute déformation ou contrainte déterminée selon la durée de vie des roulements et, parfois, la
due au serrage des boulons d’ancrage. Le montage sur limite de pression de la pompe.
support en caoutchouc est permis pour réduire les Les orifices d’aspiration et de refoulement sont soit taraudés
vibrations et le bruit excessifs. (NPT) pour les tuyaux ordinaires, soit à bride standard à trous
• Serrer les boulons de fixation du moteur AVANT de de vis ANSI B16.1, classe 125. Suivant la norme ANSI B16.1,
raccorder la tuyauterie à la pompe. la pression de service maximale pour la fonte de classe 30 est
de 175 lbf/po².
(1/4 po)
Trou de remplissage
(coulis) Plaque de base
Les moteurs à combustion interne ont une vitesse et une
Coulis arasé puissance utile variables. La puissance est fonction de la vitesse
Coulis
et diminue quand il y a hausse de la température de l’air ou de
Espace de
nivellement:
l’altitude d’utilisation du moteur. Lorsqu’il entraîne la pompe à
Coins ou cales de nivellement – laissés en place
(1/2 à 3/4 po) la vitesse requise pour fournir l’eau au système, le moteur doit
Dessus de la dalle (massif),
propre et humecté
tourner dans les limites de vitesse minimale et maximale stipu-
Coffrage lées par le constructeur du moteur. La puissance nécessaire à la
en bois
Manchon pompe ne doit pas dépasser la puissance continue nominale du
moteur, une fois incluse toute réduction de puissance due aux
accessoires de moteur et à la hausse de la température de l’air
Rondelle ou de l’altitude de service du moteur.
Patte de blocage
Pe DU GROUPE MOTOPROPULSEUR
On choisit le groupe motopropulseur à combustion interne
Figure 1 selon la Pe, la puissance effective (au frein), égale au débit
• Il est recommandé de remplir de coulis le vide entre la multiplié par la hauteur manométrique totale, divisés par
plaque de base et le massif de béton. Le massif doit reposer 3 960 fois le rendement ([gal US/min x hmt] ÷ [3 960 x rend.]).
sur une semelle de fondations solide. (Voir la figure 1.) Nota : on doit cependant réduire la Pe comme suit :
• Placer des coins de nivellement sous le groupe de pompage : • 20 % pour le service continu ;
en deux endroits distincts sous le centre approximatif du • 5 % pour la transmission à angle droit ;
moteur et en deux autres sous celui de la pompe. Régler la • 3 % aux 1 000 pi au-dessus du niveau de la mer ;
hauteur des coins pour que les raccords d’aspiration et de • 1 % aux 10 °F passé 60 °F.
refoulement soient de niveau (employer un fil à plomb ou COUPLE DU GROUPE MOTOPROPULSEUR
un niveau). Il faut aussi tenir compte du couple pour choisir le groupe
• S’assurer que la plaque de base n’est pas déformée et que motopropulseur. En général, la relation entre la Pe et le couple
l’alignement final de l’accouplement est possible dans les varie dans la plage utile d’un diesel (v. fig. 2). Le couple (en
limites de déplacement du moteur ou en calant celui-ci au lbf·pi) égale 5 250 fois la puissance effective, divisée par la
besoin. vitesse de rotation ([5 250 x Pe] ÷ r/min).
• Serrer les boulons d’ancrage à la main et construire un 600 180
coffrage autour de la plaque de base. Remplir entièrement 178
le coffrage et le dessous de la plaque de coulis : s’assurer 500
176
qu’il n’y a aucun creux sous les pattes de fixation de la 174
400
pompe et du moteur. 172
lbf·pi
• Laisser le coulis durcir pendant 48 heures avant de visser

hp
300 170
les boulons d’ancrage à fond. 168
200
• Serrer les boulons de fixation de la pompe et du moteur 166
avant d’aligner les arbres ou de raccorder la tuyauterie à la 100

164
pompe. 162
0 160
1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300
POMPES SUR PALIER SAE r/min
(MOTEUR THERMIQUE) Figure 2 — Courbes puissance (◆)-couple (■)

• Le palier SAE est fixé au carter de volant du moteur
thermique par le biais d’un support SAE de format no 1,
2, 3, 4 ou 5. L’arbre-rallonge de la pompe est conçu pour
être accouplé directement au volant. Goulds offre des
accouplements en option pour les diamètres de volant de
34
VÉRIFICATION DE LA CORRESPONDANCE de pompe. Il est toutefois recommandé de mettre l'orifice
POMPE-MOTEUR de refoulement à l'horizontale et plus haut que l'orifice
Format de la ferrure SAE d'aspiration.
Les pompes pour moteurs à combustion sont prévues pour les • Chaque corps de pompe doit être soutenu par un support
carters de volant (moteur) de formats SAE 1 à 5. rigide assujetti à la plaque de base ou au massif de béton.
S’il s’agit d’un nouveau moteur, on peut s’adresser au • Dans le cas du groupe M, fixer le support rigide à l'anneau-
fournisseur pour savoir le format SAE du carter de volant. adaptateur du moteur avec au moins deux (2) des vis de
Si le moteur est déjà en place, on peut en mesurer comme suit fixation (13) du corps de pompe. L'épaisseur accrue du
le diamètre d’alésage du carter de volant et le diamètre du support pourrait requérir des vis plus longues. Employer des
cercle de vissage et les comparer avec ceux de la table 1 pour vis SAE 5, serrées au couple indiqué ci-après.
trouver le format SAE : • Pour le groupe L, supporter la pompe à l'aide des deux pattes
• Prendre au 1/32 po le plus proche la mesure diamétrale moulées de l'adaptateur de moteur (3). Les pattes doivent être
de l'alésage (A) et du cercle (B) avec un ruban à mesurer vissées au support.
(v. fig. 3). ACCOUPLEMENT CANNELÉ
• Compter le nombre de trous taraudés sur le carter de volant Préparatifs
(C). Utiliser des vis de séries de filetages différentes pour • Au besoin, nettoyer les faces d'emboîtement et de fixation
déterminer la série des trous. du carter de volant et du volant pour les débarrasser de la
• Comparer les données de A, B et C avec celles de la table 1 graisse, des saletés, de la rouille et des résidus d'antirouille,
pour connaître le format SAE du carter de volant et s'assurer pouvant nuire à la pose et à l'alignement de la pompe. Si
qu'il convient à la pompe. le volant est muni d'un roulement-guide pour arbre de
transmission, enlever et jeter le roulement, non requis pour
Dimensions
Format SAE du carter de volant l'installation de la pompe et pouvant gêner l'introduction de
du carter de l'arbre de pompe.

volant (en po) 1 2 3 4 5
• Examiner les cannelures de l'arbre de près. Au besoin, en
A 201⁄8 175⁄8 161⁄8 141⁄4 123⁄8
limer les bavures pour faciliter le glissement de l'arbre dans le
B 207⁄8 183⁄8 167⁄8 15 131⁄8
moyeu de l'accouplement.
Nombre 12 12 12 12 8
C
Cotation 7⁄16 — 14 3⁄8 — 16 3⁄8 — 16 3⁄8 — 16 3⁄8 — 16 • Avec modération, appliquer de la graisse sur les cannelures de
l'arbre. Ne pas en mettre sur les arbres clavetés.
Table 1
• Enfiler l'accouplement sur l'arbre et le pousser à fond (v. en
page suivante pour les arbres clavetés).
MOTEUR
• Mesurer l'écart A entre la face de fixation de l'accouplement
et la face de fixation de la ferrure de pompe (v. A, fig. 4).
• Mesurer l'écart B entre la face du volant servant à fixer
l'accouplement et la face du carter de volant utilisée pour
fixer la ferrure de pompe (v. B, fig. 4).
NOTA : l’écart A (côté moteur de la pompe) doit être moindre
que l’écart B (côté pompe du moteur), sinon le vilebrequin du
moteur subira une poussée axiale nuisible. Donc, A doit être
plus petit que B.
Figure 3 ACCOUPLEMENT DE VOLANT
• L'accouplement de volant transmet l'énergie du moteur à
INSTALLATION l'arbre de pompe. La limite de puissance maximale que peut
• S'il s'agit d'une installation horizontale, on peut placer supporter sans risque l'accouplement est exprimée par un
l'orifice de refoulement dans n'importe laquelle des positions chiffre dans la colonne R des tables 1A et 1B.
permises par l'emplacement des vis de fixation (13) du corps
NOTA : quand l’accouplement est posé correctement, il n’atteint
pas la partie lisse de l’arbre. S’il l’atteint, inverser l’accouplement (v.
fig. ci-dessous) pour en augmenter le jeu. = dégagement à vérifier
avant la mise en service
Ferrure
de pompe
Ferrure
Ferrure
de pompe
de pompe
Moteur Moteur
Position de Position de
premier choix second choix
Non — A est Oui — A est

plus grand que B. plus petit que B.
A DOIT être
plus petit que B.
Figure 4 Figure 5
35
• Pour choisir l'accouplement de volant, déterminer d'abord Table 1B — Accouplement claveté à moyeu
la puissance nominale requise par la pompe en repérant, sur en élastomère pour plage r/min étendue
sa courbe de performances, le point de rencontre des valeurs Dimensions du volant (en pouces) Accoupl. claveté (po)
r/min et Pe nécessaires pour obtenir le point débit-hauteur Diam.
D E Diam.
manométrique totale approprié. d’embr.
(po)

Numéro
Filet. (diam. BC F G H R* d’article de
Nbre UNC
• Diviser ensuite Pe par r/min, puis multiplier le quotient par extér.) l’arbre
100. Le résultat constituera la limite de puissance pour la 5⁄16 — 18 8½ 7,88 3,94 1,19 1,69 2,28 CD616
6½ 6
pompe. Par exemple, pour une 20BFSAE1AO fournissant 3,51 CD625
800 gal US/min à une hmt de 270 pi, à 1 800 r/min, la Pe serait 2,28 CD716
5⁄16 — 18 9½ 8,75 3,69 1,19 1,69
de 75 hp, et la limite de puissance pour la pompe, de 4,16 7½ 8
3,51 CD725
([75 ÷ 1 800] x 100). 2,28 CD816
3⁄8 — 16 103⁄8 9,62 4,81 2,44 2,94
• Choisir l'accouplement convenant au volant (limite de puis- 8 6
3,51 CD825
sance et dimensions). En pareil cas, l'accouplement doit avoir 2,28 CD1016
une limite de puissance (R) SUPÉRIEURE à celle qui a été
3,51 CD1025
calculée pour la pompe. Dans l'exemple ci-dessus, la limite de
10 8 3⁄8 — 16 123⁄8 11,62 4,47 2,13 2,75 5,71 CD1030
puissance R pour l'accouplement serait au moins de 5.
8,57 CD1050 1,625 à
• L'ajusteur-monteur est responsable de l'analyse de compa-
11,23 CD1080 1,624
tibilité du moteur, de la pompe et de l'accouplement quant
à leur rigidité en torsion. Goulds Water Systems fournira à 2,28 CD1116 Rainure
l'ajusteur- monteur les données pour la pompe et 3,51 CD1125 de cla-
l'accouplement. 5,71 CD1130 vette :
3
⁄8 x 3⁄16
NOTA : si le moyeu du volant est muni d’un roulement-guide, 11½ 8 3⁄8 — 16 137⁄8 13,12 5,06 1,56 2,69 8,57 CD1150
enlever le roulement pour ne pas qu’il gêne l’insertion de 11,23 CD1180
l’arbre de pompe. 12,62 CD1190
VOLANT POUR EMBRAYAGES CONCENTRIQUES 16,85
CD11110H
INDUSTRIELS 2,28 CD1416
• La fig. 6 montre le volant évidé conçu pour les embrayages 3,51 CD1425
concentriques des prises de force. 5,71 CD1430
• On y notera aussi la partie alésée renfoncée du volant, dotée 14 8 3⁄8 — 16 183⁄8 17,25 6,63 1,00 2,13 8,57 CD1450
de trous taraudés servant à fixer l'accouplement. Les dimen- 11,23 CD1480
sions sont conformes aux normes SAE et figurent dans les 12,62 CD1490
tables 1A et 1B. Le diamètre d'embrayage mentionné est le 16,85
CD14110H
diamètre nominal de la garniture du disque d'embrayage * R = limite de puissance max. pour l’accouplement = (hp nomin. x 100) ÷ r/min nomin.
concentrique de type couronne.
AUTRES TYPES DE VOLANTS
Volant pour embrayage • Le volant de certains moteurs est usiné spécialement pour di-
Moteur concentrique industriel verses machines (génératrices, convertisseurs de couple, etc.)
et nécessite donc un accouplement de volant spécial, que l'on
Accouplement obtiendra d'un vendeur ou d'un fournisseur indépendants.
de volant
• S'il s'agit d'un accouplement claveté Goulds Water Systems,
Diam. extér.
des cannelures s'assurer que la vis de pression du moyeu de l'accouplement
est suffisamment dévissée pour permettre l'insertion de la
10 cannelures
extérieures
clavette cours du montage.
• Fixer l'accouplement au volant du moteur avec les vis four-
nies, serrées en croix au couple approprié ci-après : 15 N·m
(11 lbf·pi) pour les volants de 6½ po et de 7½ po, 27 N·m
(20 lbf·pi) pour les volants de 8 po, de 10 po et de 11½ po
Figure 6 et 68 N·m (50 lbf·pi) pour ceux de 14 po. (Pour tout autre
Table 1A — Accouplement cannelé à moyeu accouplement, suivre les directives d’installation recomman-
en élastomère pour plage r/min étendue dées par le fabricant.)
Dimensions du volant (en pouces) Accoupl. cannelé (po) • Placer la clavette dans la rainure de l'arbre de pompe (122)
Diam. et aligner l'arbre sur l'accouplement. Introduire l'arbre de
D E Diam.
d’embr. Numéro

(po) Nbre
Filet. (diam. BC F G H R* d’article extér., pompe dans l'accouplement jusqu'à ce que la ferrure ou
UNC extér.) cannel. l'adaptateur de pompe (340) touche le carter de volant.
6½ 6 5⁄16 — 18 8½ 7,88 3,94 1,19 1,69 7 A00569C 1 1½ FIXATION DE L’ACCOUPLEMENT AU VOLANT
7½ 8 5⁄16 — 18 9½ 8,75 3,69 1,19 1,69 7 A00569C 2 1½
Accouplement de volant du type concentrique
8 6 3⁄8 — 16 103⁄8 9,62 4,81 2,44 2,94 7 A00569C 3 1½
• Ce type d'accouplement est concentrique par rapport au
10 8 3⁄8 — 16 123⁄8 11,62 4,47 2,13 2,75 7 A00569C 4 1½
volant et est aligné sur celui-ci par emboîtement.
10 8 3⁄8 — 16 123⁄8 11,62 4,47 2,13 2,75 9 A00569C 6 1½
• S'assurer d'enlever tout enduit protecteur du volant du
11½ 8 3⁄8 — 16 137⁄8 13,12 5,06 1,56 2,69 7 A00569C 5 1½
moteur.
11½ 8 3⁄8 — 16 137⁄8 13,12 5,06 1,56 2,69 9 A00569C 7 1½
14 8 ½ — 13 183⁄8 17,25 6,63 1,00 2,13 9 A00569C 8 1½
* R = limite de puissance maximale pour l’accouplement = (hp nomin. x 100) ÷ r/min nomin.
36
• Emboîter l'accouplement dans le volant en prenant soin comparateur à cadran et déplacer le curseur de celui-ci de
d'aligner les trous de vis. Au besoin, frapper l'accouplement 360° le long du plateau de l’autre demi-accouplement tout en
avec une massette à panne douce pour s'assurer qu'il est bien notant l’écart indiqué par l’aiguille. L’alignement est correct si
appuyé contre le volant. Fixer l'accouplement solidement le faux-rond total est de 0,508 mm (0,020 po) ou moins.
en place avec des vis d'assemblage et des rondelles-freins à • L’alignement final est correct quand il est conforme aux
ressort. exigences sur l’alignement parallèle et angulaire après le
FIXATION DE LA POMPE AU MOTEUR serrage à fond des boulons de fixation du moteur.
• Lever la pompe avec un appareil approprié et aligner AVIS : IL FAUT TOUJOURS VÉRIFIER LES DEUX
l'arbre de pompe sur le moyeu d'accouplement. Le bout TYPES D’ALIGNEMENT APRÈS CHAQUE
de l'arbre est biseauté pour en faciliter l'introduction RÉGLAGE MÉCANIQUE.
dans l'accouplement.
• Par l'orifice d'aspiration de la pompe, faire tourner la roue TUYAUTERIE
légèrement jusqu'à ce que l'arbre pénètre dans le moyeu d'ac-
couplement. S'assurer qu'il n'y aucun espace entre la face de • Afin de réduire les pertes de charge (par frottement) au
fixation de la ferrure de pompe et celle du carter de volant. minimum, maintenir la tuyauterie aussi courte que pos-
Au besoin, faire tourner le corps de pompe pour aligner les sible, ne pas employer un calibre de tuyau inférieur à celui
trous de vis de la ferrure sur ceux du carter. Avec des vis des raccords d’aspiration et de refoulement de la pompe ni
d'assemblage, fixer la pompe solidement au carter. utiliser d’accessoires ou de raccords de tuyauterie superflus.
NOTA : si l’on découvre des pièces incompatibles, impossibles • La tuyauterie DOIT posséder ses propres supports et
à poser, etc. au cours de l’installation, NE PAS poursuivre le N’appliquer AUCUNE contrainte sur la pompe.
travail. S’en référer au distributeur Goulds Water Systems. AVIS : LA TUYAUTERIE NE DOIT APPLIQUER
• Assujettir la pompe au moteur avec les rondelles-freins et les AUCUNE CONTRAINTE SUR LES RACCORDS
vis fournies, serrées en croix au couple approprié ci-dessous : D’ASPIRATION ET DE REFOULEMENT DE
indices SAE nos 2, 3, 4, et 5 – 27 N·m (20 lbf·pi) ; LA POMPE.
indice SAE no 1 – 68 N·m (50 lbf·pi). • Chaque joint DOIT être étanche.
• Poser le carter d’accouplement (501N). ASPIRATION
• Visser l’adaptateur de moteur (3) au support rigide précité. • Si la hauteur d’aspiration dépasse 3 m (10 pi), et la
température du liquide, 49 °C (120 °F), consulter la courbe
ALIGNEMENT DE L’ACCOUPLEMENT de performances de la pompe pour obtenir la hauteur nette
OMETTRE LE VERROUILLAGE d’aspiration requise (NPSHR).
AVERTISSEMENT
DU CIRCUIT D’ALIMENTATION • Lorsqu’il faut un tuyau d’aspiration plus gros que l’orifice
ÉLECTRIQUE EN POSITION OU- d’aspiration de la pompe, on DOIT poser un raccord
VERTE (HORS CIRCUIT) AVANT réducteur excentré (la partie droite en haut) près de l’orifice.
D’EFFECTUER TOUT TRAVAIL • Si la pompe est plus basse que la source de liquide, poser
D’ENTRETIEN SUR LA POMPE PEUT un robinet-vanne sur le tuyau d’aspiration pour pouvoir
L’équipement CAUSER DES BLESSURES GRAVES. effectuer l’inspection et l’entretien de la pompe.
dangereux peut causer
des blessures ou la mort. AVIS : NE PAS EMPLOYER LE ROBINET-VANNE
POUR RÉDUIRE L’ÉCOULEMENT DU
POMPES SUR PALIER SEULEMENT LIQUIDE VERS LA POMPE, CAR CELA
• On DOIT vérifier l’alignement avant la mise en service de POURRAIT DÉSAMORCER CELLE-CI, EN
la pompe (fig. 7). CAUSER LA SURCHAUFFE ET
L’ENDOMMAGER, ANNULANT AINSI
LA GARANTIE.
Parallèle
• Lorsque la pompe est plus haute que la source de liquide,
on DOIT suivre les directives suivantes :
• Prévenir les poches d’air en ne posant aucun élément
de la tuyauterie d’aspiration plus haut que le raccord
d’aspiration de la pompe.
• Incliner la tuyauterie vers le haut à partir de la source de
Angulaire
liquide.
• Employer un clapet de pied SEULEMENT s’il est néces-
Figure 7 saire pour amorcer la pompe ou la maintenir amorcée au
cours des interruptions de service.
• Serrer tous les boulons de fixation avant de vérifier
l’alignement. • La section de passage de la crépine ou de la tulipe
d’aspiration doit être au moins le triple de celle du tuyau
• Lorsqu’un alignement est nécessaire, on doit toujours déplacer
d’aspiration.
uniquement le moteur. Employer des cales au besoin.
• S’assurer que le diamètre (d) et la hauteur d’immersion (h)
• Désalignement parallèle (arbres parallèles mais non de l’orifice d’entrée du tuyau d’aspiration sont suffisants
concentriques) – Fixer au moyeu d’un demi-accouplement pour empêcher l’aspiration d’air par vortex (fig. 8 à 11).
un comparateur à cadran, dont on déplace le curseur de
360° le long de la jante de l’autre demi-accouplement tout en
notant l’écart indiqué par l’aiguille. L’alignement est correct
si le faux-rond total est de 0,254 mm (0,010 po) ou moins.
• Désalignement angulaire (arbres concentriques mais non
parallèles) – Fixer au moyeu d’un demi-accouplement un
37
SENS DE ROTATION
h min. h min. AVIS : LA ROTATION DANS LE MAUVAIS SENS
d d PEUT ENDOMMAGER LA POMPE ET
ANNULE LA GARANTIE.
• La rotation appropriée est EN SENS HORAIRE (vers
la droite), vue de l’extrémité du moteur. S’il s’agit d’une
Figure
Figure8 1 Figure
Figure92
h pompe sur palier, la mettre en marche, puis l’arrêter
h = hauteur d’immersion min. en pieds

16
15
14
rapidement tout en vérifiant son sens de rotation. Dans le
13
12
cas des pompes sur moteur, enlever l’obturateur ou le cou-
11
10
vercle d’extrémité du moteur et vérifier le sens de rotation.
9
8
• Pour inverser la rotation des moteurs triphasés, en inter-
3,0d 7
6
vertir deux des conducteurs.
min. 5
4
1,5d
min. h min.
3
2
UTILISATION
1
d d min.
d 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 16 v AVERTISSEMENT NE PAS FAIRE FONCTIONNER
2 v = vitesse en pieds par seconde LES POMPES SUR PALIER (ORDI-
= gal US/min x 0,321 gal US/min x 0,408 5
section de passage d2 NAIRE OU SAE) SANS CARTER
Figure 10 Figure 11 D’ACCOUPLEMENT, CAR CELA
Figure 3 Figure 4 POURRAIT CAUSER DES BLESSURES
REFOULEMENT
GRAVES.
• Poser un clapet de non-retour convenant au débit et aux
liquides pompés. En aval du clapet, installer un robinet-vanne La machinerie dange-
reuse peut causer des
de section de passage appropriée pour la régularisation du blessures mortelles.
débit ainsi que l’inspection et l’entretien de la pompe. ÉCLABOUSSER OU PLONGER UN

AVERTISSEMENT
• Lorsqu’un raccord agrandisseur est nécessaire, le poser MOTEUR ABRITÉ DANS UN LIQUIDE
entre le clapet de non-retour et l’orifice de refoulement de la PEUT CAUSER UN INCENDIE, UN
pompe. CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE, DES BRÛLURES
OU LA MORT.
CÂBLAGE ET MISE À LA TERRE
AVERTISSEMENT
Installer la pompe, la mettre à la Les tensions dangereuses
peuvent causer un choc
terre et la brancher suivant les électrique, des brûlures et
la mort.
prescriptions du code provincial ou
national de l’électricité pertinent et
les règlements locaux. AVERTISSEMENT NE PAS FAIRE FONCTIONNER LA
POMPE SI SON DÉBIT EST NUL OU
Poser un sectionneur tout PRESQUE, SINON IL POURRAIT EN
Les tensions dangereuses
conducteur près de la pompe. RÉSULTER UN ÉCHAUFFEMENT
électrique, des brûlures et Verrouiller le circuit d’alimentation EXCESSIF, DES BLESSURES OU DES
la mort.
électrique de la pompe en DOMMAGES MATÉRIELS.
position ouverte (hors circuit) Les hautes
avant de procéder à l’installation températures peuvent
causer blessures et
ou à l’entretien de la pompe. dommages matériels.
L’alimentation électrique DOIT être conforme aux

spécifications de la plaque signalétique. Une tension AVIS : NE PAS FAIRE FONCTIONNER LA POMPE À
inappropriée peut causer un incendie ou des SEC POUR NE PAS ENDOMMAGER
dommages au moteur et annule la garantie. LA GARNITURE MÉCANIQUE.
Les moteurs monophasés non protégés DOIVENT • Faire fonctionner la pompe dans des conditions de service
être munis de contacteurs et de protections contre normales, attendre que le système se stabilise, puis vérifier la
les surcharges thermiques, et les moteurs triphasés, tuyauterie et en régler la position des supports au besoin.
de démarreurs à protection contre la surcharge. • La différence de température entre la pompe sur palier et le
Consulter la plaque signalétique du moteur. moteur peut provoquer le désalignement de l’accouplement.
• N’utiliser que du fil de cuivre pour la mise à la terre et Par conséquent, vérifier l’alignement de nouveau en
l’alimentation du moteur. Le calibre du fil de terre DOIT respectant les directives et les avertissements de la section
être au moins égal à celui des fils d’alimentation, et les fils « Alignement de l’accouplement » ci-dessus.
devraient tous être chromocodés pour faciliter l’entretien.
• Suivre soigneusement le schéma de câblage sur la plaque ENTRETIEN
signalétique ou le cache-bornes du moteur. OMETTRE LE VERROUILLAGE
AVERTISSEMENT
AVERTISSEMENT
OMETTRE LA MISE À LA TERRE DU CIRCUIT D’ALIMENTATION
PERMANENTE DE LA POMPE, DU ÉLECTRIQUE EN POSITION OU-
Tension MOTEUR ET DES COMMANDES VERTE (HORS CIRCUIT) AVANT
dangereuse AVANT LE BRANCHEMENT À LA D’EFFECTUER TOUT TRAVAIL
SOURCE DE COURANT PEUT D’ENTRETIEN SUR LA POMPE PEUT
CAUSER UN CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE, CAUSER UN CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE,
DES BRÛLURES OU LA MORT. Les tensions dangereuses
peuvent causer un choc DES BRÛLURES OU LA MORT.
électrique, des brûlures et
la mort.
38
ATTENTION OMETTRE DE RÉDUIRE LA PRES- AVIS : NE PAS INSÉRER DE TOURNEVIS ENTRE LES
SION DU SYSTÈME OU DE VIDAN- AUBES DE LA ROUE POUR EMPÊCHER
GER CELUI-CI AVANT DE PROCÉDER CELLE-CI DE TOURNER.
À L’ENTRETIEN PEUT CAUSER DES 4. Dans le cas des groupes monobloc (pompes sur moteur),
DOMMAGES MATÉRIELS ET DES enlever l’obturateur ou le couvercle d’extrémité du moteur
BLESSURES, VOIRE LA MORT. pour accéder à la fente ou aux méplats de blocage du
Les pressions dangereuses bout d’arbre.
peuvent causer des
blessures et des 5. Bloquer l’arbre de la pompe sur moteur avec l’outil
dommages matériels.
approprié et celui de la pompe sur palier avec un serre-tubes
à sangle, puis enlever et jeter la vis (6) de la roue : on
LORSQUE LES LIQUIDES POMPÉS
AVERTISSEMENT devra peut-être chauffer la vis au chalumeau d’abord.
SONT DANGEREUX OU TOX-
IQUES, ON DOIT RINCER LE SYS- AVIS : MANIPULER LA VIS DE LA ROUE AVEC
TÈME AVANT D’EN EFFECTUER PRÉCAUTION QUAND ELLE EST CHAUDE.
L’ENTRETIEN. AVIS : POUR LES POMPES SUR PALIER SAE,
ENLEVER LA VIS D’ARRÊT (22A), PUIS
L’ÉCROU DE ROUE (22). ON DEVRA
Les fluides dangereux
peuvent causer des
PEUT- ÊTRE CHAUFFER LA VIS ET
blessures et des
dommages matériels.
L’ÉCROU D’ABORD.
6. Ôter la rondelle de roue (7).
GROUPES MONOBLOC 7. Enlever la roue (2) DÉLICATEMENT au moyen de
• Les roulements sont situés à l’intérieur du moteur. Suivre deux leviers placés entre celle-ci et le logement de garniture
les directives du fabricant du moteur pour leur graissage. mécanique (3), dans un angle de 180°.
POMPES SUR PALIER 8. Ôter la clavette (8).
• Les roulements de palier du modèle 3756, groupe S, sont 9. Déposer les vis (14) du logement de garniture
graissés à vie. Il est donc impossible et inutile de les graisser. mécanique (3), puis tirer le logement pour l’enlever avec
• Les roulements de palier SAE et de palier modèle 3756, la garniture. Jeter cette dernière ainsi que le joint torique
groupes M et L, devraient être graissés à la fin de la (9) du logement. Pour les directives portant sur le presse-
période suivante arrivant la première : 2 000 heures de garniture, voir la section « Presse-garniture ».
fonctionnement ou trois mois de temps écoulé. Employer 10. Enlever l’adaptateur (108).
une graisse au lithium ou au sodium no 2. Injecter la graisse 11. Inspecter la chemise d’arbre (11). Si elle trop rayée,
dans le roulement jusqu’à ce qu’elle sorte par les garnitures la chauffer au chalumeau, l’enlever et la jeter.
ou les joints à lèvre(s), puis essuyer le surplus. 12. Pousser l’élément fixe de la garniture mécanique hors du
• Suivre les directives du fabricant du moteur et de logement et le jeter.
l’accouplement pour le graissage. 13. Dans le cas des logements de garniture munis d’une bague
• Vérifier l’alignement de nouveau. d’usure (5), enlever la bague si elle est trop usée.
ENTRETIEN SAISONNIER DÉMONTAGE DU PALIER (ORDINAIRE OU SAE)
• Avant la MISE HORS SERVICE de la pompe, enlever le 1. Ôter le déflecteur (123) de l’arbre.
bouchon de vidange et vidanger tous les tuyaux non protégés 2. Enlever le couvercle de palier (134).
du gel.
3. Sortir l’ensemble arbre du palier.
• Avant la REMISE EN SERVICE de la pompe, garnir les filets
du bouchon de vidange de ruban de TéflonMC ou l’équivalent 4. Si les joints à lèvre(s) 138 et 139 sont usés, les enlever du
et reposer le bouchon. couvercle de palier (134) et du corps de palier (228) et
les jeter.
• Si le tuyau d’aspiration a été séparé de la pompe, en examiner
le raccord union, le réparer au besoin, puis raccorder le tuyau. 5. Déposer la bague de retenue (361).
• Consulter la section « Utilisation » ci-dessus. 6. Avec un arrache-roulement ou une presse à mandriner,
ôter les roulements (112 et 168).
DÉMONTAGE
REMONTAGE
• Suivre CHAQUE avertissement et directive de la section
« Entretien » ci-dessus. • Chaque pièce devrait être nettoyée avant le remontage.
• Groupes monobloc : enlever les boulons de fixation AVIS : ON DEVRAIT REMPLACER LE JOINT
du moteur. TORIQUE CHAQUE FOIS QUE LA POMPE
EST DÉMONTÉE.
• Pompes sur palier : déposer le carter d’accouplement, la
pièce d’écartement de l’accouplement, l’accouplement et les PALIER
boulons de fixation du palier. 1. Remplacer les joints à lèvre(s) s’ils ont été enlevés.
POMPE 2. Remplacer les roulements à billes s’ils ont du jeu, s’ils
1. Enlever les vis (13) du corps de pompe. ne tournent pas rond ou s’ils sont bruyants.
2. Écarter l’ensemble d’entraînement d’avec le corps 3. Vérifier si l’arbre (122) comporte un faux-rond : le faux-
de pompe (1). rond maximal admissible est de 0,05 mm (0,002 po).
3. Retirer la bague d’usure (4) du corps de pompe si elle 4. Voir les directives de graissage des pompes du groupe M
est trop usée. dans la section « Entretien ».
39
POMPE 14. Si l’on a retiré la bague d’usure du corps de pompe,
1. Inspecter l’arbre et en enlever les aspérités et les résidus. la remplacer.
2. Appliquer de l’apprêt Primer T de LOCQUICMD ou 15. Poser les vis du corps de pompe et les serrer en croix au
l’équivalent sur l’arbre : suivre les directives du fabricant couple approprié ci-dessous :
avec soin. vis 3⁄8 - 16 (corps en bronze) – 34 N·m (25 lbf·pi) ;
vis 3⁄8 - 16 (corps en fonte) – 50 N·m (37 lbf·pi) ;
3. Lorsque l’on pose une chemise d’arbre neuve, en enduire
vis ½ - 13 (corps en fonte) – 122 N·m (90 lbf·pi) ;
la paroi intérieure d’apprêt Primer T de LOCQUICMD ou
vis ¾ - 10 po (corps en fonte) – 237 N·m (175 lbf·pi).
l’équivalent. Laisser l’apprêt sécher, puis le recouvrir de
LOCTITEMD no 262. Poser ensuite la chemise sur l’arbre 16. Une fois la pompe remontée, faire tourner l’arbre par
dans un mouvement de rotation, puis essuyer l’arbre. l’extrémité du moteur avec l’outil approprié pour vérifier
Laisser le produit durcir suivant les directives pertinentes. s’il y a grippage.
AVIS : LA GARNITURE MÉCANIQUE DOIT ÊTRE 17. En cas de grippage ou de frottement, desserrer les vis du
REMPLACÉE CHAQUE FOIS QU’ON corps de pompe, puis les serrer de nouveau.
L’ENLÈVE. SUIVRE LES DIRECTIVES DU 18. Dans le cas des groupes monobloc, reposer les boulons de
FABRICANT DE LA GARNITURE AVEC SOIN. fixation, puis l’obturateur ou le couvercle d’extrémité du
POUR LES PRESSE-GARNITURE, VOIR moteur.
LA SECTION « Presse-garniture ». 19. S’il s’agit d’une pompe sur palier, reposer l’accouplement,
4. Si l’on a retiré la bague d’usure du logement de garniture la pièce d’écartement, le carter d’accouplement et les
mécanique, la remplacer. boulons de fixation du palier.
5. On peut tremper l’élément fixe de la garniture mécanique AVIS : IL FAUT TOUJOURS VÉRIFIER LES DEUX
dans l’eau pour en faciliter la pose. L’aligner ensuite avec TYPES D’ALIGNEMENT APRÈS CHAQUE
soin sur son logement. En recouvrir la surface polie avec un RÉGLAGE MÉCANIQUE.
morceau de carton mince ou d’essuie-tout. Pousser 20. Voir la section « Alignement de l’accouplement » pour
l’élément jusqu’au fond avec un morceau de plastique ou de aligner celui-ci de nouveau.
bois rond pour répartir uniformément la force appliquée. 21. Le remontage est maintenant terminé.
NOTA : si la garniture mécanique est munie d’un anneau
élastique, enlever et jeter celui-ci. PRESSE-GARNITURE
6. Poser l’adaptateur sur le moteur, la face plate de
l’adaptateur contre le moteur. 1. S’assurer que le presse-garniture est propre et exempt de
corps étrangers avant d’y placer la garniture. Voir le
7. Mettre le joint torique sur le logement de garniture. On peut
presse-garniture illustré dans la section « Pièces de
glycériner ou tremper le joint dans l’eau pour en faciliter la
rechange – séries 3656 et 3756 ».
pose. Poser le logement de garniture sur l’adaptateur.
Prendre garde que l’arbre ne déloge l’élément fixe de 2. Poser les anneaux de garniture avec précaution parce qu’ils
la garniture ni n’en endommage le siège. sont matricés. Mettre chaque anneau en place en en
écartant les extrémités par torsion juste assez pour y
8. Poser l’élément mobile de la garniture sur l’arbre en
introduire la chemise d’arbre. NE PAS ESSAYER
l’alignant avec soin et en le poussant à fond contre
D’ÉCARTER LES EXTRÉMITÉS EN LIGNE DROITE.
l’élément fixe.
Voir la figure 12.
AVIS : REMPLACER LA VIS ET LA RONDELLE DE CORRECT INCORRECT
ROUE CHAQUE FOIS QUE L’ON DÉPOSE
LA ROUE.
9. Insérer la clavette de la roue dans sa rainure, poser la
roue sur l’arbre, la pousser à fond et la maintenir en
place. Dans le cas des pompes sur palier SAE, enduire
d’abord de Loctite 271 la rainure de clavetage, la paroi
intérieure alésée de la roue et la surface correspondante Figure 12
de l’arbre, puis poser la roue sur l’arbre, la pousser 3. Placer les deux pièces en Téflon (fournies) de la lanterne
à fond et la maintenir en place. d’arrosage comme le montre la figure 13. Les encoches
10. Poser une rondelle de roue neuve. Il n’y a pas de doivent être l’une en face de l’autre, sans être
rondelle de roue dans les pompes sur palier SAE. obligatoirement alignées.
11. Enduire de Loctite 271 (ou l’équivalent) les filets de la
vis de roue neuve, puis poser la vis et la serrer au couple
approprié ci-dessous :
vis 3⁄8 - 16 — 27 N·m (20 lbf·pi) ;
vis ½ - 13 — 51 N·m (38 lbf·pi) ;
(aucune vis de roue dans les pompes sur palier SAE).
12. S’il s’agit d’une pompe sur palier SAE, enduire de
Loctite 271 les filets du bout d’arbre et ceux de l’écrou
de roue (22), poser l’écrou et le serrer au couple
approprié suivant :
écrou de ½ po (SAE, groupe M) — 107 N·m (80 lbf·pi) ; Lanterne d'arrosage en Téflon (2 pièces)
écrou de ¾ po (SAE, groupe L) — 134 N·m (100 lbf·pi). Figure 13
13. Une fois l’écrou de roue (pompe sur palier SAE) en
place, mettre du Loctite 271 sur la vis d’arrêt (22A),
poser la vis sur l’écrou et la serrer à la main.
40
4. On pose les éléments de garniture dans l’ordre suivant : 3. Dans le cas du lubrificateur à huile, la boîte de lubrifica-
deux anneaux de garniture, deux pièces de lanterne tion portera la lettre O, placée en haut, et les deux orifices
d’arrosage, trois anneaux de garniture. Placer le joint de de 1⁄8 po, NPT, seront montés à l’horizontale pour assurer
chaque anneau à 90° par rapport à celui de l’anneau une bonne lubrification. Le joint à lèvre(s) 26 sera toutefois
précédent. Introduire et pousser chaque élément séparément posé sur la boîte de lubrification en sens inverse par rapport
et à fond. Pour ce faire, il est recommandé d’employer une à celui de la figure 15.
douille de bois en deux pièces (fig. 14), enfoncée à l’aide du 4. La pose du lubrificateur peut nécessiter l’emploi de tubes et
fouloir. S’assurer que la lanterne d’arrosage est bien en face de raccords, qui seront fournis par l’usine selon le cas.
de l’orifice d’admission du liquide de rinçage. Les anneaux
de garniture supplémentaires servent de rechanges. 5. Le lubrificateur à graisse (23) vient avec trois ressorts
(argent, rouge et bleu). Le choix du ressort est fonction de
la température de service et de la graisse utilisée :
DOUILLE DE BOIS EN DEUX PIÈCES
Ressort de lubrificateur à graisse
Température de service Graisse no 1 Graisse no 2 Graisse no 3
FOULOIR – 23 ºC (– 10 ºF) à 4 ºC (40 ºF) ARGENT ROUGE
– 40 ºC (– 40 ºF) à 43 ºC (110 ºF) ARGENT ARGENT ROUGE
BOÎTE À – 79 ºC (– 110 ºF) à 93 ºC (200 ºF) BLEU ARGENT ARGENT
GARNITURE
ARBRE Employer de l’huile SAE 30W pour le lubrificateur à huile.
Figure 14
5. Poser les écrous sur les goujons du fouloir et les serrer
légèrement et uniformément. Après la mise en marche de
la pompe, les serrer davantage et lentement jusqu’à ce que
le débit de suintement soit de 40-60 gouttes par minute.
On peut utiliser une graisse lubrifiante quand le liquide
pompé contient des particules abrasives ou que la pression
à l’entrée de la pompe est inférieure à la pression
atmosphérique. 23
ENLÈVEMENT DE LA GARNITURE
• Suivre les étapes ci-dessous pour retirer la garniture du
presse-garniture.
1. Enlever le fouloir.
2. Extraire la garniture avec un « crochet à garniture ». 26
3. Introduire un crochet en métal dans un des orifices du
pourtour des pièces de lanterne d’arrosage, puis retirer
ces dernières.
4. Nettoyer le presse-garniture.
GRAISSEUR PRIME SAFE
(en option — groupes M et L seulement)
• Le graisseur Prime Safe peut être fourni avec un lubrificateur
à graisse ou à huile.
24
1. La boîte de lubrification (24) est marquée de la lettre G ou
O et possède deux orifices de 1⁄8 po, NPT, pour la pose du
lubrificateur.
2. Si l’on choisit le lubrificateur à graisse (23), la boîte de lubri-
fication portera la lettre G, placée en haut, et le lubrificateur Figure 15
sera monté dans un angle de 30º par rapport à l’horizontale
pour permettre l’accès à son téton de graissage. Le joint à
lèvre(s) 26 sera posé sur la boîte de lubrification comme le
montre la figure 10.
41
DIAGNOSTIC DES ANOMALIES
AVERTISSEMENT VERROUILLER LE CIRCUIT
D’ALIMENTATION ÉLECTRIQUE
EN POSITION OUVERTE (HORS
CIRCUIT) AVANT D’EFFECTUER
TOUT TRAVAIL D’ENTRETIEN SUR
LA POMPE. OMETTRE CE POINT
PEUT CAUSER UN CHOC
Les tensions dangereuses
électrique, des brûlures et
ÉLECTRIQUE, DES BRÛLURES
la mort. OU LA MORT.
ANOMALIE
LE MOTEUR NE FONCTIONNE PAS.
(V. causes probables 1 à 5.)
LE DÉBIT DE REFOULEMENT EST FAIBLE OU NUL.
(V. causes probables 6 à 13.)
LA POMPE CONSOMME TROP D’ÉNERGIE.
(V. causes probables 3, 13, 14 et 15.)
LA VIBRATION ET LE BRUIT SONT EXCESSIFS.
(V. causes probables 3, 6, 7, 10, 12, 14, 16, et 17.)
CAUSES PROBABLES
1. Protecteur thermique du moteur déclenché
2. Disjoncteur ouvert ou fusible sauté
3. Roue grippée
4. Câblage incorrect
5. Moteur défectueux
6. Pompe non amorcée, air ou gaz présent dans le liquide
pompé
7. Tuyau d’aspiration ou de refoulement obstrué ou
robinet(s) fermé(s)
8. Mauvais sens de rotation (moteurs triphasés seulement)
9. Basse tension électrique ou perte de phase
10. Roue usée ou engorgée
11. Hauteur de charge trop élevée du système
12. Hauteur nette d’aspiration disponible (NPSHA) :
hauteur ou perte d’aspiration excessives
13. Diamètre de roue inapproprié
14. Hauteur de refoulement trop faible – débit excessif
15. Viscosité ou densité trop élevée du liquide
16. Roulement usé
17. Pompe, moteur ou tuyauterie mal assujettis
42
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE – SÉRIES 3656 ET 3756
4 6 7 8 2 5 9 10 3 11
SAE, M et L
13
À la place de 6 et 7
22A 22 23
3 10 3
16 17 18
11
12 1 14
19
24
20
21 26
25
Composants du presse-garniture Graisseur Prime Safe (en option — M et L seulement)
COMPOSANTS DE LA POMPE COMPOSANTS DE LA POMPE (suite)

No d’article Description Matériau No d’article Description Matériau
1 Corps de pompe 24 Boîte de lubrification Aluminium
Fonte ou laiton au
2 Roue 25 Bouchon de tuyau Acier zingué
silicium*
3 Adaptateur 26 Joint à lèvre(s) Buna
4 Bague d’usure (corps de pompe) * Sans plomb ; ➀ E-P = éthylène-propylène.
Fonte ou bronze*
5** Bague d’usure (logement de garniture méc.) ** L’article 5 est fourni pour le groupe S, dimensions 2½x3-7 (7½, 10 et 15 hp),
et le groupe M (sauf les dimensions 3x4-10).
6 Vis (roue)
Inox AISI, type 300 COMPOSANTS DES PALIERS (v. page suivante)
7 Rondelle (roue)
No d’article Description Matériau
8 Clavette de roue Acier
112 Roulement à billes externe
9 Joint torique (logem. de garn. méc.. — matér. opt.) Buna-N, E-P ➀, Viton Acier
122 Arbre de pompe
10 Garniture mécanique (communiquer avec l’usine)
122A Arbre de pompe (SAE) Acier AISI 4140
11 Chemise d’arbre Inox AISI, type 300
123 Déflecteur annulaire en V Buna-N
12 Bouchon de vidange, 1⁄4 et 3⁄8 po NPT
134 Couvercle de palier Fonte
13 Vis à tête hex. (adaptateur-corps de pompe)
Acier zingué 138 Joint à lèvre(s) externe
14 Vis à tête hex. (adapt.-moteur, adapt.-palier) Buna-N
139 Joint à lèvre(s) interne
15 Vis à tête hex. (adaptateur-logem. de garn.)
168 Roulement à billes interne
16 Lanterne d’arrosage TéflonMC Acier
193 Graisseur (groupes M et L)
17 Anneaux de garniture (cinq) TéflonMC imprégné
327C Vis (couvercle de l’adaptateur) – SAE seulement Acier zingué
18 Fouloir Inox AISI 300
340 Adaptateur de moteur thermique SAE Fonte
19 Chemise d’arbre
361 Bague de retenue Acier
20 Goujon de fouloir Inox AISI, type 300
370C Vis à tête hex. (couvercle-palier) Acier zingué
21 Écrou de fouloir
Vis à tête hex. (adaptateur-palier) –
22 Écrou de roue (SAE seulement) 371C
Inox 304 SAE seulement – (non montrée) Acier
22A Vis d’arrêt de l’écrou de roue (SAE seulement) 399 Clavette (accouplement)
23 Lubrificateur à graisse (lubrific. à huile en option) Polycarbonate 501N Couvercle de l’adaptateur – SAE seulement Acier galvanisé
43
PALIERS – SÉRIES 3656 ET 3756
112 361 370C 361 370C
168
139 399
399
138
138
123 168 122 134
123 193 122 112 193 134
Palier du groupe S Palier du groupe M
123 139 371L 193

361 370C
168
361
139 399 399
327C
138
501N
370C
138
340
123 193 122 112 193 134
168 193 122A 112 134
Palier du groupe L Palier SAE
44
NOTES
45
NOTES
46
Declaration of Conformity
We at,
Goulds Water Technology/Xylem Inc.
1 Goulds Drive
Auburn, NY 13021
Declare that the following products: NPE, MCS, MCC, 3656, 3656 SP, GB, e-SV, SVI, NPO, Prime Line
SP, HB, HMS, LC, NPV, LB, LBS comply with Machine Directive 06/42/EC. This equipment is intended
to be incorporated with machinery covered by this directive, but must not be put into service until the
machinery into which it is to be incorporated has been declared in conformity with the actual provisions
of the directive.
Declaración de Conformidad
Nosotros en
1 Goulds Drive
Auburn, NY 13021
Declaramos que los siguientes productos: NPE, MCS, MCC, 3656, 3656 SP, GB, e-SV, SVI, NPO, Prime
Line SP, HB, HMS, LC, NPV, LB, LBS cumplen con las Directivas para Maquinarias 06/42/EC. Este
equipo ha sido diseñado para ser incorporado a la maquinaria cubierta por esta directiva pero no debe
ponerse en funcionamiento hasta que se declare que la maquinaria en la que será incorporado cumple
con las disposiciones reales de la directiva.
Déclaration de Conformité
Nous, à
1 Goulds Drive
Auburn, NY, U.S.A. 13021,
déclarons que les produits NPE, MCS, MCC, 3656, 3656 SP, GB, e-SV, SVI, NPO, Prime Line SP, HB,
HMS, LC, NPV, LB et LBS sont conformes à la directive 06/42/EC (législation relative aux machines). Ils
sont destinés à être intégrés dans la machinerie faisant l’objet de ladite directive, mais ne doivent pas être
mis en service tant que la machinerie en question ne sera pas déclarée conforme aux stipulations de la
directive.
47
GARANTIE POUR UTILISATION COMMERCIALE
Pour les biens vendus aux acheteurs commerciaux, le vendeur garantit les biens vendus ci-dessous (sauf pour les membranes, joints d’étanchéités,
joints, matériaux en élastomère, revêtements et autres « pièces d’usure » ou articles consomptibles, ces derniers n’étant pas garantissable sauf
indication contraire sur le formulaire de soumission ou de vente) seront (i) intégrés selon les spécifications indiquées sur la soumission ou le
formulaire de vente, si ces spécifications font partie intégrantes de cette entente, et (ii) sont libres de toute défectuosité matériel et de fabrication
pendant une période de un (1) an depuis la date d’installation ou douze (12) mois depuis la date d’expédition (la date d’expédition ne sera pas
ultérieure à dix-huit (18) mois après la réception de l’avis que les biens sont prêts à être expédiés), la première instance à survenir, à moins qu’une
période plus longue n’ait été indiquée sur la documentation du produit (la « Garantie »).
Sauf mention contraire dans les lois, le vendeur, à son choix et sans frais pour l’acheteur, réparera ou remplacera tout produit défectueux en vertu de
la garantie pour autant que l’acheteur donne un avis écrit au vendeur de toutes défectuosités matérielles ou de maind’oeuvre dans les dix (10) jours
de la première occurrence d’un défaut ou non conformité. En vertu de l’option de réparation ou de remplacement, le vendeur n’est soumis à aucune
obligation de retirer ou de faire retirer le produit défectueux ni d’installer ou de payer pour l’installation du produit réparé ou remplacé. L’acheteur
ne peut être tenu responsable de tout autre frais, incluant, entre autre, frais de réparation, d’expéditions et dépenses. Le vendeur à son entière
discrétion choisira la méthode ou le moyen de réparation ou de remplacement. Le défaut de l’acheteur de se conformer aux directives de réparation
ou de remplacement du vendeur conclura les obligations du vendeur en vertu de la présente garantie et annulera la garantie. Toutes pièces
réparées ou remplacées en vertu de la garantie seront couvertes uniquement pour la durée de la garantie restante sur les pièces ayant été réparées
ou remplacées. Le vendeur n’aura aucune obligation de garantie envers l’acheteur pour tout produit ou pièces du produit ayant été : (a) réparées
par une tierce partie autre que le vendeur ou sans l’approbation écrite du vendeur; (b) soumises à une mauvaise utilisation, mauvaise application,
négligence, altération, accident ou dommage physique; (c) utilisées de manière contraire aux directives d’installation, d’opération et d’entretien du
vendeur; (d) endommagées par une usure normale, corrosion ou produits chimiques; (e) endommagées par des conditions anormales, vibrations,
défaut d’une amorce adéquate ou opération sans débit; (f) endommagées par une alimentation électrique défectueuse ou une mauvaise protection
électrique; ou (g) endommagées par l’utilisation d’un accessoire n’ayant pas été vendu ou approuvé par le vendeur. Dans le cas de produits n’ayant
pas été fabriqués par le vendeur, ce dernier n’offre aucune garantie; cependant le vendeur fera profiter l’acheteur de toute garantie qu’il aura reçu
du fournisseur de tels produits.
LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE EST EXCLUSIVE ET REMPLACE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE OU CONDITIONS EXPRESSES OU IMPLICITES DE QUELQUE
NATURE SE RAPPORTANT AUX BIENS FOURNIS CI-APRÈS, INCLUSANT, SANS LIMITE, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE
ET DE CONFORMITÉ À DES FINS PARTICULIÈRES, QUI SONT RÉFUTÉES EXPRESSÉMENT ET EXLUES. SAUF MENTION CONTRAIRE DANS LES
LOIS, LE SEUL RECOURS DE L’ACHETEUR ET LA RESPONSABILITÉ DU VENTEUR EN CAS DE BRIS D’UNE DES GARANTIES CI-APRÈS EST LIMITÉ
À LA RÉPARATION OU AU REMPLACEMENT DU PRODUIT ET SERA DANS TOUS LES CAS LIMITÉ AU MONTANT PAYÉ PAR L’ACHETEUR POUR LE
PRODUIT DÉFECTUEUX. EN AUCUN CAS, LE VENDEUR NE POURRA ÊTRE TENU RESPONSABLE DE TOUTES AUTRES FORMES DE DOMMAGES,
QU’IL SOIT DIRECT, INDIRECT, LIQUIDÉ, ACCIDENTEL, CONSÉCUTIF, PUNITIF, EXEMPLAIRE OU DOMMAGES SPÉCIAUX, INCLUANT, ENTRE
AUTRES, PERTE DE PROFIT, PERTE D’ÉCONOMIE PRÉVUE OU DE REVENU, PERTE DE RENTRÉE MONÉTAIRE, PERTE DE CLIENTÈLE, PERTE DE
PRODUCTION, PERTE D’OPPORTUNITÉ OU PERTE DE RÉPUTATION.
Xylem Inc.
Téléphone: (800) 453-6777
Télécopie: (888) 322-5877
Goulds est une marque déposée de Goulds Pumps, Inc. et est utilisé sous le permis.
© 2015, Xylem Inc. IM010 Révision numéro 9 Septembre 2015
Product Information Packet
ESTABROOK CORP
EJMM2333T
15HP,1765RPM,3PH,60HZ,254JM,0944M,TEFC,F
Copyright © All product information within this document is subject to Baldor Electric Company copyright © protection, unless otherwise noted.
Product Information Packet: EJMM2333T - 15HP,1765RPM,3PH,60HZ,254JM,0944M,TEFC,F
Part Detail
Revision: K Status: PRD/A Change #: Proprietary: No
Type: AC Prod. Type: 0944M Elec. Spec: 09WGZ910 CD Diagram: CD0005
Enclosure: TEFC Mfg Plant: Mech. Spec: 09P14 Layout: 09LYP014
Frame: 254JM Mounting: F1 Poles: 04 Created Date: 11-09-2012
Base: RG Rotation: R Insulation: F Eff. Date: 01-06-2017
Leads: 9#12 Replaced By:
Literature: Elec. Diagram:
Page 2 of 10
Nameplate NP3441L
CAT.NO. EJMM2333T
SPEC. 09P014Z910G1
HP 15
VOLTS 230/460
AMP 36.2/18.1
RPM 1765
FRAME 254JM HZ 60 PH 3
SER.F. 1.15 CODE H DES A CL F
NEMA-NOM-EFF 92.4 PF 83
RATING 40C AMB-CONT
CC 010A USABLE AT 208V 38
DE 6309 ODE 6208
ENCL TEFC SN
VPWM INVERTER READY
CT6-60H(10:1)VT3-60H(20:1
Page 3 of 10
Parts List
Part Number Description Quantity
SA254026 SA 09P014Z910G1 1.000 EA
RA240837 RA 09P014Z910G1 1.000 EA
S/P107-000-005 SUPER-E PROC'S(254/6 FR.) ZK PLANT - POL 1.000 EA
HW1002A63 WASHER, 5/8 HI-COLLAR SPRLCKWASHER 1.000 EA
09CB3002 CB W/1.38 LEAD HOLE FOR 37, 39, 307 & 30 1.000 EA
09GS1000 GASKET-CONDUIT BOX, 1/16 THICK LEXIDE 1.000 EA
10XN2520K12 1/4-20 X.75 GRD 5 2.000 EA
HW1001A25 LOCKWASHER 1/4, ZINC PLT .493 OD, .255 I 2.000 EA
09EP1300A52 ENDPLATE, MACH 1.000 EA
HW4600B44 V-RING SLINGER 1.500 X 1.810 X .28 VITON 1.000 EA
WD1000B17 T&B CX35TN TERMINAL 1.000 EA
51XW1032A06 10-32 X .38, TAPTITE II, HEX WSHR SLTD S 1.000 EA
09FE1100A14 FREP ASSEMBLY, 09EP1100A14 1.000 EA
XY3816A12 3/8-16 FINISHED NUT 4.000 EA
HW5100A08 W3118-035 WVY WSHR (WB) 1.000 EA
10XN2520K28 1/4-20 X 1.75" HX HD SCRWGRADE 5, ZINC P 2.000 EA
10XN2520K36 1/4-20 X 2.25" HX HD SCRWGRADE 5, ZINC P 4.000 EA
HA3113A02 THRUBOLT 3/8-16 X 16.750 4.000 EA
09FH4000SP FAN COVER, STAMPED 1.000 EA
HA2081A05 SPACER TUBE, 309 FAN HSG, 2.00 LONG 4.000 EA
Page 4 of 10
Parts List (continued)

Part Number Description Quantity
XY3816A12 3/8-16 FINISHED NUT 4.000 EA
09CB3501 CONDUIT BOX LID FOR 09CB3001 & 09CB3002 1.000 EA
09GS1013 09 GS FOR 09CB3501 LID - LEXIDE 1.000 EA
51XW2520A12 .25-20 X .75, TAPTITE II, HEX WSHR SLTD 2.000 EA
HW2501E22 KEY, 1/4 SQ X 2.500 1.000 EA
LB1115N LABEL,LIFTING DEVICE (ON ROLLS) 1.000 EA
MN416A01 TAG-INSTAL-MAINT no wire (1000/bx) 11/14 1.000 EA
HW4500A05 1669B ALEM/UNIV860 GR FTG X 1.000 EA
HW4500A17 317400 ALEMITE GREASE RELIEF 1.000 EA
HA4051A00 PLASTIC CAP FOR GREASE FITTING 1.000 EA
HA4054 SHORT T-DRAIN FITTING, .125" N.P.T. 1.000 EA
HA4054 SHORT T-DRAIN FITTING, .125" N.P.T. 1.000 EA
MJ1000A02 GREASE, POLYREX EM EXXON (USe 4824-15A) 0.080 LB
HW4500A03 GREASE FITTING, .125 NPT 1610(ALEMITE) 8 1.000 EA
HW4500A17 317400 ALEMITE GREASE RELIEF 1.000 EA
HA4051A00 PLASTIC CAP FOR GREASE FITTING 1.000 EA
09FN3001D01 EXTERNAL FAN, PLASTIC 1.000 EA
HW2500A25 WOODRUFF KEY USA #1008 #BLOW CARBON STEE 1.000 EA
51XB1214A20 12-14X1.25 HXWSSLD SERTYB 1.000 EA
MG1000Y03 MUNSELL 2.53Y 6.70/ 4.60, GLOSS 20, 0.050 GA
85XU0407S04 4X1/4 U DRIVE PIN STAINLESS 2.000 EA
LC0005E02 SPL CONN.DIA./WARN.LABEL(LC0005/LB1119) 1.000 EA
NP3441L ALUM SUPER-E VPWM INVERTER READY UL 1.000 EA
Page 5 of 10
40PA1005 PACKAGING GROUP, 09 STD 1.000 EA
Page 6 of 10
AC Induction Motor Performance Data

Record # 40347 - Typical performance - not guaranteed values
Winding: 09WGZ910-R001 Type: 0944M Enclosure: TEFC
460 V, 60 Hz:
Nameplate Data
High Voltage Connection
Rated Output (HP) 15 Full Load Torque 44.5 LB-FT
Volts 230/460 Start Configuration direct on line
Full Load Amps 36.2/18.1 Breakdown Torque 153 LB-FT
R.P.M. 1765 Pull-up Torque 69.5 LB-FT
Hz 60 Phase 3 Locked-rotor Torque 86.5 LB-FT
NEMA Design Code A KVA Code H Starting Current 127 A
Service Factor (S.F.) 1.15 No-load Current 7.56 A
NEMA Nom. Eff. 92.4 Power Factor 83 Lineline Res. @ 25ºC 0.59555 Ω
Rating - Duty 40C AMB-CONT Temp. Rise @ Rated Load 54°C
S.F. Amps Temp. Rise @ S.F. Load 67°C
Locked-rotor Power Factor 33.1
Rotor inertia 1.92 LB-FT2
Load Characteristics 460 V, 60 Hz, 15 HP

% of Rated Load 25 50 75 100 125 150 S.F.
Power Factor 45 69 79 83 85 87 84
Efficiency 88.2 92.2 92.7 92.4 91.5 90.4 91.9
Speed 1791.3 1783.1 1774 1765.2 1754.6 1743.1 1759
Line amperes 8.62 11 14.5 18.1 22.6 26.9 20.8
Page 7 of 10
Performance Graph at 460V, 60Hz, 15.0HP Typical performance - Not guaranteed values
Page 8 of 10
Page 9 of 10
Page 10 of 10
Section 7
Other Literature – Fan Data

Section 7
Other Literature – Fan Motor Data

CATALOG NUMBER: 8D10P3C NAMEPLATE PART #: 422696-002
MODEL GB42-ALT FR 256T TYPE CE ENCL TEFC
SHAFT 45BC03J3 - QTY 1 OPP 45BC03J3
END BRG END BRG
PH 3 MAX 40 ID#
AMB
INSUL F Asm. F1 DUTY CONT
CLASS Pos.
HP 10 RPM 975 HP RPM

VOLTS 400 VOLTS
FL FL
14.4 AMPS
AMPS
SF SF
16.6 AMPS
AMPS
SF 1.15 DESIGN B CODE G SF DESIGN CODE
NEMA NOM NOM
NEMA NOM 89.6 NOM 83.3 KiloWatt EFFICIENCY PF
EFFICIENCY PF
GUARANTEED MAX HZ
GUARANTEED 87.5 MAX 3.4 HZ 50 EFFICIENCY KVAR
EFFICIENCY KVAR
HAZARDOUS LOCATION DATA (IF APPLICABLE):

DIVISION CLASS I GROUP I
TEMP CODE CLASS II GROUP II
VFD DATA (IF APPLICABLE):

VOLTS
AMPS
TORQUE 1 TORQUE 2
VFD LOAD TYPE 1 VFD LOAD TYPE 2
VFD HERTZ RANGE 1 VFD HERTZ RANGE 2
VFD SPEED RANGE 1 VFD SPEED RANGE 2
SERVICE FACTOR FL SLIP

NO. POLES MAGNETIZING AMPS
VECTOR MAX RPM Encoder PPR
Radians / Seconds Encoder Volts
TEAO DATA (IF APPLICABLE):

HP (AIR OVER) HP (AIR OVER RPM (AIR RPM (AIR OVER
M/S) OVER) M/S)
FPM AIR FPM AIR FPM AIR
VELOCITY VELOCITY M/S VELOCITY SEC
ADDITIONAL NAMEPLATE DATA:
Decal / Plate WD=499495 Customer PN
Notes Non Rev Ratchet
Max Temp Rise OPP/Upper Oil Cap GREASE
Thermal (WDG) SHAFT/Lower Oil Cap GREASE
Altitude 3300 Usable At
Regulatory Notes Regulatory Compliance CC 030A
COS Marine Duty
Balance 0.05 IN/SEC Arctic Duty
3/4 Load Eff. 91.3 Inrush Limit
Motor Weight (LBS) 280 Direction of Rotation
Sound Level 0 Special Note 1
Vertical Thrust (LBS) Special Note 2
Thrust Percentage Special Note 3
Bearing Life Special Note 4
Starting Method Special Note 5
Number of Starts Special Note 6
200/208V 60Hz Max Amps SH Max. Temp.
190V 50 hz Max Amps SH Voltage
380V 50 Hz Max Amps SH Watts
NEMA Inertia Load Inertia
Sumpheater Voltage Sumpheater Wattage
Special Accessory Note 1 Special Accessory Note 16
Heater in C/B Voltage Heater in C/B Watts
Zone 2 Group Division 2 Service Factor
Note 1 CL.I GR.A,B,C,D Note 2 T3 TEMP CODE,DIV 2
Note 3 AT 1.0 S.F.
Special Accessory Note 31 Model Number meets the Mechanical Intent of all associated specifications.
Note that an Alternate Rating may not meet all specification performance standards.
NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION

ST. LOUIS, MO
TYPICAL NAMEPLATE DATA
ACTUAL MOTOR NAMEPLATE LAYOUT MAY VARY
SOME FIELDS MAY BE OMITTED
Nidec trademarks followed by the ® symbol are registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office.
MODEL NO. CATALOG NO. PHASE TYPE FRAME
GB42-ALT 8D10P3C 3 CE 256T
ORDER NO. NA LINE NO.
MPI: 219891-ALT
HP: 10
POLES: 6
VOLTS: 400
HZ: 50
SERVICE FACTOR: 1.15
EFFICIENCY (%):
S.F. 88.1
FULL 89.6
3/4 91.3
1/2 91.6
1/4 88.4
POWER FACTOR (%):
S.F. 84.6
FULL 83.3
3/4 78.7
1/2 69.1
1/4 46.8
NO LOAD 4.7
LOCKED ROTOR 47
AMPS:
S.F. 16.6
FULL 14.4
3/4 11.2
1/2 8.5
1/4 6.5
NO LOAD 5.83
LOCKED ROTOR 86.46
NEMA CODE LETTER G
NEMA DESIGN LETTER B
FULL LOAD RPM 975
NEMA NOMINAL / EFFICIENCY (%) 89.6
GUARANTEED EFFICIENCY (%) 87.5
MAX KVAR 3.4
AMBIENT (°C) 40
ALTITUDE (FASL) 3300
SAFE STALL TIME-HOT (SEC) 30
SOUND PRESSURE (DBA @ 1M) 0
TORQUES:
BREAKDOWN{% F.L.} 258
LOCKED ROTOR{% F.L.} 184
FULL LOAD{LB-FT} 53.8
NEMA Nominal and Guaranteed Efficiencies are up to 3,300 feet above sea level and 25 ° C ambient
The Above Data Is Typical, Sinewave Power Unless Noted Otherwise
Model Number meets the Mechanical Intent of all associated specifications.
Note that an Alternate Rating may not meet all specification performance standards.
NIDEC MOTOR CORPORATION
ST. LOUIS, MO
Nidec trademarks followed by the ® symbol are registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office.
499495
Motor Wiring Diagram
T1
T1
or
T3 DELTA T2 T3 T2
WYE
Connection Connection
LEAD CONNECTION
1 2 3
Line
Each lead may consist of one or more cables having the
same lead number.
499495
To reverse direction of rotation interchange connections L1 and L2.
Each lead may be comprised of one or more cables.

Each cable will be marked with the appropriate lead number.
EFFECTIVE: 2/27/96
SUPERCEDES: X736618, 96441, 179879, 284138
Connection Plate: 499495
Connection Decal: 912113
FRAMES 254T THRU 447T - TOTALLY ENCLOSED AND EXPLOSIONPROOF MOTORS
TYPES: CE, CE1, CE4, CEF, CT, CT1, CT4, CTC, CTE, CTE1, CTE4, CTEF, CTEF1, CTEF4, CTEI, CTEN, CTF, CTF1, CTF4,
CTFI, CTFI1, CTFI4, CTFN, CTI, CTI4, CTN, CTNI, EC, ECEI, FCT, FCTF, FCTF1, FCTN, FD, FDF, FDF1, FL, FLC, FLCA,
FLCF, FLF, FN, FNC, FTC, FTCF, JAD, JDE, L, L1, L4, LC, LC1, LCA, LCAE, LCE, LCEF, LCEI, LCE1, , LCF, LCFI, LCI, LE,
LE1, LE4, LEF, LF, LF1, LF4, LFC, LFI, LI, LN, N, NC, NCE, NCEF, NCF, NCFI, NCI, NE, NF, NN, T, T1, T4, TC, TC1, TC4,
TCA, TCE, TCE1, TCE4, TCEF, TCEF4, TCEI, TCEN, TCEP, TCF, TCF1, TCFI, TCI, TCI1, TCN, TE, TEF, TEN, TF, TFC, TFN,
TN
ITEM ITEM
NO. QTY NAME OF PART NO. QTY NAME OF PART
1 1 Slotted Headless Pipe Plug 22 1 Slotted Headless Pipe Plug
2 1 Pipe Coupling 23 1 Pipe Plug
3 1 Pipe Nipple 24 2 Screw
4 1 Pipe Cap 25 4 Screw (Qty 8 on frames 286T & 326T)
5 1 Pipe Nipple 26 1 Bracket (Not used on types TF)
6 2 Cap and Jam Nut 27 4 Screw (Used only on frame 286T & 326T)
7 1 Fan Cover Guard 28 1 Air Deflector ((Used only on frame 286T & 326T)
8 3 Screw & Lockwasher 29 1 Ball Bearing
9 1 Grill 30 1 Bearing Cap
10 1 Vent Fan Assembly 31 1 Rotor Assembly (Includes items 31A & 31B)
11 1 Woodruff Key (Not used on frames 254T &256T 31A 1 Motor Shaft
12 2 Screw 31B 1 Rotor Core
13 2 Stud & Nut 32 4 Screw
14 2 Screw (Qty 6 on frames 254T & 256T) 33 1 Outlet Box Cover
15 1 Bracket 34 1 Gasket
16 4 Screw (Used only on frame 286T & 326T) 35 4 Screw (Qty 2 on frames 254T & 256T)
17 1 Air Deflector (Used only on frame 286T & 326T) 36 1 Outlet Box Base
18 1 Ball Bearing 37 1 Gasket (Outlet Box Base)
19 1 Bearing Cap 38 1 Eyebolt
20 1 Key 39 1 Wound Stator Assembly
21 1 Water Deflector
WARNING: BEARINGS: PRICES:
Any disassembly or repair work on explosionproof motors Refer to motor nameplate for the Parts stocking distributors: refer to
will void the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label unless bearing numbers. renewal parts numerical index. All
done by the manufacturer, or a facility approved by the Others: refer to your nearest parts
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Refer to your nearest distributor.
sales office for assistance.
reference: Renewal Parts Section 700, Page 19
Copyright © 2010 Nidec Motor Corporation. All rights reserved.
841 PLUS Motors ®
Horizontal A.C. Motors, Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled
Horsepower: 1 – 200 HP
Frame Sizes: 143 – 447
Pole Designs: 2, 4, 6, 8
Design Voltages: 4
60 and 575 Volts at 60 Hz
Requirements: Meets or exceeds Energy Independence
and Security Act of 2007 (EISA);
Meets or exceeds IEEE 841 Standard-2009;
Meets vibration requirements of GM7E-TA
Warranty: 5
-year limited warranty
Product Overview and Options
Designed to exceed the industry’s most stringent IEEE •D

ivision 2 suitable per NEC article 500 (NFPA 70)
841 standards, the U.S. MOTORS ® brand 841 PLUS ® motors •A
FBMA bearing numbers on nameplate
are commonly used in severe duty environments for pumps, •P
rotective coating on each rotor and shaft from bearing
compressors, fans, blowers, and other material processing journal to bearing journal
applications. These rugged motors are ideal for constant speed
or inverter duty applications typically found in the petroleum, Inverter Duty
chemical, pulp and paper, wastewater, automotive and mining Nidec Motor Corporation’s patented inverter grade insulation
industries. system allows the U.S. MOTORS brand 841 PLUS motor to
withstand spike and transient voltages induced by insulated
U.S. MOTORS brand 841 PLUS motors are rated NEMA
bipolar gate transistor drives, making it fully compliant with
Premium ®† efficient. Low-loss silicon steel construction and
NEMA MG-1, Part 31. This is made possible through:
streamlined design enables the motor to operate at lower
temperatures resulting in lower energy costs. This motor is • Pulse-resistant magnetic wire that provides protection against
designed to operate in ambient temperatures of -30°C to 40°C, high-voltage spikes
in altitudes of up to 1,000 meters above sea level and with
• Additional lacing on the end turns improve coil rigidity
NEMA Design B torque-current characteristics. Inertiaload
acceleration capabilities for the 841 Plus motor meet the • Multiple bake cycles to help prevent coil-to-coil circuits
stringent requirements of NEMA MG 1-2009, Section 12.54. • Phase paper to help prevent phase-to-phase arcs
• Adjustable frequency of 5:1 constant torque or 10:1 variable
Product Features: torque for the full product line.
• NEMA Premium ®† efficient
• 1.15 Service Factor on sine wave power; 1.0 Service Factor
on Inverter Duty
• Class B temperature rise at 1.0 Service Factor by resistance
with sine wave power
• Class F insulation materials to increase motor life
• Exceeds NEMA MG1 Part 31 Inverter Duty
• Polyurea grease
• Stainless-steel nameplate
• Variable frequency drive or full voltage, across-the-line starting
• Ground on frame
841 PLUS ®
PDS 241-202 Rev. 01/17 www.usmotors.com

841 PLUS Motors, Horizontal A.C. Motors, Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled
®
Product Overview and Options continued
Typical 841 PLUS ® Motor Construction:

1. Corrosion resistant zinc dichromate-plated hardware 1
2. Heavy duty cast-iron enclosure for long life and reduced vibration 2
3. Inverter grade insulation
3
4. Inpro/Seal “VBXX” on both ends provides IP56 protection
TM
and prolongs motor life by shielding bearings from

contaminants in even the harshest environments 4
5. Special shaft runouts for ball bearing motors of 0.0010
5
inches for shafts up to 1.625 inches and 0.0015 inches for
larger shafts.
6. S
ame size oversized bearings on each end. Cast iron inner
bearing caps
7. Brass breather drains 6
8. Oversized, double-gasketed and rotatable conduit box to
protect against contaminants and correctly position non-braided, 7
non-wicking motor leads 8
9. Foot flatness machined to within 0.005 inch tolerance ensures
easy installation and proper alignment 10 9
10. Corrosion-resistant mill and chemical duty paint capable of
withstanding a 500-hour salt spray test
Options and Accessories

Nidec Motor Corporation offers the following custom-design 841 Plus Stock Motors
options on the U.S. MOTORS brand 841 PLUS motor: • 1 – 200 HP
• 2, 4, 6 pole designs
• SKF CARBTM roller bearings where applicable • 460 and 575 Volts
• Horizontal or vertical mounting • Constant or variable torque
• Vibration detectors • 1–10 HP C-Face Footless
• Sealed insulation treatments, available on form wound, medium
Custom and Conversion Motors
voltage motors above 200 HP, to help shield motor windings • 1 – 500 HP
• Winding and bearing thermal protection for motors • 2, 4, 6, 8 pole designs
250 HP and up • 200, 230, 460, 575, 2300, 4000 Volts
• Inpro/SealTM MGS grounding shaft rings • Constant or variable torque
• C & D flange kits available 140 – 440 frame
• API 661 Duty
Testing and Inspection

Nidec Motor Corporation conducts extensive testing and • Insulation resistance test by megohmeter and polarization index
inspections on each of its U.S. MOTORS brand 841 PLUS motors. • Precision balanced to typical vibration levels of less than
0.05 inches per second
• No load current, power and speed
• Optional complete test, including full load test
• High-potential test on stator windings
For additional information, please refer to our Full Line Standard Motor Catalog (FL600) or contact your Nidec Motor Corporation representative.
† All marks shown within this document are properties of their respective owners.
8050 W. Florissant Avenue | St. Louis, MO 63136

Nidec Motor Corporation, 2017; All Rights Reserved. U.S. MOTORS® is a registered trademark of Nidec Motor Corporation.
Nidec Motor Corporation trademarks followed by the ® symbol are registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. Phone: 888-637-7333 | Fax: 866- 422-7758
PDS 241-202 Rev. 01/17 www.usmotors.com

General Information for Integral Horsepower (IHP) Motors
on Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs)
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) • VFD dv/dt

A VFD is a type of controller used to vary the speed of an electric motor. • High temperatures or high humidity
The VFD takes a fixed AC voltage and frequency and allows it to be • Grouding system
adjusted in order to get different speeds from the motor. Motor speed
can be varied by changing the frequency of the input power waveform. Wider speed ranges, higher voltages, higher switching frequencies,
The equation below shows how the frequency affects the speed of a insufficient grounding and increased cable lengths all add to the severity
three phase induction motor. of the application and, therefore, the potential for premature motor
failure.
120* Fundamental Input Frequency
Speed = How does a VFD affect the motor?
Number of Motor Poles
There are many things to consider when a motor is powered using a
VFD or PWM power. When a motor is powered by a PWM waveform
How does a VFD work? the motor windings very often see a large differential voltage, either from
A VFD takes the fixed frequency and voltage sine wave from the power phase to phase or turn to turn. When the voltage differential becomes
grid or power station and puts it through a few steps in order to allow large enough it creates a reaction at the molecular level that converts
the VFD user to vary the frequency and in turn control the motor speed. available oxygen into O3. This phenomenon is called partial discharge or
First it rectifies the AC power into DC Power. Because of this step, a corona. This reaction creates energy in the form of light and heat. This
term commonly used instead of VFD is inverter. This only describes one energy has a corrosive effect on the varnish used to protect the motor
step of what the VFD does to the power waveform. Once rectified into windings. PWM waveforms can also magnify shaft voltages which lead
a DC voltage the drive sends the power through a set of transistors or to arcing across the bearing and causing premature bearing failure.
switches. These switches can take the DC waveform and by opening Corrective action must be taken to mitigate these issues that arise when
and closing at certain speeds and durations can create an output using an electric motor with a VFD.
waveform that mimics the sine wave that is required to drive a three
phase electric motor. The output wave form is known as a Pulse Width How do I protect the motor?
Modulation (PWM) waveform because the waveform is created by
Nidec Motor Corporation (NMC) has developed specific motor designs
multiple pulses of the switches at short intervals.
to decrease the harmful affects that a VFD can have on a motor.
NMC’s INVERTER GRADE® insulation system is the first line of
PULSE WIDTH MODULATION WAVEFORM defense against corona and phase to phase faults that can be common
when a motor is powered using a PWM waveform. The INVERTER
GRADE® insulation system is standard on all of NMC’s Inverter Duty
Line
to
products. Along with the INVERTER GRADE® insulation, thermostats
Neutral
Voltage
are installed as a minimum protection against over heating the motor.
Special consideration must also be given to bearings in motors powered
by VFD’s. In order to create a low resistance path to ground for built
up shaft voltages a shaft grounding device can be used. On larger
horsepower motors an insulated bearing system should be used in
conjunction with the shaft grounding device when installed, to force the
Line stray shaft voltages to ground. The bearing failures are more prominent
Current
on motors with thrust handling bearings. NMC has created an Inverter
Duty vertical motor line that not only uses the INVERTER GRADE®
insulation system, but that also comes standard with a shaft grounding
Figure 1 PWM Waveform
device. On motors that are 100 HP and greater the thrust bearing is also
insulated for additional protection.
What variables should be considered when
deciding whether to power a motor with a VFD? What does "Inverter Duty" mean?
VFD compatibility with motors is complex. As a result, many variables An Inverter Duty motor should describe a motor that helps mitigate
must be considered when determining the suitability of a particular motor potential failure modes of a motor that is powered by a VFD. Inverter
for use with a VFD. These variables include: duty motor windings should be able to withstand the voltage spikes per
NEMA MG1 Part 31.4.4.2 and protect against overheating when the
• Torque requirements (Constant or Variable) motor is run at slow speeds. On thrust handling bearings it is apparent
• Speed Range that the bearings require additional protection. Inverter Duty vertical
motors should have a shaft grounding device to protect the motor
• Line / System Voltage bearings from fluting due to voltage discharge through the bearing. On
• Cable length between the VFD and the motor larger motors (100HP and larger) the shaft should also be electrically
• Drive switching (carrier) frequency isolated from the frame in order to aid the shaft grounding ring in
• Motor construction discharging the shaft voltages to ground.
*This information applies only to Integral Horsepower (IHP) motors as defined on the Agency Approval page, under UL®† & CSA®† listings where indicated.
† All marks shown within this document are properties of their respective owners. Revised ─ August 2016
www.usmotors.com vii
Motor / Inverter
Compatibility
Thermal Overloads and Single Phase Motors Multiple Motors on a Single VFD
Motors with thermal overloads installed may not operate properly on a Special considerations are required when multiple motors are powered
VFD. The current carrying thermal overload is designed for sine wave from a single VFD unit. Most VFD manufacturers can provide guidelines
power. Operation on a VFD may cause nuisance tripping or potentially for proper motor thermal considerations and starting/stopping of motors.
not protect the motor as would be expected on line power. Thermostats or Cable runs from the VFD and each motor can create conditions that will
thermistors installed in the motor and connected properly to the VFD may cause extra stress on the motor winding. Filters may be required at the
provide suitable thermal overload protection when operating on a VFD. motor to provide maximum motor life.
(consult codes for installation requirements)
Grounding and Cable Installation Guidelines
Single phase motors and other fractional horsepower ratings are not Proper output winding and grounding practices can be instrumental in
designed to be operated on a VFD. Within Nidec Motor Corporation minimizing motor related failures caused by PWM waveform characteristics
standard products, all motors NEMA®† 48 frame (5.5” diameter) and and installation factors. VFD manufacturers typically provide detailed
smaller are not suitable for VFD applications. Three phase 56 and guidelines on the proper grounding of the motor to the VFD and output
143/145 frame applications should be noted on the catalog price page; cable routing. Cabling manufacturers provide recommended cable types
or if in doubt ask an Nidec Motor Corporation technical representative for for PWM installations and critical information concerning output wiring
recommendations on compatibility with a VFD. impedance and capacitance to ground.
Slow Speed Motors

Vertical Motors on VFDs
Motors with a base design of slower than six poles require special Vertical motors operated on VFD power present unique conditions that
consideration regarding VFD sizing and minimizing harmonic distortion may require consideration by the user or installation engineer:
created at the motor terminals due to cable installation characteristics.
Additional external PWM waveform filters and shielded motor cables • • Locked rotor and drive tripping caused by non-reversing-ratchet
designed for PWM power may be required to provide acceptable motor life. operation at low motor speeds. It is not recommended to operate
Harmonic distortion on the output waveform should be kept to a minimum motors at less than 1/4 of synchronous speed. If slow speeds are
level (less than 10%) mismatch impedence. required contact NMC engineering.
• • Unexpected / unacceptable system vibration and or noise levels
690V Applications caused by the torque pulsation characteristics of the PWM waveform, a
Motors that are rated for 690VAC and that will be powered by 690VAC system critical frequency falling inside the variable speed range of the
PWM VFDs require the use of an external filter to limit peak voltage process or the added harmonic content of the PWM waveform exciting
spikes and the use of an INVERTER GRADE® motor. Where available, a system component
an alternative to using an output filter is to upgrade to a 2300V insulation • • Application related problems related to the controlled acceleration/
system. deceleration and torque of the motor on VFD power and the building of
system pressure/ load.
Low Voltage TITAN® Motors • • The impact the reduction of pump speed has on the down thrust
When using 449 frame and larger motors on PWM type VFDs consider reflected to the pump motor and any minimum thrust requirements of
the use of an external filter and shielded motor cables designed for PWM the motor bearings
power to minimize harmonic distortion and peak voltages at the motor • Water hammer during shutdown damaging the non-reversing ratchet
terminals. Harmonic distortion on the output waveform should be kept to
a minimum level (less than 10%).
Humidity and Non-operational Conditions
Bearing Currents Related to PWM Waveforms The possible build-up of condensation inside the motor due to storage in
Due to the uniqueness of this condition occurring in the field, protection of an uncontrolled environment or non-operational periods in an installation,
the motor bearings from shaft currents caused by common mode voltages can lead to an increased rate of premature winding or bearing failures
is not a standard feature on sine wave or Inverter Duty motor products, when combined with the stresses associated with PWM waveform
unless explicitly noted. Some installations may be prone to a voltage characteristics. Moisture and condensation in and on the motor winding
discharge condition through the motor bearings called Electrical Discharge over time can provide tracking paths to ground, lower the resistance of the
Machining (EDM) or fluting. motor winding to ground, and lower the Corona Inception Voltage (CIV)
level of the winding.
EDM damage is related to characteristics of the PWM waveform, and the
VFD programming, and installation factors. Proper storage and maintenance guidelines are important to minimize the
potential of premature failures. Space heaters or trickle voltage heating
Bearing EDM as a result of VFD waveform characteristics may be methods are the common methods for drying out a winding that has low
prevented by the installation of a shaft grounding device such as a brush resistance readings. Damage caused by these factors are not covered
or ring and/or correction of the installation characteristics causing the shaft by the limited warranty provided for the motor unless appropriate
voltage condition. Insulated bearing(s) may be required. VFD filters may be heating methods are properly utilized during non-operational periods
used if bearing fluting is to be mitigated. and prior to motor start-up.
Bearing Protection on Inverter Duty Vertical Motors NEMA®† Application Guide for AC Adjustable Speed Drive Systems:
All U.S. MOTORS® brand “Inverter Duty” vertical products have a shaft http://www.nema.org/stds/acadjustable.cfm#download
grounding system that allows damaging shaft currents a low resistance
path to ground. Bearings on vertical motors fed by VFD power without
this bearing protection are not covered under any warranty. All other
bearing failure is covered per NMC’s standard warranty. An electric motor
repair shop approved to service U.S. MOTORS® brand motors must verify
that the cause of the bearing failure was not due to EDM damage.
* This information applies only to Integral Horsepower (IHP) motors as defined on the Agency Approval page, under UL®† & CSA®† listings where indicated.
viii www.usmotors.com
Warranty Guidelines for Integral Horsepower
(IHP)* Motors on Variable Frequency Drives
Warranty Guidelines Cable distances are for reference only and can be further limited by
The information in the following section refers to the motor and drive hot and humid environments (refer to Table 1). Refer to specific VFD
application guidelines and limitations for warranty. manufacturers cable limits. Refer to the Motor/ Inverter Compatibility page
for special consideration of vertical motor bearings.
Hazardous Location Motors Table 1 - Cable Distances

Use of a variable frequency drive with the motors in this catalog, intended
Maximum Cable Distance VFD to Motor
for use in hazardous locations, is only approved for Division1, Class I,
Group D hazardous location motors with a T2B temperature code, with Switching Frequency 460 Volt 230 Volt 380 Volt
a limitation of 2:1 constant torque or 10:1 variable torque output. No
other stock hazardous location motors are inherently suitable for 3 Khz 127 ft 400 ft 218 ft
operation with a variable frequency drive. If other requirements are
needed, including non-listed Division 2, please contact your Nidec Motor 6 Khz 90 ft 307 ft 154 ft
Corporation territory manager to conduct an engineering inquiry.
9 Khz 73 ft 251 ft 126 ft
575 Volt Motors 12 Khz 64 ft 217 ft 109 ft

575 volt motors can be applied on Inverters when output filters are 15 Khz 57 ft 194 ft 98 ft
used. Contact the drive manufacturer for filter selection and installation
requirements. 20 Khz 49 ft 168 ft 85 ft
Applying INVERTER GRADE® Insulated Motors on

Warranty Period Clarifications and Exceptions
Variable Frequency Drives (2, 4, 6 pole)
Standard Energy Efficient Exclusion
The products within this catalog labeled “Inverter Duty” or “Vector Duty”
Applying Standard & Energy Efficient Motors on Variable Frequency Drives
are considered INVERTER GRADE® insulated motors. INVERTER
is not recommended. VFD related failures on standard and energy efficient
GRADE® motors exceed the NEMA®† MG-1 Part 31 standard.
motors will not be covered under warranty.
Nidec Motor Corporation provides a three-year limited warranty on all
NEMA®† frame INVERTER GRADE® insulated motors and allows long
Vertical Motor Windings
cable runs between the motor and the VFD (limited to 400 feet without
Premium efficient vertical motors without INVERTER GRADE® insulation
output filters). Cable distance can be further limited by hot and humid
that are installed using the criteria described in this document and applied in
environments and VFD manufacturers cable limits. These motors may be
the correct applications shall have a warranty while powered by a VFD for
appropriate for certain severe inverter applications or when the factors
12 months from date of installation or 18 months from date of manufacturing
relating to the end use application are undefined (such as spares).
whichever comes first. See limited warranty page for horizontal motor
warranty periods.
Nidec Motor Corporation’s U.S. Motors® brand is available in the following
INVERTER GRADE® insulated motors: Bearing Exclusion for Thrust Handling Bearings
Bearings used in premium efficienct vertical motors, and all thrust handling
• Inverter Duty NEMA®† frame motors good for 10:1 Variable Torque bearings, that are powered by VFDs without shaft grounding devices or
& 5:1 Constant Torque, including Vertical Type RUSI insulated bearings (when required) will not be covered under any warranty
for damages caused from being powered by a VFD. All other bearing failure
• Inverter Duty motors rated for 10:1 Constant Torque
is covered per NMC’s standard warranty. An electric motor repair shop
• ACCU-Torq® and Vector Duty Motors with full torque to 0 Speed approved to service U.S. MOTORS® brand motors must verify that the cause
of the bearing failure was not due to Electrical Discharge Machining.
• 841 Plus® NEMA®† Frame Motors
Medium Voltage and Slow Speed Considerations
Applying Premium Efficient motors (that do not have INVERTER Motors that are rated above 700 VAC or that are eight pole and slower
GRADE® insulation) on Variable Frequency Drives (2, 4, 6 pole) require special consideration and installation and are not covered under the
Premium efficient motors without INVERTER GRADE insulation meet warranty guidelines in this document. Motors that are rated above 700VAC
minimum NEMA®† MG-1, Section IV, Part 31.4.4.2. These motors can be have special cable length and voltage differential issues that are specific
used with Variable Frequency Drives (with a reduced warranty period) to the VFD type and manufacture. The motor construction and cost may
under the following parameters: vary dramatically depending on the VFD topology and construction. Contact
your NMC representative with VFD manufacturer name and model type for
• On NEMA®† frame motors, 10:1 speed rating on variable torque application and motor construction considerations. Motors that are designed
loads & 4:1 speed range on constant torque loads. eight pole and slower also require special installation and filters per the drive
manufacturer.
• On TITAN® frame motors, 10:1 speed rating on variable torque loads.
• On TITAN® frame motors, inquiry required for suitability on constant
torque loads.
* This information applies only to Integral Horsepower (IHP) motors as defined on the Agency Approval page, under UL®† & CSA®† listings where indicated.
www.usmotors.com ix
Section 7
Other Literature –Vibration Transmitter

ST5484E Seismic Velocity 4-20 mA Transmitter
Datasheet
OVERVIEW
The ST5484E is a self-contained seismic velocity transmitter
that incorporates a piezoelectric accelerometer, signal integra-
tor, RMS peak detector, and a 4-20 mA signal conditioner into a
single package. It can be mounted directly on a machine case or
bearing housing without intervening signal conditioning equip-
ment. The amplitude of the integrated acceleration (velocity)
signal is converted to a proportional 4-20 mA signal compat-
ible with industrial process control instrumentation such as Flying Leads 4-Pin Terminal Block
PLCs, DCSs, and SCADA systems that can provide trending and/ (Option D=0, 1, 5, or 6) (2-wire (Option D=3)
or alarming capabilities for a simplified vibration monitoring shown; 4-wire also available)
strategy.
When the flying lead or terminal block connector options are

chosen, the transmitter does not need a separate environmental
housing and can directly accept conduit. To reduce installed
cost, it can be used with barriers for intrinsically safe installa-
tions, or wired directly to explosion-proof conduit fittings for
explosionproof installations.
Need A Local Display? 2-Pin Terminal Block 2-Pin MIL Connector

(Option D=2) (Option D=4)
When continuous, local indication of
vibration levels is required at the trans-
mitter, the Metrix ST5491E provides
these capabilities. Its sensing and transmitter 1180
elements are similar to the ST5484E, but it
includes a convenient 2½ digit LCD display in
an integral conduit elbow and is rated for use
in temperatures from -10oC to +70oC. Refer to Why Measure Velocity?
Metrix datasheet 1004598 for ordering informa-
tion and detailed specifications. Acceleration and displacement levels are heavily influenced by
the frequencies at which the vibration is occurring, while veloc-
ity levels are much less influenced. Thus, although acceleration,
velocity, and displacement measurements are inter-related
APPLICATIONS mathematically, seismic velocity measurements tend to be more
consistent over a wide range of frequencies than either displace-
A vibration transmitter may be appropriate in applications where ment or acceleration. Consequently, broadband (sometimes
a stand-alone monitoring system may not be warranted. called “overall” or “unfiltered”) velocity measurements are
appropriate for monitoring many machines as a reliable indica-
The ST5484E handles general-purpose vibration measurements tor of damaging vibratory energy, with the notable exception
on a wide range of rotating and reciprocating machinery with of machines with fluid-film bearings, which are usually better
rotative speeds between 120- and 6,000-rpm. Seismic measure- addressed by shaft-observing proximity probes.
ments are suitable for machines with rolling-element bearings
because shaft vibration in such machines is usually transmitted Casing displacement is not a practical measurement to make
directly through the bearing to the bearing housing without directly and is typically just an integrated seismic velocity mea-
substantial damping or attenuation. Seismic transducers can also surement. As such, the primary decision when selecting a seis-
measure vibration that does not originate at the shaft, such as mic sensor will usually be whether to measure casing velocity
bearing-related wear and defects, footing/foundation problems, or casing acceleration. As noted above, casing velocity will often
piping resonances that are coupled to the machine, etc. be more appropriate because it tends to be a more reliable
indicator of damaging vibratory energy over a broad frequency
spectrum for low- to medium-speed machinery.
www.metrixvibration.com • info@metrixvibration.com • 281.940.1802

Doc# 1004457 • ST5484E • July 2017-Rev AE • Page 1 of 9
• RMS Amplitude Detection – Measures Root Mean Square
NOTE: For machines with fluid-film bearings, shaft- (RMS) vibration amplitude. Options available for True RMS
observing proximity probes will provide more effective
or scaled RMS (RMS x √2) for “derived peak”
vibration measurements than seismic transducers due
to the rotor dynamics of the machine and the attenuation • Numerous Full Scale Ranges – The full scale ranges provid-
of vibratory energy through a fluid-film boundary. Accord- ed in option AAA reflect frequently-ordered ranges; how-
ingly, Metrix recommends and provides proximity probes ever, many others (too numerous to list) are also available.
and associated 4-20 mA transmitters or monitoring systems Consult factory for applications requiring other full scale
for such applications. ranges
For machines with rolling element bearings and running Notes:

above 6,000 rpm, and/or where impulsive casing vibration 1. Dynamic raw acceleration signal available with 4-wire versions only
occurs, acceleration may be a better measurement. In such (ordering options D= 1 and D=3).
situations, it is recommended that you consult with
2. Metrix recommends flexible (rather than solid) conduit when pos-
a Metrix sales professional who can review your application
and assist with selection of the proper transducer type and sible. Solid conduit can introduce preload forces on the sensor and
associated transmitter or monitoring system. alter of the vibration response of the sensor.
SPECIFICATIONS
FEATURES All specifications are at +25°C (+77°F) and +24 VDC supply voltage
unless otherwise noted.
• RFI/EMI Immunity – Enhanced circuit design and installa-
tion techniques aggressively filter out noise from common Inputs
sources such as handheld radios
Supply Voltage 11 – 29.6 VDC (24 VDC nominal) (intrinsi-
• Excellent Moisture Resistance – The 2-pin MIL connec-
(see also note cally safe); 11 – 30 VDC (24 VDC nominal)
tor version is hermetically sealed to provide an IP67-rated
under max loop (explosion proof and non-incendive);
enclosure. Flying lead and terminal block versions are fully
resistance) Metrix patented IPT® independent polar-
potted and rated to IP66 when installed with optional IEC
ity diode bridge circuit allows voltage to
conduit elbow
be connected without regard to polarity
• Hazardous Area Approvals – North American (CSA), Brazil-
ian (INMETRO), and European (ATEX & IEC) approvals avail- Circuit-to-Case 500 Vrms
able Isolation
• Dynamic Signal Availability – 2-wire versions provide a 4-20 Outputs
mA velocity- proportional signal for easy connection to PLCs,
DCSs, and other plant control systems. Optional 4-wire ver- 4-20 mA Proportional to velocity full scale
sions1 also provide the raw acceleration signal (100 mV/g) range (4mA = 0 vibration,
for use with vibration data collectors and analyzers 20mA = full scale vibration)
• Variety of Connection Options – Flying leads, terminal Maximum 4- RL = 50 x (Vs – 11) W where Vs = Supply
block, and MIL-type connectors available 20 mA loop resis- Voltage at transmitter terminals.
• Conduit-Ready2 – Terminal block and flying lead options tance
have conduit threads on top of sensor. No special housings NOTE: For every 50 W of resistance in the
are required for connection of conduit 4-20 mA loop, 1 VDC above the minimum sup-
• Rugged, Industrial Design – Robust construction offers out- ply voltage (11 VDC) must be available at the
standing durability; built-in base and housing strain protec- transmitter terminals. For example, 12 VDC at
tion helps ensure that over-torqueing sensor-to- machine the transmitter terminals will allow a 50 Ω loop
and sensor-to-conduit connections won’t damage internals resistance; 30 VDC at the transmitter terminals
or body will allow a 950 Ω loop resistance. For intrinsi-
• High- and Low-Pass Filter Options – The ST5484E can be cally safe applications, the use of a passive
ordered with a wide variety of low- and high-pass filter zener barrier will incur a voltage drop of
options to precisely tailor the band over which vibration is approximately 8.1 volts at the barrier, and the
measured loop supply voltage is limited to 26 VDC. Thus,
• Polarity-Independent Wiring – Metrix patented IPT® tech- with passive barriers and a 26 VDC supply, the
nology allows loop power to be connected without regard maximum available voltage at the transmitter
to voltage polarity, reducing field wiring errors and ensuring will be 17.9 VDC and the corresponding maxi-
that the raw acceleration output1 is not phase inverted mum loop resistance will be 345 Ω.
• Multiple Mounting Options – Integral and removable
mounting stud options available in both metric and English Dynamic Signal 100 mV/g (10.2 mV / m/s2) acceleration,
thread sizes; flat base mounting adapters are also available filtered to same frequency band as pro-
• Loop-Powered – Runs on nominal 24 VDC power supplied by portional velocity (see ordering options E
the 4-20 mA current loop & F)
• Wide Supply Voltage Range – Accepts loop power voltages
from 11 to 29.6 VDC (intrinsically safe) or 30.0 VDC (explosion
proof & non-incendive)

Dynamic Signal 10 kΩ Physical
Output Operating -40°C to +100°C (-40°F to +212°F)
Impedance NOTES: Temperature
1. The dynamic signal output is short-circuit
protected by means of a 10 kΩ resistor, Weight 0.9 lbs (0.36 kg)
resulting in a relatively large output imped- Dimensions Refer to Figures 1 and 2 on page 8
ance. Many data collectors and analyzers have
relatively low input impedances (100 kΩ or Sensitive Axis Same as mounting stud axis
less) which will load this dynamic output and
attenuate the signal by 10% or more. Refer to Axis Orientation Any
Table 1 for the dB and percentage attenuation Enclosure • 303 stainless steel (standard)
for various load impedances. Material • 316L stainless steel (optional)
Enclosure Rating MIL-Style Connector (option D=4):
2. Because the ST5484E is a loop-powered
• IP67 and NEMA 4X
device with low operating power, the dynamic
signal output requires a buffer amplifier for ca- Flying Leads and Terminal Block Connec-
ble runs in excess of 16 feet (5 meters). Longer tors (option D≠4):
cable runs will also introduce distributed cable
capacitance that acts as a low-pass filter, attenu- • IP66 when used with the following con-
ating high- frequency signal content. In such duit elbows:
situations, consult the factory for assistance 8200-001-IEC, 8200-002-IEC, 8200-003-
selecting an appropriate low-capacitance cable. IEC, 8200-008-IEC, 8200-009-IEC
Recommended 500 kΩ
• No Rating* when used with the follow-
Minimum (see also note 1 above)
ing conduit elbows:
Load Imped-
8200-001, 8200-002, 8200-003, 8200-005,
ance (Zload) for
8200-006, 8200-008, 8200-009, 8200-010,
Dynamic Signal
8200-101, 8200-103, 8200-108
Connection
Signal Processing * NOTE: IP and NEMA ratings pending;
Frequency 2 Hz – 1500 Hz (standard) refer to table on page 6.
Response (+/- 2 Hz – 2000 Hz (optional) Connector Types • Flying Leads (2- and 4-wire)
3dB passband) • MIL-C-5015 (2-wire only)
• Terminal Block (2- and 4-wire)
Optional High- 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, or 200 Hz Humidity • 95%, non-condensing (flying lead and
Pass Filter Corner (must be specified at time of ordering) terminal block versions)
High-Pass Roll- 12 dB / octave • 100% condensing (MIL-style connector)
Off Approvals
Optional Low- 230, 250, 350, 450, 500, or 1000 Hz CE Mark • Yes
Pass Filter Corner (must be specified at time of ordering)
Hazardous • CSA
Low-pass Roll-Off 12 dB / octave Areas • ATEX
Accuracy ± 2.5% (within passband) • IECEx
± 4% (at corner frequencies) • INMETRO
• KOSHA
Maximum Full 5.0 in / sec (others by request) • Custom Union EAC
Scale
Recommended IS Barriers
Minimum Full 0.5 in / sec (others by request)
Scale Passive (Zener MTL 7787+ or equal
Full Scale Range • in / sec (standard) Type)
Units • mm / sec (available by request) Active (Zener MTL 7706 or equal
Amplitude True RMS detector; full scale may be or- Type)
Detection dered with True RMS units or scaled RMS Active MTL 5541 or equal
(RMS x √2) for “derived peak” measure- (Galvanic Type)
ments ST5484E Entity • Vmax: 29.6 VDC (intrinsically safe)
Parameters • Vmax: 30 VDC
See ordering option AAA. (explosion proof and non-incendive)
• Imax: 100 mA

ORDERING INFORMATION C Hazardous Area Certification3,4,5
A A A - B B C D -E F 0 No Hazardous Approval Area

ST5484E- - - 1 CSA US/C, Class I, Div 2, Grps A-D
(non-incendive)
AAA Full Scale Range1 2 CSA US/C, Class I, Div 1, Grps B-D
and Class II, Div 1, Grps E-G (explosion proof)
1 2 1 1.0 in/sec (25.4 mm/s) peak 2
3 ATEX, Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (intrinsically safe)

1 2 2 0.5 in/sec (12.7 mm/s) peak2
4 CSA US/C, Class I, Div 1, Grps A-D
1 2 3 2.0 in/sec (50.8 mm/s) peak2
(intrinsically safe)
1 2 4 5.0 in/sec (127 mm/s) peak2
5 INMETRO, Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (intrinsically safe)
1 2 6 0.8 in/sec (20.3 mm/s) peak2
6 INMETRO, Ex d IIC T4 Gb (explosion proof)
1 3 2 3.0 in/sec (76.2 mm/s) peak2
7 IECEx/KOSHA Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (intrinsically safe)
1 5 1 1.0 in/sec (25.4 mm/s) true RMS 16-AV4BO-0214X
1 5 2 0.5 in/sec (12.7 mm/s) true RMS 8 ATEX/IECEx/KOSHA Ex d IIC T4 Gb (explosion
1 5 3 2.0 in/sec (50.8 mm/s) true RMS proof)
16-AV4BO-0213X
1 5 4 5.0 in/sec (127 mm/s) true RMS
A EAC, Ex ia IIC T4 Ga, Ex d IIC T4 Gb
1 5 6 0.8 in/sec (20.3 mm/s) true RMS
B ATEX/EAC, Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (intrinsically safe)
1 6 2 3.0 in/sec (76.2 mm/s) true RMS
D Connection Type3
BB Housing Material & Stud Size1
0 24” Flying Leads, 2-wire;
00 303 SS housing, ¼” NPT stud (4-20 mA output only)
01 303 SS housing, ½” NPT stud 1 24” Flying Leads, 4-wire; (4-20 mA output
02 303 SS housing, ⅜ x 24 UNF – ½” stud and dynamic raw acceleration signal)
03 303 SS housing, ½ x 20 UNF – ½” stud 2 Terminal Block, 2-wire6; (4-20 mA output only)
04 303 SS housing, M8 x 1.0 – 12 stud 3 Terminal Block, 4-wire6; (4-20 mA output
and dynamic raw acceleration signal)
05 303 SS housing, M10 x 1.25 – 12 stud
4 2-Pin MIL-Style (MIL-C-5015);
06 303 SS housing, ¼ x 20 UNC – ½” stud (4-20 mA output only)
07 303 SS housing, ¼ x 28 UNF – ½” stud 5 72” Flying Leads, 2-wire;
08 303 SS housing, M8 x 1.25 – 12 stud (4-20 mA output only)
09 303 SS housing, ⅜ x 16 UNC – ½” stud 6 72” Flying Leads, 4-wire; (4-20 mA output
10 316 SS housing, ¼” NPT stud and dynamic raw acceleration signal)
11 316 SS housing, ½” NPT stud
12 316 SS housing, ⅜ x 24 UNF – ½” stud E High-Pass Filter
13 316 SS housing, ½ x 20 UNF – ½” stud 0 2 Hz (standard)
14 316 SS housing, M8 x 1.0 – 12 stud 1 5 Hz
16 316 SS housing, ¼ x 20 UNC – ½” stud 3 20 Hz
17 316 SS housing, ¼ x 28 UNF – ½” stud 4 50 Hz
19 316 SS housing, ⅜ x 16 UNC – ½” stud 6 200 Hz7
20 303 SS housing, ½ x 13 UNC – ½” stud X Custom (consult factory)7
30 316 SS housing, ½ x 13 UNC – ½” stud
F Low-Pass Filter
0 1500 Hz (standard)
1 500 Hz
2 1000 Hz

3 2000 Hz Table 2 – Allowable Combinations for A & BB Options
4 250 Hz7 Full Scale Range AAA = Allowable BB options
5 230 Hz 7 (Mounting Stud Sizes)
6 350 Hz7 121, 122, 123, 126, 151, 152, All (no restrictions)
153, 156
7 450 Hz
124 and 154 00, 01, 03, 10, 11, 13
X Custom (consult factory)7
132 and 162 00, 01, 02, 03, 05, 09, 10, 11,
12, 13, 15, 19
NOTES:
1. Smaller-diameter mounting studs are not able to withstand sus- Table 3 – Allowable Combinations for C & D Options
tained ambient vibration levels above 2.0 in/sec. Consult Table 2 C A
for allowable combinations of A and B options. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B
D Ex ia Ex d
2. The ST5484E uses an RMS amplitude detection circuit. Full scale
ranges in peak units use scaled RMS (i.e., RMS x √2). The “derived 0 Y Y Y N N N Y N Y N Y N
peak” measurements will equal true peak only under the special 1 Y Y Y N N N Y N Y N Y N
case of a pure sinusoid, not complex vibration signals.
2 Y Y N Y Y Y N Y N Y N Y
3. Hazardous Area Certifications are not compatible with all connec-
tion types. Consult Table 3 for allowable combinations of C & D 3 Y Y N Y Y Y N Y N Y N Y
options. 4 Y Y N Y Y Y N Y N Y N Y
4. Some approvals require intrinsic safety barriers, others require
Explosion-Proof wiring practices. Refer to Table 4. 5 Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N
5. ATEX/IECEx/INMETRO Ex d (flameproof) approvals (ordering option 6 Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N
C=8 or C=6) require conduit elbow 8200-AAA-IEC, sold separately.
6. It may be difficult to connect wires to terminal blocks with the
Table 4 –
optional 8200 conduit elbow attached. It is suggested that wires
Approvals and corresponding wiring requirements
be routed through conduit elbow, then landed on terminals, and
then conduit elbow secured. Use of union adapter 8201 may be
Wiring Required
Explosion-Proof
XP Wiring Not
required. Refer to the Accessories section of this document.
I.S Barriers or
I.S. Barriers
7. High- and Low-Pass filter corners for standard filters must be
C Agency Approved Areas
Required
Required
separated by at least one octave (low-pass frequency must be at
least twice the high-pass frequency). All combinations are allowed
except E = 6 and F = 4, 5, or 6. Custom filters with closer separa-
tion and/or different roll-offs may be available in some instances.
Consult the factory if custom filters are required. 1 CSA US/C Class I, Div 2,Groups A-D
●
(non-incendive)
2 CSA US/C Class I, Div 1, Groups
Table 1 – B-D; Class II, Div 1,
●
Attenuation of Dynamic Signal versus Load Impedance (Zload) Groups E-G
(explosion proof)
Data Collector / Dynamic Signal Dynamic Signal
Analyzer Load Voltage Voltage 3 ATEX Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
●
Impedance (Zload) Attenuation (dB) Attenuation (%) (intrinsically safe)
10 MΩ 0.01 dB 0.1% 4 CSA Class I, Div 1, Groups

●
A-D (intrinsically safe)
5 MΩ 0.02 dB 0.2%
5 INMETRO Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
2 MΩ 0.04 dB 0.5% ●
1 MΩ 0.09 dB 1% 6 INMETRO Ex d IIC T4 Gb
●
500 kΩ 0.18 dB 2% (explosion proof)
200 kΩ 0.43 dB 5% 7 IECEx / Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
●
KOSHA (intrinsically safe)
100 kΩ 0.84 dB 9%
8 ATEX / Ex d IIC T4 Gb
50 kΩ 1.61 dB 17% IECEx / (explosion proof) ●
20 kΩ 3.57 dB 33% KOSHA
10 kΩ 6.10 dB 50% A EAC Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
● ●
Ex d IIC T4 Gb
(explosion proof)
B ATEX/ Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
●
EAC (intrinsically safe)
ACCESSORIES - ELBOWS
Conduit elbows are used with flying lead and terminal block ver-
sions of the ST5484E transmitter. They are not compatible with
MIL-connector versions of the transmitter. A variety of available
configurations accommodate English and metric conduit thread
sizes, hazardous area approvals, materials of construction, and
IP ratings. Most may also be purchased with or without terminal
blocks under the cap. Note that not all configurations are avail-
able with hazardous area approvals or IP ratings. Consult the Stainless steel elbows Copper-free aluminum elbows
ordering information below. (models AAA=005 and 006 only) (all models except
AAA=005 and 006)
AAA-B
8200- -
ELBOWS
A A A B2,5 Conduit Fitting Terminal Coating Approvals IP Rating Material
Size Block (Elbow)
0 0 1 ¾” NPT No Powder CSA/UL1 NEMA4 Copper-free aluminum
0 0 1 IEC ¾” NPT No Powder ATEX/IECEx 3,4
IP66 Copper-free aluminum
0 0 2 ½” NPT 4-position Powder CSA/UL 1
NEMA4 Copper-free aluminum
0 0 2 IEC ½” NPT 4-position Powder ATEX/IECEx 3,4
0 0 3 ½” NPT No Powder CSA/UL1 NEMA4 Copper-free aluminum
0 0 3 IEC ½” NPT No Powder ATEX/IECEx 3,4
0 0 5 ½” NPT No None None None 303 stainless steel
0 0 6 ½” NPT 4-position None None None 303 stainless steel
0 0 8 M20 x 1.5 metric No Powder CSA/UL 1
0 0 8 IEC M20 x 1.5 metric No Powder ATEX/IECEx 3,4
0 0 9 M20 x 1.5 metric 4-position Powder CSA/UL 1
0 0 9 IEC M20 x 1.5 metric 4-position Powder ATEX/IECEx 3,4
0 1 0 ¾” NPT 4-position Powder CSA/UL1 NEMA4 Copper-free aluminum
1 0 1 ¾” NPT No Powder + clear epoxy CSA/UL 1
1 0 3 ½” NPT No Powder + clear epoxy CSA/UL 1
1 0 8 M20 x 1.5 metric No Powder + clear epoxy CSA/UL 1
NOTES:
1. CSA approved through manufacturer (not Metrix) for the following areas:
Class I, Div. 1 (Grps C & D) UL approved through manufacturer (not Metrix) for
Class II, Div. 1 (Grps E, F & G) the following areas:
Class III Class I; Div. 1 (Grps. B, C, D)
2. B=IEC is only available for AAA=001, 002, 003, 008, and 009 at this time Class II; Div. 1 (Grps. E, F, G)
3. ATEX approved through manufacturer (not Metrix), (B=IEC)
ITS09ATEX16417U
Ex II2G, Ex d IIC
CML 16ATEX1325X
Ex II2GD, Ex db IIB Gb, Ex tb IIIC Db IP65 minimum
4. IECEx approved through manufacturer (not Metrix)
IECExITS09.0024U
Ex d IIC
IECEx QPS 16.0012X
Ex db IIB Gb, Ex tb IIIC IP66
5. Elbow 8200-AAA-IEC is required for ST5484E installations meeting
ATEX/IECEx/INMETRO/KOSHA/EAC Ex d (flameproof) hazardous area certifications

ACCESSORIES - CABLES
Part Number Description

8978-111-XXXX 2-pin MIL Splash-Proof (IP66) Cable Assembly
Used with 2-pin MIL style connector. Cable-to-sensor connection made by
means of tight friction fit between cable molded boot and sensor - does not
use threads. Connector is fully potted to provide IP66 seal against moisture
NOTE: Dielectric grease ingression. 6.4mm (0.25”) diameter polyurethane jacketed cable encapsulates
must be applied on the a single twisted pair of conductors and shield.
rubber boot connector
to prevent moisture XXX.X = cable length in meters (example: 0035= 3.5 m)
ingression. Min. cable length: 0.5m (XXXX=0005)
Max. cable length: 999.5m (XXXX=9995)
Note: Must be ordered in increments of 0.5m
8978-211-XXXX 2-pin MIL Cable Assembly
Similar to 8978-111 but without splash-proof boot and without IP66 rating;
identical constraints on XXXX ordering options.
8978-200-0000 2-pin MIL Connector Assembly
Similar to 8978-211 but without cable (connector can be disassembled for
field installation of cable)
8978-311-XXXX 2-pin MIL Submersible (IP67) Cable Assembly
Similar to 8978-111 but uses overmolded screw-type connector for IP67
rating. 4.9mm (0.19”) diameter polyurethane jacketed cable encapsulates a
single twisted pair of 20 AWG conductors and shield. Gold plated contacts,
Stainless steel 316L Nut.
XXX.X = cable length in meters (example: 0050= 5.0 m)

NOTE: only 5m, 10m, and 20m lengths available at this time. 5m length stock std;
other length may incur longer lead times.
9334-111-XXXX-YYYY 2-pin MIL Splash-Proof (IP66) Cable Assembly With Armor
Used with 2-pin MIL-style connector. Connector is fully potted
and provided with integral molded boot to provide IP66 seal against moisture
ingression. 7.1mm (0.28”) diameter 304 stainless steel armor encapsulates a
single twisted pair of conductors and shield.
9334-211-XXXX-YYYY 2-pin MIL Armored Cable Assembly

Similar to 9334-111 but without splash-proof boot and without IP66 rating;
identical constraints on XXXX and YYYY ordering options.
NOTE: Dielectric grease
must be applied on the XXX.X = armor length in meters (example: 0035= 3.5 m)
rubber boot connector Min. armor length: 0.5m Max. armor length: 60m
to prevent moisture Must be ordered in 0.5m increments
ingression.
YYY.Y = cable length in meters
Min. cable length: 1.0 Max: 999.5m Must be ordered in 0.5 m increments;
NOTE: cable length must exceed armor length by at least 0.5 m.
8169-75-002-XXX 2-wire Cable Assembly
Designed for installations where conduit will not be used to protect field wir-
ing. Fitting mates directly to all 8200 elbows with ¾” NPT reducers. Cable is
2-conductor (20 AWG) twisted, shielded pair in PVC jacket. Cable grip includ-
ed for strain relief.
Material: zinc-plated steel
XXX= length in feet (example: 010=10 feet)

Min. cable length: 1 foot (001) Max. cable length: 999 feet (999)

8201-001 Conduit Union
Fits between ST5484E and 8200 conduit elbow when there is not enough
room to rotate the elbow. Suitable for Class I, Div 1 (Grps A,B,C,D) and Class II,
Div 1 (Grps E,F,G) hazardous areas.
Material: zinc-plated steel
7084-001 Flange Mount Adapter
Adapts ½” NPT mounting stud on ST5484E to 3-hole flat-base pattern. Hole
pattern is three equally spaced 0.26” diameter holes on 1.5” diameter circle.
Adapter is 2” diameter x 0.75” thick. Material: 303 stainless steel
Same as 7084-001 except center hole adapts ¼” NPT stud on the 5484E.
Same as 7084-001 except center hole adapts ⅜ x 24 UNF stud on the 5484E.
8253-002 ½” NPT to ¼” NPT Reducer Bushing
Adapts ¼” NPT stud on ST5484E (B=0) to ½” NPT mounting hole.
Material: 303 stainless steel
93818-004 Cable Grip Strain Relief Fitting
Used primarily with 8978 cable assemblies where cable enters junction box.
¾” NPT male thread to cable grip. Fits cable diameters from 0.156” to 0.25”.
Complete with sealing ring and locknut. Hot dip / mechanically galvanized fin-
ish. Suitable for NEMA 4 junction boxes.
93818-018 Cable Grip Strain Relief Fitting
Similar to 93818-004, but fits larger cable diameters from 0.4”
to 0.5”, such as customer-supplied cables used with terminal block versions of
ST5484E (D = 2 or 3).
OUTLINE DIAGRAMS
Figure 1: Outline dimensions of the ST5484E (all versions except MIL-Style Figure 2: Outline dimensions of the
Connector). Dimensions in mm [inches]. Optional* 8200-001 conduit ST5484E-XXX-XX4-XX (MIL-Style Connec-
elbow shown installed. tor). Dimensions in mm [inches].
* NOTE: 8200-AAA-IEC elbow is mandatory for ATEX/IECEx/INMETRO/KOSHA/EAC

Ex d (flameproof) approved installations.

WIRING CONNECTIONS
Table 5 – Wiring Connection Legend

Connector Type Dynamic Signal Connections Power Connections
MIL-C-5015 Not Available 24 VDC power may be connected to all ST5484E models without regard
2-wire flying leads Not Available to polarity. Sensor uses IPT® independent polarity diode bridge circuit
that will always orient voltage correctly inside sensor, regardless of
2-wire terminal block Not Available polarity externally.
4-wire flying leads Red: Power +
Blue: Power -
White: Dynamic Signal - NOTE: Although the ST5484E allows polarity in either direction, installations
Black: Dynamic Signal + using I.S. barriers will need to observe correct polarity at the barrier input side.
However, the barrier output side (i.e., sensor connection) may be wired without
4-wire terminal block regard to polarity.
NOTE:
+ AND – SYMBOLS
ARE NOT ON LABEL
Figure 3: Typical installation for a single

ST5484E seismic vibration transmitter.
Figure 4: Typical installation for multiple

ST5484E seismic vibration transmitters.
ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION
Description Metrix Document Number

Manual M9162
Installation Drawing – Hazardous Area with I.S. Barriers (CSA) 9426
Installation Drawing – Hazardous Area with I.S. Barriers (CENELEC) 9278
Installation Drawing – Div 2 / Zone 2 1086105
Trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.

Data and specifications subject to change without notice.
© 2014 Metrix Instrument Co., L.P.

Section 7
Other Literature –Pressure Switch

J6 Series
J6 Seri es
Pressure and Vacuum switches
features
• Gasketed, Die Cast Aluminum
Enclosure with Epoxy Coating
• SPDT Switch Output
• Adjustable Deadband Option
• Sealed, Isolated Metal Bellows
Sensors
• Adjustable Pressure Ranges:
30 ”Hg Vac to 6000 psi
(-1 to 414 bar)
UNITED ELECTRIC J 6 - B - 0 5
CONTROLS
J6 Seri es J6 S e r i e s
overview features
The UE J6 is a reliable, sensitive pressure switch, originally designed for • UL listed and cUL certified
instrument air applications in process plants. Its compact design and
combination of set-point sensitivity and narrow or optional adjustable • Optional ATEX or GOST intrinsic
deadband, offers cost-saving solutions for a variety of applications. safety compliance
The J6 is ideally suited for a wide range of industrial processes such as

• Designed to meet Enclosure
alarm/shutdown and low/high service pressures. OEMs also utilize the
Type 4X
J6 in machinery and equipment for threshold protection.
• SPDT switch output
• Adjustable deadband option for

precise on-off control
• Brass or welded stainless steel

bellows sensors
• External manual reset option
2 w w w . u e o n l i n e . c o m J 6 - B - 0 5
J6 Series
specifications
Storage temperature -65° to 160°F (-54 to 71°C)
Ambient TEMPERATURE -40° to 160°F (-40 to 71°C); set point typically shifts less than 1% of range for a 50°F
limits (28°C) ambient temperature change
Set point repeatability Models S126B-S164B, 126-364, 680: ± 1% of adjustable range; models 610-614: ± 1.5%
of adjustable range
Shock Set point repeats after 15 G, 10 millisecond duration
Vibration Set point repeats after 2.5 G, 5-500 Hz
Enclosure Die cast aluminum, epoxy powder coated, gasketed; captive cover screws
Enclosure classification Designed to meet Enclosure Type 4X requirements
Switch output One SPDT; switch may be wired “normally open” or “normally closed"
Electrical rating 15 A 125/250/480 VAC resistive. Electrical switches have limited DC capabilities.
Consult factory for additional information.
Weight Approx. 1 lb., 8 oz. (0.68 kg.)
Electrical connection 1/2” NPT (female)
Pressure connection All models 1/4” NPT (female) except models S126B-S164B: 1/2” NPT (female)
approvals
United States and Canada Russia
UL Listed, Gosgortechnadzor Permit (OPTIONAL - Code M406)
UL 508, file #E42272 OExia IIC T6
cUL Certified Tamb. = -50°C to +60°C
CSA C22.2 No. 14, file #42272 NANIO CCVE Certification Center
Certificate ROSS US.GB05.Bo2933
European Union
GOST R 51330.0, 51330.1, 51330.10 & 51330.14
ATEX Directive (94/9/EC)
II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6 (Optional - Code M405)
Tamb = -50°C to +60°C
UL International DEMKO A/S (N.B.# 0539)
Certificate #DEMKO 03 ATEX 0335063
EN 50014, 50020 & 50284
Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (73/23/EC & 93/68/EEC)
Compliant to LVD
Products rated lower than 50 VAC and 75 VDC are outside of the scope
of the LVD
The Low Voltage Directive does not apply to products for use in hazardous
locations
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC)
Compliant to PED
Products rated below 7.5 psi are outside the scope of PED
J 6 - B - 0 5 w w w . u e o n l i n e . c o m 3
pressure model chart

Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof
Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure**
High end of range on rise
psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar
(unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted)
Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/2” NPT (female) pressure connection
S126B 30 ”Hg Vac to 0 psi -1 to 0 0.2 to 0.8 ”Hg 6,8 to 27,1 mbar 3 0,2 5 0,3
S134B 30 ”Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 0.8 ”Hg 6,8 to 27,1 mbar 20 1,4 25 1,7
S136B 0 to 50” wc 0 to 124,5 mbar 3 to 6 ”wc 7,5 to 14,9 mbar 50 “wc 124,5 mbar 5 0,3
S142B 0 to 18 0 to 1,2 4 to 7 ”wc 10 to 17,4 mbar 18 1,2 25 1,7
S148B 0 to 40 0 to 2,8 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 mbar 40 2,8 40 2,8
S152B 0 to 50 0 to 3,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 50 3,4 75 5,2
S156B 3 to 100 0,2 to 6,9 0.2 to 0.8 13,8 to 55,2 mbar 100 6,9 125 8,6
S160B 50 to 180 3,4 to 12,4 0.3 to 1 20,7 to 68,9 mbar 180 12,4 180 12,4
S164B 0 to 200 0 to 13,8 0.3 to 2 20,7 to 137,9 mbar 200 13,8 200 13,8
Welded 316L stainless steel bellows and 1/4” NPT (female) pressure connection (Model 680 not recommended for rapid or high cycling
pressure changes)
354 0 to 50 0 to 3,4 1.5 to 2.5 0,1 to 0,2 50 3,4 75 5,2

356 0 to 100 0 to 6,9 2 to 4 0,1 to 0,3 100 6,9 150 10,3
358 0 to 200 0 to 13,8 3 to 5 0,2 to 0,3 200 13,8 250 17,2
360 0 to 250 0 to 17,2 3 to 5 0,2 to 0,3 250 17,2 330 22,8
362 0 to 350 0 to 24,1 2 to 8 0,1 to 0,6 350 24,1 430 29,6
364 0 to 500 0 to 34,5 3 to 9 0,2 to 0,62 500 34,5 575 39,6
680 100 to 1700 6,9 to 117,2 9 to 23 0,6 to 1,6 1700 117,2 2500 172,4
303 stainless steel piston with Buna N O-ring and 303 stainless steel 1/4” NPT (female) pressure connection (not recommended for gas
service since drying of the O-ring can allow bleeding of the medium into the atmosphere)
610 75 to 1000 5,2 to 68,9 30 to 150 2,1 to 10,3 1000 68,9 10,000 689,5
612 125 to 3000 8,6 to 206,8 40 to 250 2,8 to 17,2 3000 206,8 10,000 689,5
614 500 to 6000 34,5 to 413,7 50 to 400 3,4 to 27,6 6000 413,7 10,000 689,5
* Over Range Pressure: The maximum pressure that may be applied continuously without causing damage and maintaining set point repeatability.
** Proof Pressure: The maximum pressure to which a pressure sensor may be occasionally subjected, which causes no permanent damage. The unit may require calibration (e.g., start-up, testing).
J6 Series
Model Adjustable Set Point Range Deadband Over Range Proof

Low end of range on fall; Pressure* Pressure**
High end of range on rise
psi bar psi bar psi bar psi bar
(unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted) (unless noted)
Brass bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4” NPT (female) pressure connection†; Models 126 and 134 have zinc-plated steel spring exposed to
media
126 30 ”Hg Vac to 0 psi -1 to 0 0.2 to 0.8 ”Hg 6,8 to 27,1 mbar 3 0,2 5 0,3
134 30 ”Hg Vac to 20 psi -1 to 1,4 0.2 to 0.8 ”Hg 6,8 to 27,1 mbar 20 1,4 25 1,7
136 0 to 50” wc 0 to 124,5 mbar 3 to 6 ”wc 7,5 to 14,9 mbar 50 “wc 124,5 mbar 5 0,3
142 0 to 18 0 to 1,2 4 to 7 ”wc 10 to 17,4 mbar 18 1,2 25 1,7
148 0 to 40 0 to 2,8 0.1 to 0.4 6,9 to 27,6 mbar 40 2,8 40 2,8
152 0 to 50 0 to 3,4 0.1 to 0.5 6,9 to 34,5 mbar 50 3,4 75 5,2
156 3 to 100 0,2 to 6,9 0.2 to 0.8 13,8 to 55,2 mbar 100 6,9 125 8,6
160 50 to 180 3,4 to 12,4 0.3 to 1 20,7 to 68,9 mbar 180 12,4 180 12,4
Phosphor bronze bellows with nickel-plated brass 1/4” NPT (female) pressure connection; Model 218 has 300 series stainless steel spring exposed
to media
218 30 ”Hg Vac to 0 psi -1 to 0 1 to 2 ”Hg 33,9 to 67,7 mbar 0 0 30 2,1

222 0 to 20 0 to 1,4 0.5 to 1 34,5 to 68,9 mbar 20 1,4 30 2,1
224 0 to 30 0 to 2,1 0.5 to 1 34,5 to 68,9 mbar 30 2,1 45 3,1
226 0 to 50 0 to 3,4 0.7 to 1.3 48,3 to 89,6 mbar 50 3,4 75 5,2
230 0 to 100 0 to 6,9 1 to 2 68,9 mbar to 0,1 bar 100 6,9 110 7,6
258 0 to 50 0 to 3,4 1.5 to 2.5 0,1 to 0,2 50 3,4 75 5,2
266 0 to 100 0 to 6,9 2 to 5 0,1 to 0,3 100 6,9 150 10,3
270 0 to 200 0 to 13,8 3 to 5 0,2 to 0,3 200 13,8 250 17,2
272 0 to 250 0 to 17,2 3 to 5 0,2 to 0,3 250 17,2 330 22,8
274 0 to 300 0 to 20,7 4 to 6 0,3 to 0,4 300 20,7 350 24,1
†Several of these models were previously offered with adjustable deadband as J6D. Specify option code 1520 if adjustable deadband is required.
how to order
Building a part number
Select a Type Select a Model Select an Option
Refer to the “Type” section below. Refer to the “Model Charts”. Refer to the “Options” section.
Determine type number based on Determine model based on adjustable Determine option number based on
switch output, enclosure, adjustment range, deadband and proof pressure. switch output, optional materials or
and reference. other product enhancements.
Fill in the model portion of your part
Fill in the type portion of your part number with the corresponding number. Fill in the option portion of your part
number with the corresponding number. number with the corresponding number.
Leave “option” portion blank if no
options are needed. For multiple
options: Call United Electric Controls.
type DESCRIPTION
Pressure Type J6 - One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference dial
switch Options*
0140 Gold contacts, 1 A 125 VAC resistive
0500 Close deadband, 5 A 125/250 VAC resistive
1070 10 A 125 VDC resistive; deadband and minimum set point will increase
1520 Adjustable deadband, 15 A 125/250/277 VAC resistive. Adjustment wheel changes rise setting only - if
adjustment on fall setting is required, use primary adjustment. Not available on models 258-274,
354-364, 610-614, 680. note: Must select this option for models previously listed as J6D.
1530 External manual reset, 15 A125/250/480 VAC resistive, latches on rising pressure only
2000 20 A 125/250 VAC resistive
sensor and other Options

M201 Factory set one switch; specify increasing or decreasing pressure and set point
M277 Range indicated on nameplate in kPa or MPa factory selected
M278 Range indicated on nameplate in Kg/cm2
M405 Intrinsic safety compliance for European Union per ATEX standards, NOT AVAILABLE ON MODEL S164B
M406 Instrinsic safety compliance for Russia per Gosgortechnadzor standards
M444 Paper ID tag
M446 Stainless steel ID tag & wire attachment
M540 Viton® construction (deadbands and low end of range may increase); wetted parts include Viton®
O-ring and standard connection material. Available on models 610-614 ONLY
M550 Oxygen service cleaning; alcohol cleaning to remove residue from the process connection
M913 1/4" NPT (female) 316L stainless steel pressure connection. AVAILABLE MODELS S126B-S164B
M914 1/2" NPT (female) 316L stainless steel pressure connection. AVAILABLE MODELS 354-364
* All switches have limited DC capabilities. Consult factory for details.

Viton® is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont
J6 Series
dimensional drawings
Dimensional drawings for all models may be found at www.ueonline.com
Internal Set Point Adjustment Dimension A

Models Inches mm NPT
Types J6
126-160 5.06 128.5 1/4
S126B-S164B 5.47 138.9 1/2
218-230 4.31 109.5 1/4
258-274 4.75 120.7 1/4
354-364 4.78 121.4 1/4
610-614 5.72 145.3 1/4
680 4.97 126.2 1/4
All dimensions stated in inches (millimeters)
Pressure Sensors
Models 218-230 Models 126-160 Models S126B-S164B
Models 610-614 Models 258-274 Models 354-364, 680
RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND WARNINGS U.S. Sales Offices International Offices
United Electric Controls Company recommends careful consideration United Electric Controls CHINA
of the following factors when specifying and installing UE pressure 31 Old Stage Road United Electric Controls, Shanghai Office
and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation Hampton Falls, NH 03844 Room 1011, 10th Flr,
and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and Phone: 617-899-1132 Huai Hai Zhonghua Building
understood. email: northeastsales@ueonline.com No. 885, Renmin Road, Luwan District
• To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature Shanghai 200010, P.R. China
limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be United Electric Controls
28 N. Wise Ave. Phone: +8621-6255 8059
exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to email: chinasales@ueonline.com
maximum pressure or temperature is acceptable on a limited basis Freeport, IL 61032
(e.g., start-up, testing) but continuous operation must be restricted Phone: 815-341-2588
email: midwestsales@ueonline.com
United Electric Controls, Beijing Office
to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at maximum Room 1006, Jainhao International Bldg.
pressure or temperature limits could reduce sensor life. United Electric Controls Block D, No. 116
• A back-up unit is necessary for applications where damage to 1022 Vineyard Drive Zizhuyuanlu, Haidian District
a primary unit could endanger life, limb or property. A high or Conyers, GA 30013 Beijing, China 100089
low limit switch is necessary for applications where a dangerous Phone: 770-335-9802 Phone & Fax: +86-10-5893-0551
runaway condition could result. email: southeastsales@ueonline.com email: beijingsales@ueonline.com
• The adjustable range must be selected so that incorrect,
inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point cannot result United Electric Controls EASTERN EUROPE & SCANDINAVIA
in an unsafe system condition. 5829 Grazing Court
United Electric Controls
• Install unit where shock, vibration and ambient temperature Mason, OH 45040
05-806 Komorow
fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. When Phone: 513-535-5486
email: midatlanticsales@ueonline.com
Kujawska 5, Poland
applicable, orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure Phone: +48 22 499 4804
via the electrical connection. When appropriate, this entry point United Electric Controls email: easterneuropesales@ueonline.com
should be sealed to prevent moisture entry. 102 Salazar Court
• Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consult UE if GERMANY
Clayton, CA 94517
modification is necessary. United Electric Controls
Phone: 925-408-5997
• Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage email: westcoastsales@ueonline.com
An Der Zentlinde 21
to unit, such as drift in set point or faulty display. Check unit D-64711 Erbach, Germany
immediately. United Electric Controls Phone: 496-062-7400
• Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for 27 Summit Terrace email: europeansales@ueonline.com
critical applications where damage could endanger property or Sparta, NJ 07871
INDIA
personnel. Phone: 973-271-2550
email: easternsales@ueonline.com
United Electric Controls
• Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not 402, Aries Avenue-I, 58-United Colony
be exceeded. Overload on a switch can cause damage, even on United Electric Controls Sama, Baroda - 390008, India
the first cycle. Wire unit according to local and national electrical 4306 Whickham Drive Phone: +91-265-2788654
codes, using wire size recommended in installation sheet. Fulshear, TX 77441 email: indiasales@ueonline.com
• Do not mount unit in ambient temp. exceeding published limits. Phone: 832-457-6138
ASIA-PACIFIC
LIMITED WARRANTY email: southwestsales@ueonline.com
United Electric Controls, Far East
Seller warrants that the product hereby purchased is, upon delivery, No. 1-2-2, 2nd Floor
free from defects in material and workmanship and that any Jalan 4/101C
such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship Cheras Business Centre
or material will be repaired or replaced by Seller (Ex-works, Factory, Batu 5, Jalan Cheras
Watertown, Massachusetts. INCOTERMS); provided, however, that this 56100 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
warranty applies only to equipment found to be so defective within Phone: 603-9133-4122
a period of 24 months from the date of manufacture by the Seller. CANADA email: fareastsales@ueonline.com
Seller shall not be obligated under this warranty for alleged defects
which examination discloses are due to tampering, misuse, neglect, EASTERN MEXICO
improper storage, and in any case where products are disassembled 68 Mosley Crescent United Electric Controls
by anyone other than authorized Seller’s representatives. EXCEPT FOR Brampton, Ontario Zacatecas #206 Suite 20
THE LIMITED WARRANTY OF REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT STATED Canada L6Y 5C8 Col Guadalupe CP 89120
ABOVE, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WITH Phone: 905-455-5131 Tampico, Tamaulipas Mexico
RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FAX: 905-455-5131 Phone: 52 (833) 2175201
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. email: latinamericasales@ueonline.com
Limitation OF Seller’s Liability RUSSIA
Seller’s liability to Buyer for any loss or claim, including United Electric Controls, Moscow
liability incurred in connection with (i) breach of any Elninskaya str., 15-140
warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied, (ii) a breach Moscow, 121552, Russia
of contract, (iii) a negligent act or acts (or negligent Phone: +7 (495) 792-88-06
failure to act) committed by Seller, or (iv) an act for which email: russiansales@ueonline.com
strict liability will be inputted to seller, is limited to the
“limited warranty” of repair and/or replacement as so
stated in our warranty of product. In no event shall the UNITED ELECTRIC
Seller be liable for any special, indirect, consequential
or other damages of a like general nature, including, CONTROLS
without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or 180 Dexter Avenue, P.O. Box 9143
expenses of any nature incurred by the buyer or any third Watertown, MA 02471-9143 USA
party.
Telephone: 617 926-1000 Fax: 617 926-2568
UE specifications subject to change without notice. http://www.ueonline.com
CP05102000
Be sure to visit www.ueonline.com for the latest information.
Section 7
Other Literature –Temperature Transmitter

Section 7
Other Literature –Float Valve

GALLONS-PER-MINUTE FLOW RATE AND PRESSURE DROP
ACROSS GADE ANGLE TYPE FLOAT-ACTIVATED VALVE SEAT
1
TO ORDER OUTSIDE NEW JERSEY CALL:
1 (800) 822-4233
2
IN NEW JERSEY CALL: 3 1/2
"-3
1 (856) 456-4329 • FAX 1 (856) 456-2238 /4"
"
4 VA
E-mail: gadreninfo@comcast.net LV
E
6 1"
VA
LV
E
ALL VALVES IN STOCK. 8
IF YOU NEED A SPECIAL VALVE, CALL US. 10 1-1

/4"
V 1/2
AL "P
VALVES CUSTOM-MADE FOR OEM USERS. VE I PE
1-1
20 /2"
V AL 3/4
VE "P
30 I PE
2"
VA
GALLONS-PER-MINUTE FLOW RATE

40 LV
E
1"
60 PIP
E
80 1-1
/4"
3" P IPE
100 VA
LV
E
1-1
LIMITED WARRANTY /2"
P IPE
Gadren Machine Company warrants the products described in this catalog to be free from defects in material and workmanship
200
to the original purchaser, under normal service and use. Sole obligation under this warranty shall be limited to repairing or
replacing, without charge, any part manufactured proven to have been defective at the time of shipment. Purchaser must give 2"
immediate notice of defect. This warranty shall not apply to (A) any product altered or repaired by others, (B) any product that 300 PI P
E
has been subjected to abuse, negligence, accident or misapplication.
400
This warranty is exclusive and is in lieu of any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or other
warranty of quality, whether expressed or implied. 600
800
3"
PI P
1000 E
VALVE DIVISION
Gadren Machine Company
-- Since 1940 --
MAILING ADDRESS:
Post Office Box 117 • Mt. Ephraim, New Jersey 08059
MANUFACTURING PLANT:
108 Main Street, West Collingswood Heights, New Jersey
www.gadrenmachine.com
.1 .2 .3 .4 .6 .8 1.0 2. 3. 4. 6. 8. 10. 20. 30. 40. 60. 80. 100.
PRESS. DROP LBS. PER SQUARE INCH
Section 7
Other Literature –Pressure Gauge

LF Series Quality Pressure Gauge Page 1 of 2
LF Series Quality
Features:
l 1 1/2” (40mm), 2 1/2” (63mm), and 4” (100mm) dials with

black and red markings
l 304 stainless steel case
l Liquid filled or dry
l Brass internals or stainless steel internals
l 1/8”,1/4”, 1/2” NPT bottom or back connection
l Restrictor screw standard
l 1 1/2” (40mm) - 3-2-3% accuracy, ANSI/ASME Grade B
l 2 1/2” (63mm) - 1.5% accuracy, ANSI/ASME GRADE B
l 4” (100mm) - 1.5% accuracy, ANSI/ASME GRADE B
Applications:
l Pumps, compressors, hydraulic presses & machinery, motors, winches etc. Whenever a
quality liquid filled gauge is required.
How to Order: Specify product code
PRODUCT CODES
1 1/2” 2 1/2" 4” 4”
Dial Size
(40mm) (63mm) (100mm) (100mm)
Back Back Back Back Back Back Back
Connection Bottom Bottom Bottom Bottom Bottom Bottom Bottom
(CB) (CB) (CB) (CB) (CB) (CB) (CB)
Tube,
Socket & Brass Brass Stainless Stainless Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Stainless Stainless Stainless Stainless
Movement
NPT
1/8” 1/8” 1/8” 1/8” 1/4” 1/4” 1/4” 1/2” 1/4” 1/2” 1/4” 1/2” 1/4” 1/2”
Connection
30” Hg
* * Q1200 Q1220 Q801 Q900 Q700 Q1234 Q730 Q1285 Q760 Q1535 Q1260 Q1559
Vacuum/kPa
30”-0-15
* * * * Q790 Q890 Q701 Q1235 Q731 Q1286 Q761 Q1536 Q1261 Q1560
psi/kPa
30”-0-30
* * * * Q798 Q898 Q702 Q1236 Q732 Q1287 Q762 Q1537 Q1262 Q1561
psi/kPa
30”-0-60
* * * * Q799 Q899 Q703 Q1237 Q733 Q1288 Q763 Q1538 Q1263 Q1562
psi/kPa
30”-0-100
* * * * Q791 Q891 Q704 Q1238 Q734 Q1289 Q764 Q1539 Q1264 Q1563
psi/kPa
30”-0-150
* * * * Q792 Q892 Q705 Q1239 Q735 Q1290 Q765 Q1540 Q1265 Q1564
psi/kPa
30”-0-200
* * * * Q794 Q894 Q706 Q1240 Q736 Q1291 Q766 Q1541 Q1266 Q1565
psi/kPa
30”-0-300
* * * * Q795 Q895 Q707 Q1241 Q737 Q1292 Q767 Q1542 Q1267 Q1566
psi/kPa
0-15
* * Q1201 Q1221 Q800 Q901 Q708 Q1242 Q738 Q1293 Q768 Q1543 Q1268 Q1567
psi/kPa
0-30
Q1102 Q1122 Q1202 Q1222 Q802 Q902 Q709 Q1243 Q739 Q1294 Q769 Q1544 Q1269 Q1568
psi/kPa
0-60
Q1103 Q1123 Q1203 Q1223 Q803 Q903 Q710 Q1244 Q740 Q1295 Q770 Q1545 Q1270 Q1569
psi/kPa
0-100
Q1104 Q1124 Q1204 Q1224 Q804 Q904 Q711 Q1245 Q741 Q1296 Q771 Q1546 Q1271 Q1570
psi/kPa
0-160
Q1105 Q1125 Q1205 Q1225 Q805 Q905 Q712 Q1246 Q742 Q1298 Q772 Q1547 Q1272 Q1571
psi/kPa
0-200
Q1106 Q1126 Q1206 Q1226 Q806 Q906 Q713 Q1247 Q743 Q1524 Q773 Q1548 Q1273 Q1572
psi/kPa
0-300
Q1107 Q1127 Q1207 Q1227 Q807 Q907 Q714 Q1248 Q744 Q1525 Q774 Q1549 Q1274 Q1573
psi/kPa
0-400
* * * * Q817 Q917 Q715 Q1249 Q745 Q1526 Q775 Q1550 Q1275 Q1574
http://www.winters.ca/std_lfseries.html 4/20/2004
LF Series Quality Pressure Gauge Page 2 of 2
0-400
* * * * Q817 Q917 Q715 Q1249 Q745 Q1526 Q775 Q1550 Q1275 Q1574
psi/kPa
0-600
Q1108 Q1128 Q1208 Q1228 Q808 Q908 Q716 Q1250 Q746 Q1527 Q776 Q1551 Q1276 Q1575
psi/kPa
0-1000
Q1109 Q1129 Q1209 Q1229 Q809 Q909 Q724 Q717 Q1251 Q747 Q1528 Q777 Q1552 Q1277
psi/kPa
0-1500
Q1110 Q1130 Q1210 Q1230 Q816 Q914 Q725 Q718 Q1252 Q748 Q1529 Q778 Q1553 Q1278
psi/kPa
0-2000
Q1111 Q1131 Q1211 Q1231 Q810 Q910 Q726 Q719 Q1253 Q749 Q1530 Q779 Q1554 Q1279
psi/kPa
0-3000
Q1112 Q1132 Q1212 Q1232 Q811 Q911 Q727 Q720 Q1254 Q750 Q1531 Q780 Q1555 Q1280
psi/kPa
0-5000
Q1113 Q1133 Q1213 Q1233 Q812 Q912 Q728 Q721 Q1255 Q751 Q1532 Q781 Q1556 Q1281
psi/kPa
0-6000
* * * * Q814 Q915 * Q784 * Q785 * Q789 * Q1248
psi/kPa
0-7500
* * * * Q818 Q918 * * * * * * *
psi/kPa
0-10000
* * * * Q813 Q913 Q829 Q722 Q1286 Q752 Q1533 Q782 Q1557 Q1282
psi/kPa
0-15000
* * * * * * * Q723 Q1257 Q753 Q1534 Q783 Q1558 Q1283
psi/kPa
0-20000
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
psi/kPa
Options:
l **1.5” Stainless available in psi only

l Dry = supply above gauge less liquid fill
l 2.5" Brass Connection DRY = supply 2.5" brass connection gauge less liquid fill
l Standard Dry = supply above gauges less liquid fill
l 25UC = 2.5" (63mm) U-Clamp
l 25BF = 2.5" (63mm) Back Flange
l 25FF = 2.5" (63mm) Front Flange
l 4UC = 4" (100mm) U-Clamp
l 4BF = 4" (100mm) Back Flange
l 4FF = 4" (100mm) Front Flange
l SG = Safety glass, all sizes
l Other ranges available upon request.
l CB = Centre Back Connection; LB = Lower Back Connection
l * Available upon request
http://www.winters.ca/std_lfseries.html 4/20/2004
Section 7
Other Literature – Sealant Tape & Caulk

Section 7
Other Literature –Recommended Spare Parts

91 Sawyer Avenue, Tonawanda, NY 14150
Phone: 716-875-2000 ~ Fax: 716-875-1077
Niagara.Parts@alfalaval.com / www.niagarablower.com
Parts Quotation
AM Quotation No.: NBCP 180905-0 REV.0 Submitted by: Paul Pinak

Orig. SO#: 25600 Date Submitted: September 5, 2018
Customer Data:
Company: BUA Group
Address: c/o NOM (UK) LTD. Contact Name: Roberto Sepulveda
Address 2: Kilometer 164 Benin-Okene Road Phone: 234 8113449918
City, State, Zip: Okpella, EDOP state Fax:
Country: Nigeria E-Mail: Roberto.Sepulveda@buagroup.com
Terms:
Quote Validity: 30 Days Est. Lead Time: 8 Wks.
Payment Options: Net 30 = As Quoted Shipping Payment: Prepay & Add
Net 60 = Add 10% Finance Charge FOB Terms: Origin
Sales Tax: Not Included if Applicable
All Payment Options Pending Credit Approval (Send tax exempt form with PO)
Part/Assembly No. Description Price, ea. Qty. Subtotal
SO 25600 001 Fan Motor, 10HP $ 4,275.00 1 $ 4,275.00

SO 25600 002 Fan, 60" dia. $ 1,533.24 1 $ 1,533.24
SO 25600 003 End Suction Spray Pump with Motor $ 7,275.00 1 $ 7,275.00
SO 25600 004 Vibration Transmitter $ 3,660.00 2 $ 7,320.00
SO 25600 005 Temperture Transmitter $ 521.55 1 $ 521.55
SO 25600 006 Pressure Switch $ 821.88 1 $ 821.88
SO 25600 007 Float Valve $ 450.10 1 $ 450.10
SO 25600 008 Pressure Gauge $ 91.29 1 $ 91.29
SO 25600 009 Pump Screen $ 835.41 1 $ 835.41
SO 25600 010 Set of gaskets (1 front & 1 rear) $ 779.15 1 $ 779.15
AM 1600 0005 Spray Nozzles, 3.5BLK $ 8.13 36 $ 292.68
GRAND TOTAL (US$): $ 24,195.30
NIAGARA BLOWER Heat Transfer Solutions Page 1 of 1 9/7/2018

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENGINEERED HEAT TRANSFER SYSTEMS

WET SURFACE AIR COOLER

Model: A4412”L” WSAC

Niagara Blower Co. S.O. No. 25600

NIAGARA BLOWER COMPANY

Prepared By: PHP Date: 9/6/18

Section 1: Handling and Rigging Instructions

Section 1A: Lifting and Rigging Diagram

Section 2: Assembly Instructions

Section 2A: Sealer Tape and Caulk Instructions

Section 2B: Method of Assembly Instructions

Section 2C: Method of Assembly Diagram

Section 3: Installation Instructions

Section 3A: Coil Connection Allowable Loads

Section 4: Operating Instructions

Section 4A: Operator Instructions and Control Principles

Section 5: Maintenance Instructions

Section 5A: WSAC System Maintenance

Section 5B: Replacement Spare Parts – Aftermarket Quotation

Section 6: Equipment Drawings

Section 7: Other Literature

WET SURFACE AIR COOLER

HANDLING AND RIGGING INSTRUCTIONS

1A LIFTING AND RIGGING DIAGRAM – D114884

All Niagara machines are shipped as a complete assembly or in as few

CHECK ALL MATERIAL RECEIVED AGAINST "BILL OF LADING" WITHIN 48

Occasionally, equipment which is shipped F.O.B. Niagara Blower Company

It would be advisable, in cases where shipping damage is noted, to take the

The method of handling the unit, sub-assemblies, or sections will largely be

Suggested lifting technique:

 Each section of this unit should be lifted by a crane only.

4 - LIFTING AND RIGGING - COILS

Instructions for use of special lifting arrangements, if required, are included as an

NOTE THAT WHEN COILS ARE RESTING ON GROUND, THEY MUST BE

WET SURFACE AIR COOLER

2A SEALER TAPE AND CAULK INSTRUCTIONS

2 - SUB-ASSEMBLY AND SECTION NUMBERS

2. "Match Marks" will be provided between corresponding sub-assemblies; i.e.

3 -SUGGESTED TOOLS REQUIRED PER PERSON

4 - APPLICATION OF JOINT GASKET TAPE AND POLYPROPYLENE SEALANT

Material supplied by Niagara Blower Co.:

Fan/Plenum section – above spray level:

Basin section – below spray level:

Unit section alignment using drift pins:

5 - CENTRIFUGAL FAN SUB-ASSEMBLIES – (IF APPLICABLE)

6 - INTAKE AND DISCHARGE AIR DUCTS - (IF APPLICABLE)

3. Install and uniformly tighten all anchor bolts.

6. Uniformly tighten all joint hardware to approximately 35 ft-lbs.

3 - PAN WATER MAKEUP VALVE

4 -PAN OVERFLOW AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS

Install a shutoff valve at the pan drains and blowdown connections.

7 - SPRAY FAILURE ALARM SWITCH PIPING – (IF APPLICABLE)

Figure 2A INSTALLATION of SPRAY

FRP Cable Gland

1/4” Half Coupling

1. Wire no smaller the #14 for line voltage (115/230/46OV).

2. Wire no smaller than #18 for low voltage (24V).

5. Splices are not permitted in conduit runs except at junction boxes.

CONTROLS AND MOTORS ON EQUIPMENT INSTALLED OUTDOORS OR IN REFRIGERATED ROOMS

10 – ELECTRIC PAN HEATER WIRING – (IF APPLICABLE)

Prior to shipment, each unit is factory performance and leak tested.

12 - CASING INSULATION – (IF REQUIRED)

For bundles that ARE nitrogen charged: